Home

Getting Started with LibreOffice 3.5

Contents

1. Standard toolbar Formatting toolbar il i Pagel 1 Default English USA INSRT STD E Br E Figure 64 The main Writer workspace in Print Layout view 80 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Status bar The Writer status bar provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some document features ifi Default English USA INSRT STD l Page Page Language Insert Selection Unsaved number style mode mode changes Figure 65 Left end of status bar Page number Shows the current page number the sequence number of the current page if different and the total number of pages in the document For example if you restarted page numbering at 1 on the third page its page number is 1 and its sequence number is 3 If any bookmarks have been defined in the document a right click on this field pops up a list of bookmarks click on the required one To jump to a specific page in the document double click on this field The Navigator opens Click in the Page Number field and type the sequence number of the required page After a brief delay the display jumps to the selected page Page style Shows the style of the current page To change the page style right click on this field A list of page styles pops up choose a different style by clicking on it To edit the current page style double click on this field The Page Style
2. Figure 172 Options toolbar Choosing and defining colors To display the Color bar use View gt Toolbars gt Color Bar The toolbar appears at the bottom of the workspace and displays the current color palette This toolbar lets you rapidly choose the color of the various objects lines areas and 3D effects The first box in the panel corresponds to invisible no color lt EREEEEEE RC EE 6D UPR ST COURRRRRREEE 10 Figure 173 Color bar Te Bl hc Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 185 Area Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Properties Name Color Red 1 Table standard A e ae g o e CMYK A Delete _ e m z lt gt EEE o Tt Th Ta M 80 a B O zo baa aa ERR Y 60 O Embed Ls e K 0 LL a i Cancel Help Reset Figure 174 Changing the color palette You can access several specialized color palettes in Draw as well as change individual colors to your own taste This is done using the Area dialog by selecting Format gt Area on the main menu bar or the Area icon A on the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 170 then selecting the Colors tab Figure 174 To load another palette click on the Load Color List icon Ej The file selector dialog asks you to choose one of the standard LibreOffice pale
3. cccccsecceseceseceeeceseceeeseeesueecueeceeeceeeceeeseeeseeeseness 323 Saving Impress presentations AS web PAGES cccceccseccceecceeceeeeseecseeeeeeseeeeeueseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeees 324 Saving Draw documents AS web PAGES cccceccceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseesseeseeeseeeseeseeeeseeees 327 Chapter 13 Getting Started with MaCrOS s sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 329 Ao go aah 6 6 A E EE AES E EA EA E A AAIE EE ee AAE one re cee eee 330 creating tect eather AEE 335 Sometimes the macro recorder fallS cccccccecccececeeccecccecceeccceeceaeceeeeeaeseuecaeeseseseeeseseseeesaees 338 POC ANN IOs cesses eco E AE EET E E T E OE E EE E A 339 BPE enk ST E a E e T E N E E A IEE E E E 344 O E E AT 348 Writing macros without the PECONGC tec ccc cs sescmednncdeetetastetiesacteiendbieeieteessesesegacdedinlantdieatacdaebcndeees 348 Finding more UOT AUN cis cecetens Seteccec cannes ae doeiecSauemsbaeseoase lex tuigaen peetunsecewedanmncnacatanieneoacielectusceuac net 349 Chapter 14 CUSTOMIZINO LIDE TNC ia gorse maces rh eet ozawncsa ccsenuad a 351 Agga OIEI n a e EE EEEE PET ET E EE EEEE EAEE E E A EE E E EE EE E 352 PSO PC MENU COME errepira RE R aparece 352 customizing 50016 La gt See ee ee aaia ieie aa aiai 355 Assigning M188 400 KEYS eee a ee ee eee eee eee 358 Assigning WY SMS oa cecesesesceczzaszenscesenatennsabaceed Aigtaarsacmiencesaanpeddectpasomest
4. Figure 163 A comment Type or paste your comment into the text box You can optionally apply some basic formatting to the comment by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the pop up menu From this menu you can apply formatting to selected text delete the current comment delete all comments from the same author or delete all comments in the presentation You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the slide Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment To show or hide the comment markers choose View gt Comments Select Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color for their comments Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 177 Setting up the slide show As mentioned in Modifying the slide show on page 165 Impress allocates reasonable default settings for slide shows while at the same time allowing for customizing many aspects of the slide show experience This section covers only some aspects advanced techniques are explained in Chapter 9 Slide Shows in the Impress Guide Most of the tasks are best done in Slide Sorter view where you can see most of the slides simultaneously Choose View gt Slide Sorter from the menu bar or click the Slide Sorter tab at the
5. 190 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Freeform lines Using the Freeform Line tools is similar to drawing with a pencil on paper Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor to the line shape you require It is not necessary to end the drawing with a double click just release the mouse button and the drawing is completed If Freeform Line Filled is selected the end point is joined automatically to the start point and the object is filled with the appropriate color Adding text To activate the text tool click on the Text icon T for horizontal text or the Vertical Text icon f for vertical script If the Vertical Text icon is not visible check that the option Enabled for Asian languages has been selected in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages The Text Formatting toolbar appears Figure 171 on page 185 when the Text icon is selected from this toolbar you can select font type font size and other text properties before you start typing your text After activating the Text command click at the location where you want to position the text A small text frame appears containing only the cursor This frame can be moved like any other object A text frame is also dynamic and grows as you enter text Observe the information field in the status bar it shows that you are editing text and also provides details about the current cursor location using paragraph row and column numbers A TEETER EDEEE E
6. Category Format Language All B General English UK sa User defined Ta 1234 O A Number 1234 12 Fercent 1 234 Currency 1 234 12 Date 1 234 12 Time Scientific 1 234 57 Options Decimal places 2 5 Negative numbers red Leading zeroes 1 fe Thousands separator Format code 20 00 RED 70 00 User defined Figure 129 Format Cells gt Numbers Formatting the font To quickly choose the font used in a cell select the cell then click the arrow next to the Font Name box on the Formatting toolbar and choose a font from the list To choose whether to show the font names in their font or in plain text go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt View and select or deselect the Show preview of fonts option in the Font Lists section For more information see Chapter 2 Setting Up LibreOffice To choose the size of the font click the arrow next to the Font Size box on the Formatting toolbar For other formatting you can use the Bold Italic or Underline icons Automatic To choose a font color click the arrow next to the Font Color icon to display the color palette Click on the desired color To define custom colors use Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Colors See Chapter 2 To specify the language of the cell useful because it allows different languages to exist in the same document and be spell checked correctly use the Font tab of th
7. This line contains manual line breaks Lines can be spaced out this way Also the cell width doesnt change but the text can go on C Figure 126 Cell with manual line breaks Shrinking text to fit the cell The font size of the data in a cell can automatically adjust to fit in a cell To do this select the Shrink to fit cell size option in the Format Cells dialog Figure 124 Figure 127 shows the results 2 3 The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog the quickbrows te limps over the cyclo 4 Figure 127 Shrinking font size to fit cells Formatting numbers Several different number formats can be applied to cells by using icons on the Formatting toolbar Select the cell then click the relevant icon ETELE Figure 128 Number format icons Left to right currency percentage date exponential standard add decimal place delete decimal place For more control or to select other number formats use the Numbers tab Figure 129 of the Format Cells dialog e Apply any of the data types in the Category list to the data e Control the number of decimal places and leading zeros e Enter a custom format code The Language setting controls the local settings for the different formats such as the date order and the currency marker Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 135 Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection
8. A Adding a command to a menu You can add commands to the supplied menus and to menus you have created On the Customize dialog select the menu in the Menu list and click the Add button in the Menu Content section of the dialog On the Add Commands dialog Figure 349 select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence dd Commands To add a command to a menu select the category and then the command You can also drag the command to the Commands list of the Menus tab page in the Customise dialogue box Category Commands o Apiai AboutLibreoffice ial Add Templates al AutoPilot Address Data Sour are AutoPilot Presentation i Options l Bibliography Database BASIC F Create HTML Document Insert Create Master Document ee Edit Macros Format ET Ea Navigate xI Controls Extended Tips Table es Help i Drawing Sik N Graphic iw lt i gt Description Displays general program information such as version number and copyrights Figure 349 Adding a command to a menu 354 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Modifying menu entries In addition to changing the sequence of entries on a menu or submenu you can add submenus rename or dele
9. Figure 345 Assign macro to the document open event Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 347 Select the desired macro and click OK to assign the macro to the event The Events tab shows that the event has been assigned to a macro see Figure 346 When the document opens the PrintHello macro is run Many objects in a document can be set to call macros when events occur The most common usage is to add a control such as a button into a document Even double clicking on a graphic opens a dialog with a Macros tab that allows you to assign a macro to an event Assign Start Application Close Application Document created New Document Document loading finished Open Document 2 TestLibrary Module1 HelloMacro Document is going to be closed Figure 346 HelloMacro is assigned to the Open Document event Extensions An extension is a package that can be installed into LibreOffice to add new functionality Extensions can be written in almost any programming language and may be simple or sophisticated Extensions can be grouped into types e Calc Add Ins which provide new functionality for Calc including new functions that act like normal built in functions e New components and functionality which normally include some level of UI integration such as new menus or toolbars e Data pilots that are used directly in Calc e Chart Add Ins with new chart types e Linguistic components such as spell checkers e Docume
10. LibreOffice Version 3 5 Getting Started LibreOffice is a registered trademark of The Document Foundation Further information available at www libreoffice org Copyright This document is Copyright 2010 2012 by its contributors as listed below You may distribute it and or modify it under the terms of either the GNU General Public License http www gnu org licenses gpl html version 3 or later or the Creative Commons Attribution License http creativecommons org licenses by 3 0 version 3 0 or later Contributors Jean Hollis Weber Jeremy Cartwright Ron Faile Jr Martin Fox Dan Lewis David Michel Andrew Pitonyak Hazel Russman Peter Schofield John A Smith Laurent Balland Poirier Cover art Drew Jensen Christoph Noack Klaus Jurgen Weghorn Jean Hollis Weber Acknowledgements This book is adapted and updated from Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 The contributors to that book are listed on page 13 Feedback Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to documentation global libreoffice org Publication date and software version Published 10 September 2012 Based on LibreOffice 3 5 6 Documentation for LibreOffice is available at http www libreoffice org get help documentation Contents B10 Oh 8 eer Meee ence ee eee eR Tm em Rete Pre eet tee een te ee nee ree eee ere ee eee et eee 2 ASSES gal Fs ea Sc os aN mere ee meer ae ee ee eee 8 FN Se rece E E A OE cians sa
11. Manual hyphenation To manually hyphenate words do not use a normal hyphen which will remain visible even if the word is no longer at the end of a line when you add or delete text or change margins or font size Instead use a conditional hyphen which is visible only when required To insert a conditional hyphen inside a word click where you want the hyphen to appear and press Ctrlthyphen The word will be hyphenated at this position when it is at the end of the line even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off Formatting pages Writer provides several ways for you to control page layouts page styles columns frames tables and sections For more information see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Page layout is usually easier if you show text object table and section boundaries in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Appearance and paragraph ends tabs breaks and other items in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Writer gt Formatting Aids Which layout method to choose The best layout method depends on what the final document should look like and what sort of information will be in the document Here are some examples For a book similar to this user guide with one column of text some figures without text beside them and some other figures with descriptive text use page styles for basic layout and tables to place figures beside descriptive text when necessary Whetdoe
12. A special case for Calc is opening and saving comma separated values CSV files which are text files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet Each line in a CSV file represents a row ina spreadsheet Commas semicolons or other characters are used to separate the cells Text is entered in quotation marks numbers are entered without quotation marks Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 113 Opening a CSV file To open a CSV file in Calc 1 Choose File gt Open 2 Locate the CSV file that you want to open 3 Ifthe file has a csv extension select the file and click Open 4 Ifthe file has another extension for example txt select the file select Text CSV csv txt xIs in the File type box you will have to scroll down some distance to find it and then click Open 5 On the Text Import dialog Figure 100 select the Separator options to divide the text in the file into columns You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the dialog Right click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column If the CSV file uses a text delimiter character that is not in the Text delimiter list click in the Text delimiter box and type the character 6 Click OK to open the file Text Import sample csv Import Character set Unicode UTF 8 Language Default English Australia baal From row 1 Separator options Fixed width Separated by E Tab C E Other Sem
13. Friday May 25 2007 6 430 704 2 778 7 74 5 11 59 9 4 Friday May 25 2007 19 570 778 7 1032 3 253 6 12 96 2 7 9 Saturday May 26 2007 15 150 1032 3 1239 4 207 1 13 67 16 T T Figure 266 Query run with a hidden column Step 10 Close save and name the query My suggestion for a name is Fuel Economy There are obviously other calculations that can be made in this query such as cost per distance traveled and how much of the cost belongs to each of the payment types To fully use queries requires a knowledge of set operations unions intersections and or complements and any combinations of these Having a copy of the HSQLDB User Guide available from http hsqldb org is also extremely useful Creating reports Reports provide information found in the database arranged in a useful way In this respect they are similar to queries Reports are generated from the database s tables views or queries All reports are based upon a single table view or query so you need first to decide what fields you want to use in the report If you want to use fields from different tables you must first combine these fields in a single query or view Then you can create a report from this For example a report on vacation expenses includes both fuel costs and meal costs These values are contained in fields of two different tables Vacations and Fuel So this report requires you to create a query or view Dynamic reports update
14. Selecting items in a sheet or spreadsheet Selecting cells Cells can be selected in a variety of combinations and quantities Single cell Left click in the cell The result will look like the left side of Figure 103 You can verify your selection by looking in the Name box Range of contiguous cells A range of cells can be selected using the keyboard or the mouse To select a range of cells by dragging the mouse 1 Click in a cell 2 Press and hold down the left mouse button 3 Move the mouse around the screen 4 Once the desired block of cells is highlighted release the left mouse button To select a range of cells without dragging the mouse 1 Click in the cell which is to be one corner of the range of cells 2 Move the mouse to the opposite corner of the range of cells 3 Hold down the Shift key and click To select a range of cells without using the mouse 1 Select the cell that will be one of the corners in the range of cells 2 While holding down the Shift key use the cursor arrows to select the rest of the range The result of any of these methods looks like the right side of Figure 103 You can also directly select a range of cells using the Name box Click into the Name Box as described in Using a cell reference on page 115 To select a range of cells enter the cell reference for the upper left hand cell followed by a colon and then the lower right hand cell reference For example to select the range
15. from the Tools menu _ Hide formula and specify Sheet Print _ Hide when printing The cells selected will be omitted when printing Figure 131 Hiding or showing cells Outline group controls If you are continually hiding and showing the same cells you can simplify the process by creating outline groups which add a set of controls for hiding and showing the cells in the group that are quick to use and always available If the contents of cells falls into a regular pattern such as four cells followed by a total then you can use Data gt Group and Outline gt AutoOutline to have Calc add outline controls based on the pattern Otherwise you can set outline groups manually by selecting the cells for grouping then Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 139 choosing Data gt Group and Outline gt Group On the Group dialog you can choose whether to group the selected cells by rows or columns When you close the dialog the outline group controls are visible between either the row or column headers and the edges of the editing window The controls resemble the tree structure of a file manager in appearance and can be hidden by selecting Data gt Outline gt Hide Details They are Strictly for on screen use and do not print Figure 132 Outline group controls The basic outline controls have plus or minus signs at the start of the group to show or hide hidden cells However if outline groups are nested the
16. with these steps 1 Choose Insert gt Cross reference from the menu bar 2 On the Cross references tab Figure 289 under Type select Text 3 Under Selection select the equation number 4 Under Insert reference to select Reference 5 Click Insert If you later add more equations to the paper before the referenced equation all the equations will automatically renumber and the cross references will update To insert the equation number without parentheses around it choose Numbering instead of Reference under Insert reference to 5 Fields Document Cross references Functions Docinformation Variables Database Type Selection Set Reference Insert Reference Headings Numbered Paragraphs Text Figure Bookmarks Footnotes Insert reference to Page Chapter Reference Above Below As Page Style Category and Number Caption Text Numbering Figure 289 Inserting a cross reference to an equation number Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 271 The AutoText inserted as a result of the above procedure consists of a 1x2 table The left cell contains the formula and the right one the number The number is an automatic counter named Text You can edit the AutoText if for example you prefer square rather than round brackets or if you want formula and number to be separated by tabs rather than formatted as a table Read the section on Using AutoText in Chapter 3 Working with Text in the Writer Guide
17. 4 Select how the presentation will be used under Select an output medium Most often presentations are created for computer screen display Select Screen You can change the page format at any time The Screen page is optimized for a 4 3 display 28cm x 21cm so it is not suitable for modern widescreen displays You can change the slide size at any time switching to Normal view and selecting Format gt Page 5 Click Next The Presentation Wizard step 3 appears Figure 151 e Choose the desired slide transition from the Effect drop down menu Select the desired speed for the transition between the different slides in the presentation from the Speed drop down menu Medium is a good choice for now 6 Click Create A new presentation is created 160 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Presentation Wizard Select a slide transition Effect es Speed Medium Select the presentation type HH_ ___ Default Automatic Duration of page oo 00 10 Duration of pause 00 00 10 v Preview Show logo Figure 151 Selecting a slide transition effect You can accept the default values for both Effect and Speed unless you are skilled at creating presentations Both of these values can be changed later while working with Slide transitions and animations These two features are explained in more detail in Chapter 9 Slide Shows of the Impres
18. 5 31 1 6 46 5 46 ei Slide 1 5 First Slide _ 76 Information Area Cursor Position Page Slide Style Unsaved Changes Zoom Percentage Digital Signature Figure 140 Status bar From left to right you will find e Information area changes depending on the selection For example Example selection Examples of information shown Text area Text Edit Paragraph x Row y Column z Charts spreadsheets Embedded object OLE ObjectName selected Graphics Bitmap with transparency selected e Cursor position the position of the cursor or of the top left corner of the selection measured from the top left corner of the slide followed by the width and height of the selection or text box where the cursor is located e Unsaved changes a flag indicating that the file needs saving Double clicking on this flag opens the file save dialog Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 153 e Digital signature a flag indicating whether the document is digitally signed After the file has been saved double clicking on this flag opens the digital signatures dialog e Slide number the slide number currently displayed in the Workspace and the total number of slides in the presentation e Page slide style the style associated with the slide handout or notes page currently in the Workspace Double clicking on the style name opens the slide design dialog e Zoom slider adjusts the
19. Figure 221 Selected fields in a relationship 5 Modifying the Update options and Delete options section of the Relation window a Right click the line connecting the Date fields in the two table lists to open a menu b Select Edit to open the Relations dialog Figure 222 Update options Delete options l No action J No action Update cascade Delete cascade Set null C Set null Set default C Set default OK Cancel Help Figure 222 Update options and Delete options section c Select Update cascade 222 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 d Select Delete cascade e Click OK to close the Relations dialog and choose File gt Save to save the Relation Design window While these options are not strictly necessary they do help Having them selected permits you to update a table that has a relationship defined with another table which has been modified It also permits you to delete a field from the table without causing inconsistencies Creating a database form Databases are used to store data But how is the data put into the database Forms are used to do this In the language of databases a form is a front end for data entry and editing Uae FuellD Thursday apri 12 2007 G 0 Bir april 12 2007 Fuel Purchases FuelCost FuelQuanity Udometer PaymentType Figure 223 Fields of a simple form Figure 224 Simple form with additions A simple form consists of the fields from a table
20. File name 0201WG3 Introducing Writer ae File type ODF Text Document odt w ODF Text Document odt i ODF Text Document Template ott OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document sxw OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP doc NS Edit filter settings Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 5 0 sdw StarWriter 5 0 Template vor _ Cancel El Save with passwe Figure 71 Saving a file in Microsoft Word format From this point on all changes you make to the document will occur only in the new document You have changed the name and file type of your document If you want to go back to working with the odt version of your document you must open it again 84 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 To have Writer save documents by default in the Microsoft Word file format go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General In the section named Default file format and ODF settings under Document type select Text document then under Always save as select your preferred file format Working with text Working with text selecting copying pasting moving in Writer is similar to working with text in any other program LibreOffice also has some convenient ways to select items that are not next to each other select a vertical block of text and paste unformatted text Select
21. If tooltips are not enabled choose Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt General gt Help and select the Tips option If the Extended tips option is also selected you will get more detailed tooltip information but the tooltip names themselves will not be provided 162 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 To select or change the layout place the slide in the work area and select the desired layout from the layout drawer in the Task Pane Several layouts contain one or more content boxes Each of these boxes can be configured to contain one of the following elements Text Media clip Picture Chart or Table You can choose the type of contents by clicking on the corresponding icon that is displayed in the middle of the contents box as shown in Figure 153 If instead you intend to use the contents box for text just click anywhere on the box to get a cursor Click to add title e Click to add text Insert Table Insert Chart Insert Picture Insert Movie Figure 153 Selecting contents type To select or change the layout place the slide in the work area and select the desired layout from the layout drawer in the Task Pane If you have selected a layout with one or more contents boxes this is a good time to decide what type of contents you want to insert Modifying the slide elements At this stage the slide contains elements that were included in the slide master as well those elements included in the selected sl
22. Math is LibreOffice s component for writing mathematical and chemical equations It is most commonly used as an equation editor for text documents but it can also be used with other types of documents or stand alone When used inside Writer the equation is treated as an object inside the text document The equation editor is for writing equations in symbolic form as in equation 1 If you want to evaluate a numeric value see the Calc Guide df x i973 X n x tan x 1 or NH H O NH OH Getting started You can create an equation formula as a separate document or insert it into a document in Writer or another component of LibreOffice Creating an equation as a separate document To create an equation as a separate document open the Math component of LibreOffice using one of these methods e On the menu bar choose File gt New gt Formula e On the standard toolbar click the triangle to the left of the New icon and choose Formula e From the Start Center click Formula An empty formula document opens see Figure 272 a ta Fa na a b a b axb a b aab a b E a b a b avb deb Figure 272 An empty formula document Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 255 The upper area is the preview window where the equation will appear during and after input The lower area is the equation editor where the markup code for the equation is entered The floating Elements window w
23. Notice that not all of the last column label is visible because some of the labels are long We can fix this problem by using an alias for many of the fields The labels are replaced by their aliases 2 Add Aliases Type in the aliases as they are listed in Figure 263 FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading End Reading Quanity Begin End Fuel Economy End Reading End Reading Fuel Figure 263 Query table with aliases added 3 Run the query again The results are in Figure 264 Quantity FuelEconomy Fuel Cost Cents per mile End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD T 9 4 6 430 704 2 778 7 74 5 11 59 19 570 178 7 1032 3 253 6 12 96 20 7 9 1 15 150 1032 3 1239 4 207 1 13 67 16 T T 1 Figure 264 Query run with aliases We really do not need the column showing the difference between the FuellD fields from the table and query so we will hide it While it will not be visible it will still be used in the calculations 4 Hide a column that does not need to be seen Remove the check in the box of the Visible cell as in Figure 265 Date FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Quanity Begin End Fuel End Reading Fuel End Reading amp 6 amp amp Figure 265 Making a field invisible in a query run 248 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 5 Rerun the query Figure 266 Date Quantity Begn End Distance FuelEconomy FuelCost Centspermie
24. Number NUMERIC Field Properties m Figure 217 Changing field properties Format Alignment Category All User defined Number Percent Currency Date Time Scientitic Options Decimal places Leading zeroes 1234 00 USD Format USD English USA Language English USA ial 1 234 00 USD 1 234 1 234 00 1 234 1 234 00 1 234 1 234 57 Negative numbers red gt 2 zi il Thousands separator ki Figure 218 Field Format options 4 field 5 6 table To access additional formatting options click the button to the right of the Format example Description can be anything or can be left blank To save and close the table choose File gt Save Name the table Fuel Close the Fuel Follow the same steps to create the Vacations table The fields and their field types are listed in Figure 219 Make sure you make the Date field the primary key before closing Right click the gray box to the left of Date and select Primary key from the menu Save the table and name it Vacations Close the Vacations table 220 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 FieldName Field Type one Date DATE Odometer Number NUMERIC Odometer reading Motel Number NUMERIC rolls Number NUMERIC total tolls Breakfast Number NUMERIC BPayment Text VARCHAR payment type lunch Number NUMERIC iE LPayment
25. To copy styles from a file that is not open click the File button When you return to this dialog both lists show the selected file as well as all the currently open documents 3 Open the folders and find your chosen source and destination templates Double click on the name of the template or document and then double click the Styles icon to show the list of individual styles Figure 53 4 To copy a style hold down the Ctrl key and drag the name of the style from one list to the other If you do not hold down the Control key when dragging the style will be moved from one list to the other rather than copied The style will be deleted from the list you are dragging it from 64 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 5 Repeat for each style you want to copy If the receiving template or document has many styles you may not see any change unless you scroll down in the list When you are finished click Close Template Management T LibOTextBody 0102GS3 SettingUpLibo T LibQHeading 1 0103653 StylesAndT emplates 3 T LibQHeading 2 0103G53 StylesTemplatesLO_JH Cire ice ome T LibOHeading 0 Untitled T LibOGuideName z Untitled LibOPageBreak H Delp T LibOToCHead T LibOFooter T Contents 1 Contents 2 T LibOTip Note Caution T LibOTableText T LibOTableCaption Gi LibOTableHeader Address Book Documents Documents File Figure 53 Copying a styl
26. Using conditional formatting You can set up cell formats to change depending on conditions that you specify For example ina table of numbers you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red Conditional formatting depends upon the use of styles and the AutoCalculate feature Tools gt Cell Contents gt AutoCalculate must be enabled See Chapter 2 Entering Editing and Formatting Data in the Calc Guide for details Hiding and showing data When elements are hidden they are neither visible nor printed but can still be selected for copying if you select the elements around them For example if column B is hidden it is copied when you select columns A and C When you need a hidden element again you can reverse the process and show the element To hide or show sheets rows and columns use the options on the Format menu or the right click context menu For example to hide a row first select the row and then choose Format gt Row gt Hide or right click and choose Hide To hide or show selected cells choose Format gt Cells from the menu bar or right click and choose Format Cells On the Format Cells dialog go to the Cell Protection tab Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Protection Hide all Cell protection is only effective after the current i zi ey sheet has been protected Protecte Select Protect Document
27. am slides Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter D LibreOffice Use the masa pages bemg the bass for the default sides would be useful to adi A ol pele a fie to the footer Add itvie Insert Page Mumber Footer a late Use te LireOfice Color Palete delivered wit Librete LiteOfice Degn Team Version 2001 00 16 Production lkem L iraak Per abr ELEAN Lkmik L iraak Pen a bT ergi narra ri Pre defined Shapes oe ches 0 ue Aaa copy iher the Ubo DET Tou rep ald ur code ererplea Hi ale deem buh Ggulpul hmm j i 3 7 7 L bree rr a hT ergue iarra ri i L Lire 2 Pen gk erg oh Figure 147 Slide Sorter view Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 157 Customizing Slide Sorter view To change the number of slides per row 1 Check View gt Toolbars gt Slide Sorter and Slide View to show or hide the slide sorter and view toolbars Figure 148 2 Adjust the number of slides up to a maximum of 15 Ma Gil a Ml Rslides K Figure 148 Slide Sorter and Slide View toolbars Moving a slide using Slide Sorter To move a Slide in a presentation in the Slide Sorter 1 Click the slide and the slide is highlighted see Figure 147 2 Drag and drop it to the location you want Selecting and moving groups of slides To select a group of slides use one of these methods e Use the Control Ctrl key Click on the first slide and while pressing the Control key select
28. dispatcher executeDispatch document uno WordRightSel 0 Array rem 8 Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Copy 0 Array rem 9 Press End to move the cursor to the end of the line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToEndOfLine 0 Array rem 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 2 2 2 ne ne ene eee eee eee eee dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 11 Press Home to move the cursor to the start of the line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Array rem 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Paste 0 Array rem 13 Press Backspace to remove the extra space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 337 rem 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name dim argsi7 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args17 0 Name Text args17 0 Value CHR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args17 rem 15 Press Home to move to the start of the line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Arr
29. hyperlinks and controls This option can increase file sizes significantly e Create PDF form Submit format Choose the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file This setting overrides the control s URL property that you set in the document 288 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 There is only one common setting valid for the whole PDF document PDF sends the whole document FDF sends the control contents HTML and XML Most often you will choose the PDF format e Export bookmarks Exports headings in Writer documents and page or slide names in Impress and Draw documents as bookmarks a table of contents list displayed by most PDF viewers including Adobe Reader e Export comments Exports comments as PDF notes You may not want this e Export automatically inserted blank pages If selected automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF This is best if you are printing the PDF double sided For example books usually have chapters set to always start on an odd numbered right hand page When the previous chapter ends on an odd page LibreOffice inserts a blank page between the two odd pages This option controls whether to export that blank page e Embed standard fonts Normally the 14 standard PostScript fonts are not embedded in a PDF file because PDF reader software already contains these fonts However you can choose to embed these fonts in all PDF documents created by LibreOffice to en
30. selection Right click Control click Open a context menu Ctrl Control d Command Used with other keys F5 Shift d F5 Open the Navigator F11 dot Open the Styles and Formatting window Preface 11 What are all these things called The terms used in LibreOffice for most parts of the user interface the parts of the program you see and use in contrast to the behind the scenes code that actually makes it work are the same as for most other programs A dialog is a special type of window Its purpose is to inform you of something or request input from you or both It provides controls for you to use to specify how to carry out an action The technical names for common controls are shown in Figure 1 not shown is the list box from which you select an item In most cases we do not use the technical terms in this book but it is useful to know them because the Help and other sources of information often use them In most cases you can interact only with the dialog not the document itself as long as the dialog remains open When you close the dialog after use usually clicking OK or another button saves your changes and closes the dialog then you can again work with your document Some dialogs can be left open as you work so you can switch back and forth between the dialog and your document An example of this type is the Find amp Replace dialog page style Default Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sh
31. x j p3 r i x CTY LIY PA CTY Pa Y PA X gt i as hy Oa gt r 7 d i f f Wine Tas lt 5 St pe uel D y 7 y s s Ma j a PA F p ji j F f j 7 4 r e 4 A P ra j d pe 4 J m s d me Z E a pe xt DESA Yr VIS Yu LA ase BE NS at BE NS ABE Ne a BE Ne ABE Ne a8 f Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer PaymentType eA ALPS a hy f h XYP A E SA d KJS Oo r ra r a 7 A pyp EM I yy FTM i amn p a A py z y mmn bA Pa Figure 237 Finished for Step 10 Change the tab order The Tab key moves the cursor from field to field This is much easier to do than to click each field to enter data into it It also permits us to group our expenses into areas before we begin entering data For example all of our meal receipts can be grouped together as can our snacks and also our fuel purchases Figure 238 Form Design toolbar with Activation Order icon circled 1 Control click the Date field 2 Click the Form Design icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Form Design toolbar Figure 238 or choose View gt Toolbar gt Form Design to open this toolbar 3 Click the Activation Order icon circled 4 Rearrange the order of the fields in the Tab Order window a Find the txtMPayment listing near the bottom of the list and click it b Click the Move Up button until txtPayment is just below fmtMotel c Use the same two steps to put the fields in the same
32. 6 Enter general information such as Title and HTML Metadata information Click Next gt Steps sd Enter general information for your web site 1 Introduction Title Test Website 2 Documents 3 Main layout HTML Metadata 4 Layout details Description Test Data 5 Style E mail 6 Web site information Copyright notice 7 Preview Created 26 05 05 Modified 26 05 05 7 Chose where to save the file and preview the page if you wish Click Finish Steps Where do you want to publish your web site 1 Introduction Click Preview to see a preview in your browser 2 Documents Preview 3 Main layout Publish the new web site To 4 local Folder 4 Layout details C Documents and Settings Jean Hollis WeberiMy Documents My Websites 5 Style To a ZIP archive 6 Web site information 7 Preview L Publishing via FTP Proxy is nok supported Save settings recommended Save as Web Wizard Settings 1 a To edit or view the document s underlying HTML code open the document and then choose View gt HTML Source or click the HTML Source icon on the Main toolbar Saving Calc spreadsheets as web pages Calc can save files as HTML documents As for Writer choose File gt Save As and select HTML Document or choose File gt Wizards gt Web Page If the file contains more than one sheet the additional sheets will follow one another in the HTML file Links to each sheet will be placed at the to
33. Artn ril Active Link Active link Visited link visited Link ae 9 Click Create to generate the HTML files If this is a new design a small dialog pops up If you might want to reuse this design you can give it a name and save it Otherwise click Do Not Save Name HTML Design Do Not Save Saving Draw documents as web pages Exporting drawings from LibreOffice s Draw application is similar to exporting a presentation from Impress Choose File gt Export and select HTML Document as the file type When using the wizard you can choose to create the web page at any time by clicking the Create button Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 327 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros Using the Macro Recorder and Beyond Your first macros A macro is a saved sequence of commands or keystrokes that are stored for later use An example of a simple macro is one that types your address The LibreOffice macro language is very flexible allowing automation of both simple and complex tasks Macros are especially useful to repeat a task the same way over and over again LibreOffice macros are usually written in a language called LibreOffice Basic or just abbreviated Basic Although you can learn Basic and write macros there is a steep learning curve to writing macros from scratch The usual methods for a beginner are to add macros that someone else has written and to use the built in m
34. As you perform the steps of the wizard it applies these steps to the Report Builder You will not be directly using the Report Builder in these steps 250 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Step 1 Field selection 1 Select Table Vacations in the Tables or Queries drop down list 2 Use the gt to move these fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Date Motel Tolls Miscellaneous Breakfast Lunch Supper and SnackCost Click Next Tables or queries Table Vacations gt Available fields Fields in report Odometer Date BPayment Motel LPayment gt Tolls SPayment Miscellaneous SnackNo gt gt Breakfast Lunch MPayment Supper MiscNotes SnackCost MiscPayment cai Figure 267 Adding fields to a report Step 2 Labeling fields Change any field labels you wish We will shorten Miscellaneous to Misc and make SnackCost into two words 1 Shorten Miscellaneous to Misc 2 Add a space to separate SnackCost into Snack Cost 3 Click Next Report Wizard Steps How do you want to label the fields 1 Field selection Field Label Motel Motel 3 Grouping 4 Sort options Tolls Tolls 5 Choose layout T l 6 Create report citi jis Breakfast Breakfast Lunch Lunch Supper Supper SnackCost Snack Cost Figure 268 Giving aliases to fields Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 251 Step 3 Grouping Since we are grouping by the date use the gt button to move the
35. Edit gt Sheet gt Select then enter the information in the current one This technique overwrites any information that is already in the cells on the other sheets without any warning For this reason when you are finished be sure to A deselect all the sheets except the one you want to edit Ctr click on a sheet tab to select or deselect the sheet Validating cell contents When creating spreadsheets for other people to use you may want to make sure they enter data that is valid or appropriate for the cell You can also use validation in your own work as a guide to entering data that is either complex or rarely used Fill series and selection lists can handle some types of data but they are limited to predefined information To validate new data entered by a user select a cell and use Data gt Validity to define the type of contents that can be entered in that cell For example a cell might require a date or a whole number with no alphabetic characters or decimal points or a cell may not be left empty Depending on how validation is set up the tool can also define the range of contents that can be entered and provide help messages that explain the content rules you have set up for the cell and what users should do when they enter invalid content You can also set the cell to refuse invalid content accept it with a warning or start a macro when an error is entered See Chapter 2 Entering Editing and Formatting Data i
36. For example Alt T G opens the Gallery menu item in the menu Tools Esc Closes an open menu Controlling dialogs When you open any dialog one element Such as a button an option field an entry in a list box or a checkbox is highlighted or indicated by a dotted box around the field or button name This element is said to have the focus on it Shortcut Keys Result Enter Activates selected button In most cases where no button is selected Enter is equivalent to clicking OK Closes dialog without saving any changes made while it was open Esc In most cases Esc is equivalent to clicking Cancel When an open drop down list is selected Esc closes the list Spacebar Checks an empty checkbox Clears a checked checkbox Up down arrow keys Moves focus up and down a list Increases or decreases value of a variable Moves focus vertically within a section of dialog Left right arrow keys Moves focus horizontally within a section of a dialog Tab Advances focus to the next section or element of a dialog Shift Tab Returns focus to the previous section or element in a dialog Alt Down Arrow Shows items in a drop down list Getting help Shortcut Keys Result Opens the LibreOffice Help dialog In LibreOffice Help jumps to the F1 first help page of the selected tab Turns the cursor into the What s This question mark Shows the tip Shift F1 for an item underneath the cursor S
37. For example you may be writing a book with each chapter in a separate file Chapter 1 may start with page 1 but Chapter 2 could begin with page 25 and Chapter 3 with page 51 Method 2 1 Insert gt Manual break 2 By default Page break is selected on the Insert Break dialog Figure 88 3 Choose the required page Style 4 Select Change page number 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK 100 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Insert Break Type Line break Column break Page break Figure 88 Restarting page numbering after a manual page break Changing page margins You can change page margins in two ways e Using the page rulers quick and easy but does not have fine control e Using the Page Style dialog can specify margins to two decimal places If you change the margins using the rulers the new margins affect the page style and will be shown in the Page Style dialog the next time you open it Because the page style is affected the changed margins apply to all pages using that style To change margins using the rulers 1 The gray sections of the rulers are the margins Put the mouse cursor over the line between the gray and white sections The pointer turns into a double headed arrow 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to move the margin Figure 89 Moving the margins The small arrowheads
38. Help Tips When Tips is active one or two words will appear when you hold the mouse pointer over an icon or field without clicking Help Extended tips When Extended tips is active a brief description of the function of a particular icon or menu command or a field on a dialog appears when you hold the mouse pointer over that item Help Agent To turn off the Help Agent similar to Microsoft s Office Assistant deselect this option To restore the default behavior click Reset Help Agent Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 35 Open Save dialogs Use LibreOffice dialogs To use the standard Open and Save dialogs for your operating system deselect the Use LibreOffice dialogs option When this option is selected the Open and Save dialogs supplied with LibreOffice will be used See Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice for more about the LibreOffice Open and Save dialogs This book uses the LibreOffice Open and Save dialogs in illustrations Open Save dialogs Show ODMA DMS dialogs first Windows only If you have the GroupWise client installed on the computer you can select this option to have LibreOffice org offer to open documents from GroupWise or save documents in GroupWise If the GroupWise client is not installed this option has no effect Print dialogs Use LibreOffice dialogs Mac only To use the standard Print dialogs for your operating system deselect the Use LibreOffice dialogs option When this option is selected
39. Hide Show marker hides but does not close the Slides and Tasks panes To restore the pane click again on its Hide Show marker Slides pane The Slides pane contains thumbnail pictures of the slides in your presentation in the order they will be shown unless you change the slide show order Clicking a slide in this pane selects it and places it in the Workspace When a slide is in the Workspace you can make changes any way you like Several additional operations can be performed on one or more slides simultaneously in the Slides pane e Add new slides to the presentation e Mark a slide as hidden so that it will not be shown as part of the presentation e Delete a slide from the presentation if it is no longer needed Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 151 e Rename a slide e Duplicate a slide copy and paste or move it to a different position in the presentation cut and paste It is also possible to perform the following operations although there are more efficient methods than using the Slides pane e Change the slide transition following the selected slide or after each slide in a group of slides e Change the sequence of slides in the presentation e Change the slide design e Change slide layout for a group of slides simultaneously Tasks pane The Tasks pane has five sections To expand the section you wish to use click on the title bar of each section Only one section at a time can be expanded Mas
40. If the Text toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Text 2 Click and drag to draw a text box on the slide This sets the width Do not worry about the height because the text box will expand as you type 3 Release the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is now in edit mode a hashed border see Figure 154 4 Type or paste your text into the text box 5 Click outside the text box to deselect it TEQ BE Figure 155 Text toolbar In addition to the normal text boxes where text is horizontally aligned it is possible to insert text boxes where the text is aligned vertically This choice is available only when Asian languages are enabled in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt j Languages Click on the button in the drawing toolbar or text toolbar to create a vertical text box 166 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Quick font resizing Impress has icons A a on the Text Formatting toolbar to increase or decrease font size of selected text The amount by which the font size changes depends on the standard sizes available for the font in use Pasting text Text may be inserted into the text box by copying it from another document and pasting it into Impress However the pasted text will probably not match the formatting of the surrounding text or that of the other slid
41. Inthe list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference 5 Inthe Navigator list select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink 6 Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink Navigator o mE 7 fl e gaH vy Insert as Hyperlink Insert as Link Insert as Copy Headings Copyright What is Writer The Writer interface Changing document views Moving quickly through a do i Wa ee el en rk oe eee a b m a ama o mn amam Eam al 4 gt 0104GS3 GettingStartedWithWrit v Figure 91 Inserting a hyperlink using the Navigator You can also use the Hyperlink dialog to insert and modify hyperlinks within and between documents See Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 105 Using cross references If you type in references to other parts of the document those references can easily get out of date if you reword a heading add or remove figures or reorganize topics Replace any typed cross references with automatic ones and when you update fields all the references will update automatically to show the current wording or page numbers The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog lists some items such as headings bookmarks figures tables and numbered items such as steps in a procedure You
42. Navigation toolbar 31 83 Navigator 30 154 Calc 116 new document 26 non breaking hyphen 89 non breaking spaces 89 nonconsecutive items selecting 85 numbering equations 271 numbering pages 100 O OASIS 19 objects framing 195 hidden 195 ODF format version saving 48 Office Assistant Microsoft 35 Open and Save As dialogs 29 Open Source Initiative OSI 13 371 Open Save dialogs 36 OpenDocument Format 19 48 opening adocument 27 orientation of page 76 outline group controls Calc 139 outline level 168 OXT files 70 P page break Calc 145 page layout different first page 76 landscape page 76 orientation 76 page layouts 97 page margins 101 184 page numbering 100 parts of the main window 22 password protection 27 password protect PDF 291 paste text 86 path options 40 PDF blank page export 289 digital rights management DRM 291 embed standard fonts 289 encrypt 291 EPS image 288 export documents to 287 form 288 image compression and resolution 288 initial view selection 289 pages to export 287 password protect 291 security settings 291 tagged 288 user interface settings 289 PDF Options dialog 287 PDF A 1a 288 personal data removing 296 pictures adding from file 298 linking 299 pixels 182 Powerpoint 150 presentation slide design 160 160 Presentation Wizard 159 presentations saving 375 primary key 217 primary key database 217 Print dialog 278 print file directly 278 print options general 39
43. Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Connectors Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically snap to a gluepoint of an object Connectors are especially useful in drawing organization charts flow diagrams and mind maps When objects are moved or reordered the connectors remain attached to a gluepoint Figure 182 shows an example of two objects and a connector Draw offers a range of different connectors and connector functions Click on the arrow next to the Connector icon le 7 to open the Connectors toolbar Figure 183 and Table 6 For a more detailed description of the use of connectors see Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide 192 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Table 6 Connector tools Figure 183 Connectors toolbar Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Connector Gannector alla Connector Cy ends with CANONE hy Line connector arrow Line connector Line Straiaht Straight Uns ends with ar connector A J D connector ends i connector i arrow with arrows with arrow Straight Curved A Curved Ri connector with Hg O e Ue snide wiih 2 connector with arrows arial arrows Drawing geometric shapes The icons for drawing geometric shapes are located on the Drawing toolbar and each geometric shape is explained in the following sections Clicking on the triangl
44. Position Normally a formula is anchored As character in a Writer document But as with any other OLE object you can change the anchoring mode to position the formula where you want it For more information see Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork of the Getting Started guide By default formula objects anchored As character are automatically aligned vertically to the baseline of the surrounding text To align the formula manually go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Writer gt Formatting Aids and uncheck the option Math baseline alignment This setting is stored with the document and applies to all formulas within it New documents use the current setting from this dialog Margins An inserted Math object has margins to left and right of it separating it from surrounding text If you do not want this it is best to alter the frame style for formulas as this will apply simultaneously to all existing formulas and those still to be inserted in the document Proceed as follows 1 Press F11 The Styles and Formatting dialog opens 2 Click on the Frame Styles tab 3 Find the Formula frame style and right click on it 4 Choose Modify from the context menu The Frame Style dialog opens 5 Switch to the Wrap tab of the dialog Change the values for Left and Right in the Spacing section to 0 00 6 Click OK to close the dialog This changes the spacing for all formulas that have not had their spacing adjusted manually You
45. Selecting a vertical block of text You can select a vertical block or column of text that is separated by spaces or tabs as you might see in text pasted from e mails program listings or other sources using LibreOffice s block selection mode To change to block selection mode use Edit gt Selection Mode gt Block Area or press Ctrl F8 or click several times in the status bar on STD until it changes to BLK iji Default English USA INSRT fsm Now highlight the selection using mouse or keyboard as shown below January April 1 y October Figure 73 Selecting a vertical block of text Cutting copying and pasting text Cutting and copying text in Writer is similar to cutting and copying text in other applications You can use the mouse or the keyboard for these operations You can copy or move text within a document or between documents by dragging or by using menu selections icons or keyboard shortcuts You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a Writer document To move cut and paste selected text using the mouse drag it to the new location and release it To copy selected text hold down the Ctrl key while dragging The text retains the formatting it had before dragging When you paste text the result depends on the source of the text and how you paste it If you click on the Paste icon any formatting the text has such as bold or italics is retain
46. Text VARCHAR payment type Supper Number NUMERIC SPayment Text VARCHAR payment type snackNo Number NUMERIC Snackcost Number NUMERIC PE SnPayment Text VARCHAR payment type For snacks TE Miscellaneous Number NUMERIC misc costs TE MPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for motel MiscNotes Memo LONGVARCH MiscPayment Text VARCHAR payment type For miscellaneous Figure 219 Fields in Vacations table Defining relationships Now that the tables have been created what are the relationships between our tables This is the time to define them based upon the questions we asked and answered in the beginning When on vacation we want to enter all of our expenses at once each day Most of these expenses are in the Vacations table but the fuel we buy is not So we will link these two tables using the Date fields Since the Fuel table may have more than one entry per date this relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables is one to many it is designated 1 n The Fuel and Maintenance tables do not really have a relationship even though they share similar fields Date and Odometer As you create your own databases you will also need to determine where tables are related and how 1 To begin defining relationships choose Tools gt Relationships The Automobile LibreOffice Base Relation Design window opens and the Add Tables dialog pops up You can also open it by clicking the Add Table
47. VBA properties load save options 49 vector graphics 182 vertical block of text select 86 view options 37 W Web Layout 320 web page export Calc spreadsheets 323 Impress presentations 324 Web wizard Writer 321 Writer documents 320 321 wildcards 87 windows dockable floating 24 wizard query database 241 report database 250 table database 215 web 321 159 workspace Draw 183 382 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Writer Y document views 82 features 80 Navigation icons 83 Z Navigation toolbar 83 status bar 81 workspace 80 zoom 82 83 year two digits 36 zoom 82 83 163 164 167 172 X and distributing objects 209 XML 49 Index 383 Computer Software LibreOffice Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 A What is LibreOffice LibreOffice is a freely available full featured office suite It runs on Windows Linux and Mac OS X computers LibreOffice has been adopted by schools governments businesses and individuals around the world Who is this book for If you have never used LibreOffice before or you want an introduction to all of its components this book is for you Anyone who wants to get up to speed quickly with LibreOffice will find this book valuable You may be new to office software or you may be familiar with another office suite What s in this book This book introduces LibreOffice and its components Writer word processing Calc spreadsheets Im
48. What is LibreO ffice LibreOffice is a freely available fully featured office productivity suite Its native Me format is OpenDocument an open standard format that is being adopted by governments worldwide as a required file format for publishing and accepting documents LibreOfice can also open and save documents in many other formats including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office 7 Lineotice includes the following components r word processor Writer is a feature rich tool for creating letters books reports newsletters brochures and other documents You can insert graphics and objects from other components into Writer documents Writer can export files to HTML XHTML XML Adobe s Portable Document Format POF and ral versions of Microsoft Word files It also connects to your email client Cale spreadsheet Calc has all of the high end spreadshi 210mm A4 LibreOffice Writer Page Layout Options Printer goruot er el Canon LEP5050 Impress provides pez 2 and drawing tools a Seis ark E23 Math components ql ana well as sound and can also save yo Aha ie Liira Ls Sy ee ey eee ees ERA EEE E a eee Draw vector Details Draw is a vector i Range and copies D artwork Its Sm use Draw toc your own clip arte __ All pages Number of copies 1 Pages 4 v Collate See a Selection Print in reverse page order Print Comments None document
49. and FuelCost columns When the pointer changes shape click and drag to move the divider to the right e To change the PaymentType column Right click the label PaymentType to open the menu Select Column to open the Properties dialog In the Label property change PaymentType to Payment Type Close the Properties dialog Properties Text Box General Data Events NaitiG cacncncncnananae PaymentType EN a RELLE LARLL AREL LLLERLEE PaymentType if Max text length 0 a Step 8 Add headings to groups This step is easier to do if you have end of paragraph markers visible Choose View gt Non printing Characters to turn them on H s i fc Heading 2 Figure 235 Apply Styles list 1 Make sure the cursor is in the upper left corner If it is not click in that corner to move it there 2 Press the Enter key to move the cursor down to the space between the Date field and the Breakfast field 3 Change the Apply Styles drop down list from Default to Heading 2 4 Use the spacebar to move the cursor to where you want the heading to start 5 Type the heading Meals 6 Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of snack area 7 Type the heading Snacks 8 Use the Enter key to move the cursor between the Supper control and the subform 9 Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of the subform 10 Type the heading Fuel Data If you know how to use styles you can open the Styles and
50. gray hashed border shown in Figure 154 4 Type or paste your text in the text box 5 Click outside the text box to deselect it You can move resize and delete text boxes For more information see Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Text in the Impress Guide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 165 Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Using text boxes AOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO lg AS ao lick on the Text icon on the Drawing toolbar The default position of the drawing toolbar towards the bottom of the screen If the Drawing toolbar with the text icon is not visible Zchoose View gt Toolbars gt Drawing O lick and drag to draw a text box on the slide This sets the width Do not worry about the eight because the text box will expand as you type Z f Z f A Z Z f Z f Z Z Z SS 2 Z f o reposition the text box to a different part of the slide see on page to change the dth B SS ps elease the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is ow in edit mode and a hashed border appears MAY SW Type or paste your text in the text box Click outside the text box to deselect it PW WS Figure 154 Creating and editing text boxes Using text boxes created from the Text toolbar Make sure Normal view is selected 1 Click on the Text icon T on the Text toolbar Figure 155
51. not available in the Elements window or the right click menu Fortunately the markup for Greek characters is simple Type a sign followed by the name of the character in English e To write a lowercase character type the name of the character in lowercase e To write an uppercase character type the name of the character in uppercase e To write in italic just add an i between sign and the name of the character A complete table of Greek characters is provided in appendix of the Math Guide See the table below for some examples Lowercase Uppercase Italic lowercase Italic uppercase alpha gt a ALPHA gt A ialpha gt a iALPHA gt A beta gt B BETA gt B ibeta gt 1BETA gt B gamma gt y GAMMA gt T igamma gt y 1GAMMA gt T psi gt w PSI gt Y ipsi gt w 1PSI gt W phi gt PHI gt D iphi gt iPHI gt theta gt 9 THETA gt itheta gt 1THETA gt Another way to enter Greek characters is by using the Symbols catalog window Choose Tools gt Catalog This window is shown in Figure 279 Under Symbol set select Greek and double click on a Greek letter from the list The markup name of the character is shown below the list window 260 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 C Symbols Ea Symbol set Greek Figure 279 Symbols catalog used for entering Greek characters and some special symbols Example 2 x 3 14159 For this example we will sup
52. p ibh SA2 e Figure 168 Standard toolbar Drawing toolbar The Drawing toolbar is the most important toolbar in Draw It contains all the necessary functions for drawing various geometric and freehand shapes and for organizing them on the page 184 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Bi 7m eTA e 7 gt G W P k S ZF DS r B Figure 169 Drawing toolbar Line and Filling toolbar The Line and Filling toolbar lets you modify the main properties of a drawing object The icons and pull down lists vary according to the type of object selected For example to change the style of a line click on the up and down arrows for Line Style and select the required style See Editing objects on page 199 for details A S coc 0 00 e Gray ic A Coor een c a Figure 170 Line and Filling toolbar Text Formatting toolbar If the selected object is text the toolbar changes to the Text Formatting toolbar which is similar to the Formatting toolbar in Writer For more information see Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer in this guide e SIA Am A s a v Liberation Sans 18 _ B 7 uA E Figure 171 Text Formatting toolbar Options toolbar Use the Options toolbar to activate or deactivate various drawing aids The Options toolbar is not one of the toolbars displayed by default To display the Options toolbar select View gt Toolbars gt Options
53. primarily because it uses ThisComponent for its actions Every library container contains a library named Standard It is better to create your own libraries with meaningful names than to use the Standard library Not only are meaningful names easier to manage but they can also be imported into other library containers whereas the Standard library cannot LibreOffice allows you to import libraries into a library container but it will not allow you to overwrite the library named Standard Therefore if you store your macros in the Standard library you cannot import them into another library container Just as it makes good sense to give your libraries meaningful names it is prudent to use meaningful names for your modules By default LibreOffice uses names such as Module1 Feel free to use your own meaningful name As you create your macros you must decide where to store them Storing a macro in a document is useful if the document will be shared and you want the macro to be included with the document Macros stored in the application library container named My Macros however are globally available to all documents Macros are not available until the library that contains them is loaded The Standard library and Template library however are automatically loaded A loaded library is displayed differently from a library that is not loaded To load the library and the modules it contains double click on the library Chapter 1
54. see Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Text in the Impress Guide for more information The fields you can use in Impress are e Date fixed e Date variable updates automatically when you reload the file e Time fixed e Time variable updates automatically when you reload the file e Author first and last names listed in the LibreOffice user data e Page number slide number e File name To change the author information go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt User Data 176 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 To change the number format 1 2 3 or a b c or i li lil etc for the page number field choose Format gt Page and then select a format from the list in the Layout Settings area To change the paragraph style modify the Background Objects Presentation style Adding comments to a presentation Impress supports comments similar to those in Writer and Calc In Normal View choose Insert gt Comment from the menu bar A small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of the slide with a larger text box beside it Impress automatically adds your name and the current date at the bottom of the text box Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter P51 This a sample of comment that youcan place onto a slide k B Bold J Italic U Underline age Strikethrough i amp 3 Paste Delete Comment Delete All Comments by Peter Schofield Delete All Comments
55. steps but each step is fairly simple What fuel economy is our vehicle getting miles per gallon in the USA This question requires creating two queries with the first query used as part of the second query Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 243 Step 1 Open the first query in Design View e Click Create Query in Design View Step 2 Add tables Add Table or Query Tables Queries Add CD Collection Fuel Maintenance e Payment Type W Vacations Figure 250 Add Tables or Query dialog 1 Click Fuel to highlight it 2 Click Add Click Close Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the fuel table Figure 250 and drag the edge to make it longer and easier to see all of the fields in the table Fuel ir FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuanity Odometer PaymentT ype Figure 251 Fuel table in query Step 3 Add fields to the table at the bottom 1 Double click the Fuell D field in the Fuel table 2 Double click the Odometer field 3 Double click the FuelQuantity field The table at the bottom of the query window should now have three columns 244 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Field Alias Table Sort Visible Function Criterion FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity Fuel Fuel Fuel Figure 252 Query table Step 4 Set the criterion for the query We want the query s FuellD to begin with the numeral 1 1 Type gt 0 in the Criterion ce
56. uot uof Ichitaro 8 9 10 11 jtd and jtt Hangul WP 97 hwp T602 Document 602 txt AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw HTML Document htm html Most of these file types are automatically detected by LibreOffice so they can be opened without explicitly selecting the document type in the file picker When opening htm or html files used for web pages LibreOffice customizes Writer for working with these files 372 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Opening spreadsheets In addition to OpenDocument formats ods ots and fods Calc 3 can open the formats used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxc and stc and the following spreadsheet formats Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls xlw and xIt Microsoft Excel 4 x 5 0 95 xls xlw and xlt Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Microsoft Excel 2007 2010 XML xlsx xlsm xlts xltm Microsoft Excel 2007 2010 binary xlsb Lotus 1 2 3 wk1 wks and 123 Data Interchange Format dif Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc formats sdc and vor dBASE dbf SYLK slk Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos uof HTML Document htm and html files including Web page queries Pocket Excel pxl Quattro Pro 6 0 wb2 Opening presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp odg otp and fopd Impress 3 can open the formats used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxi and sti and the following presentation forma
57. up in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Writer gt Mail Merge E mail File gt Send gt E mail as OpenDocument Text or Spreadsheet or Presentation has the same effect 292 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 If you choose E mail as Microsoft Word Excel or Powerpoint LibreOffice first creates a file in one of those formats and then opens your e mail program with the file attached Similarly if you choose E mail as PDF LibreOffice first creates a PDF using your default PDF settings as when using the Export Directly as PDF toolbar button and then opens your email program with the PDF file attached E mailing a document to several recipients To e mail a document to several recipients you can use the features in your e mail program or you can use LibreOffice s mail merge facilities to extract email addresses from an address book You can use LibreOffice s mail merge to send e mail in two ways e Use the Mail Merge Wizard to create the document and send it See Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide for details e Create the document in Writer without using the Wizard then use the Wizard to send it This method is described here To use the Mail Merge Wizard to send a previously created Writer document 1 Click Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard On the first page of the wizard select Use the current document and click Next eMail Merge AO eh Merge Wizard i i m aaa Ed Select starting document for t
58. x Color Picker RGEC O Red iiss Green Hoo S 48 Oe Saturation 50 Brightness 78 CMYK au ma S Magenta 50 Yellow bos k key ZE Figure 28 Editing colors Font options You can define replacements for any fonts that might appear in your documents If you receive from someone else a document containing fonts that you do not have on your system LibreOffice will substitute fonts for those it does not find You might prefer to specify a different font from the one that the program chooses Apply replacement table Font Replace with Helvetica Arial Ea a Helvetica Arial mW 4 Font settings for HTML Basic and SQL sources Fonts Automatic Ea Non proportional fonts only Size 10 Figure 29 Defining a font to be substituted for another font 42 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 On the LibreOffice Fonts page 1 Select the Apply Replacement Table option 2 Select or type the name of the font to be replaced in the Font box If you do not have this font on your system it will not appear in the drop down list in this box so you need to type it in 3 Inthe Replace with box select a suitable font from the drop down list of fonts installed on your computer 4 The checkmark to the right of the Replace with box turns gr
59. 14 Background Color 3 Font Name 9 Subscript 15 Open Character Format Dialog 4 Font Size 10 Increase Font 5 Bold 11 Reduce Font Figure 81 Formatting toolbar showing icons for character formatting To remove manual formatting select the text and choose Format gt Default Formatting or right click and choose Default Formatting Autoformatting You can set Writer to automatically format parts of a document according to the choices made on the Options page of the AutoCorrect dialog Tools gt AutoCorrect Options If you notice unexpected formatting changes occurring in your document this is the first place to look for the cause The Help describes each of these choices and how to activate the autoformats Some common unwanted or unexpected formatting changes include e Horizontal lines If you type three or more hyphens underscores or equal signs on a line and then press Enter the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph 94 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 e Bulleted and numbered lists A bulleted list is created when you type a hyphen star or plus sign followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph A numbered list is created when you type a number followed by a period followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatte
60. 3 4 5 6 Format a sheet in the style for the new AutoFormat Choose Edit gt Select All Choose Format gt AutoFormat The Add button is now active Click Add In the Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog type a meaningful name for the new format Click OK to save The new format is now available in the Format list in the AutoFormat dialog Formatting spreadsheets using themes Calc comes with a predefined set of formatting themes that you can apply to your spreadsheets It is not possible to add themes to Calc and they cannot be modified However you can modify their styles after you apply them to a spreadsheet To apply a theme to a spreadsheet 1 2 Click the Choose Themes icon in the Tools toolbar If this toolbar is not visible you can show it using View gt Toolbars gt Tools The Theme Selection dialog appears This dialog lists the available themes for the whole spreadsheet Tools X A o lbo Ha o In the Theme Selection dialog select the theme that you want to apply to the spreadsheet As soon as you select a theme some of the properties of the custom styles are applied to the open spreadsheet and are immediately visible 138 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 3 Click OK If you wish you can now go to the Styles and Formatting window to modify specific styles These modifications do not change the theme they only change the appearance of this specific soreadsheet document
61. 50 4 00 79 50 10 00 1 19 67 3 172 0 Kupfer Peter 26 00 1 00 3 00 16 00 20 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 0 00 3 50 41 00 6 50 83 9 224 5 Mewton Issac 28 00 1 00 3 00 6 00 15 00 23 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 50 57 50 9 3 0011 80 6 207 5 26 00 0 00 2 00 6 00 15 00 17 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 0 00 62 60 9 00 22 76 1 209 0 Matteson Brittany 128 00 0 00 3 00 3 00 17 00 22 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 00 47 50 9 00 1 23 79 4 212 5 Murphy Kathleen 26 00 1 00 3 00 6 00 16 00 11 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 4 00 53 60 9 00 Figure 111 Frozen rows and columns You can set the freeze point at a row a column or both a row and a column as in Figure 111 Freezing single rows or columns 1 Click on the header for the row below where you want the freeze or for the column to the right of where you want the freeze 2 Choose Window gt Freeze A dark line appears indicating where the freeze is put Freezing a row and a column 1 Click into the cell that is immediately below the row you want frozen and immediately to the right of the column you want frozen 2 Choose Window gt Freeze Two lines appear on the screen a horizontal line above this cell and a vertical line to the left of this cell Now as you scroll around the screen everything above and to the left of these lines will remain in view Unfreezing To unfreeze rows or columns choose Window gt Freeze The check mark by Free
62. 64 w EE E E E EAE A E AE EAA E ccc ee en A AS EE A E 66 Using a template to create GOO CU CIN sce dee wcsceera tt cncennndcncecesucundconasepeemeseimsuanteciereniduebeceesesdese 66 Creating a POTTS os csccse ccsreiesacneeteteatan esac onendainntcingia dea wnsean eanhadee tiatinadoy nebtiheaaDawercedendene decedaceueenennsaneeete 67 maa EE oe ees eeveeteey eee eee 69 Adding templates obtained from Other SOUICES ccccccccececeeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeseeeseaessaesseesnass 70 Senno eI NW E sensi en E quote ddprereendueaneseoreunectiueaesouece 71 Associating a document with a different template ccccccccececeeeceeeceeeseeeceeeceeseeessenssensnans 72 e E E e P AA E E E A E AE A A NAA wee 73 Printing a list of styles defined in a template or COCUMENL cccccecceceeceeseeseeeeseeeeeseeseeaes 15 Examples 0l SMe USG rrain ei eee eee Oe a a aa a EE ome ter ae ee 76 Chapter 4 GETING Starled WiN VVC T siisii iiia aada 79 aT A egr A E AE 80 TRE VET IME O a E ce eee ee eee ee eee 80 Changing document WIC WS erin ct coandaentaconenrdnads eascvinsdaimededensdgooundher Bieenandatladsacatuclauneesdeaebaecendiads 82 Moving quickly through BOO CUI OI acetic ciate orcerwetecaricicmnestatetsensuaciuseatedeaievcacsadensaieweladnecsweracios 83 Working Weiildo me 316 0g r 9 keene een eee aes nen aie enn eee eee ee ae een cee rene eee eee ence cere 84 NOUN Ota De esac aor E T EE E EEA E AA E A EE EA EA EA 85 F O E E T E E S 93
63. After you set a password for permissions the other choices on the Security page become available e With both the open password and permission password set the PDF can only be opened with the correct password and its permissions can be restricted Note Permissions settings are effective only if the user s PDF viewer respects the settings e oN PDF Options General Initial View User Interface Links Security File encryption and permission Printing SN C Not permitted Low resolution 150 dpi No open password set High resolution PDF document will not be encrypted Changes Permission password set Go NOt permitted PDF document will be restricted _ Inserting deleting and rotating pages _ Filling in form fields O Commenting filling in form fields Any except extracting pages Mj Enable copying of content Ral Enable text access for accessibility tools Figure 306 Security page of PDF Options dialog Figure 307 shows the pop up dialog displayed when you click the Set open password button on the Security page of the PDF Options dialog Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 291 PDF Options General Initial View User Interface Links Drintirnra File encryption and permission AOO Set passwords Set passwords A No open password set Password I PDF document will not be en or Confirm No permission password set PDF document will b
64. AutoLayout 165 automatic changes 129 automatic saving 28 AutoRecovery 28 48 AutoUpdate styles 62 B background images from Gallery 301 Basic 330 bitmaps 209 BitTorrent 20 book preview 286 booklet printing 284 bookmarks 106 brackets Math 262 brochure printing 284 Bullets and Numbering dialog 169 C Calc AutoFormat 137 editing data 132 Enter key use of 117 features 110 filtering visible cells 140 formula bar 111 Function Wizard 111 hiding and showing data 139 Navigator 116 outline group controls 139 printing 142 sheet tabs 112 sorting records 141 splitting the screen 126 status bar 113 Calc macros 339 cells in Calc formatting 134 navigating 115 selecting 119 change tracking 104 changes undo and redo 31 check for updates automatically 46 chemical formulas 276 clipboard 39 closing a document 32 closing LibreOffice 32 CMYK 186 Color bar 185 color options 41 color palette 186 color scheme 44 columns in Calc deleting 121 freezing 125 inserting 121 selecting 119 comma separated values CSV 113 115 comments adding 102 complex text layout CTL 19 52 components of OpenOffice org 18 conditional formatting 139 Context menu 201 context menus 24 conversion 209 copy and paste 86 copying object from Gallery 301 create document from template 66 creating a document 26 cross references inserting references 106 overview 106 CSV file open 114 save 115 CSV files 113 115 Ctrl click required to
65. AutoLayout text boxes promoting or demoting an item in the list corresponds to applying a different outline style so the second outline level corresponds to Outline 2 style the third to Outline 3 style and so on As a consequence a change in the level also produces other changes for example font size bullet type and so on Do not try to change the outline level by selecting the text and then clicking the desired outline style as you would in Writer Due to the way that presentation styles work it is not possible to apply them in this way 168 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Changing the appearance of the list You can fully customize the appearance of a list changing the bullet type or numbering for the entire list or for single entry All of the changes can be made using the Bullets and Numbering dialog which is accessed by selecting Format gt Bullets and Numbering or by clicking on the Bullets and Numbering icon on the text formatting toolbar For the entire list 1 Select the entire list or click on the gray border of the text box so that the colored resizing handles are displayed 2 Select Format gt Bullets and Numbering or click on the Bullets and Numbering icon of on the text formatting toolbar 3 The Bullets and Numbering dialog Figure 156 contains five tabs Bullets Numbering type Graphics Position and Customize If a bullet list is needed select the desired bullet style from the default
66. Available tools on Mode toolbar Vane Flipping objects The quickest and easiest method to flip an object horizontally or vertically is as follows 1 Click on a graphic object and the selection handles will show 2 Right click and select Flip gt Vertically or Horizontally or got to Modify gt Flip gt Vertically or Horizontally on the main menu bar and the selected object will be flipped to face the other direction However the Flip tool on the Mode or Drawing toolbar can be used to give you greater control over the flipping process Using the Flip tool allows you to change the position and angle that the object flips over and this is described in Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes of the Draw Guide Mirror copies At the moment there is no mirror command existing in Draw However mirroring an object can be emulated by using the Flip tool and this is described Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes of the Draw Guide Distorting an object Three tools on the Mode toolbar let you drag the corners and edges of an object to distort the image e Distort tool zi distorts an object in perspective m e Set to Circle slant w creates a pseudo three dimensional effect m e Setin Circle perspective a creates a pseudo three dimensional effect Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 205 In all three cases you are initially asked if you want to transform the object to a curve This is a necessary first step so click Yes Th
67. BWYV1007 vttem the author of the note as well as a Prelude created lt ref gt shows an example of text Allemande Minuets gt ontigure the name you want to appear in Sarabande Courante nt each author will be alitomatically Gigue Johan Sebastian Bach Today 23 37 Figure 90 Example of comments Choose Tools gt Options gt User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color Right clicking on a comment pops up a menu where you can delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document From this menu you can also apply some basic formatting to the text of the comment You can also change the font type size and alignment from the main menu To navigate from one comment to another open the Navigator F5 expand the Comments section and click on the comment text to move the cursor to the anchor point of the comment in the document Right click on the comment to quickly edit or delete it You can also navigate through the comments using the keyboard Use Ctr Alt Page Down to move to the next comment and Ctrl Alt Page Up to move to the previous comment Creating a table of contents Writer s table of contents feature lets you build an automated table of contents from the headings in your document Before you st
68. By modifying the style of the table from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane you can quickly change the appearance of the table or any newly created tables based on the Style options you select You can choose to add emphasis to a header and total row as well as the first and last columns of the table and apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Having completed the table design entering data into the cells is similar to working with text box objects Click in the cell you wish to add data to and begin typing To move around cells quickly use the following key options e The arrow keys move the cursor to the next table cell if the cell is empty otherwise they move the cursor to the next character in the cell e The Tab key moves to the next cell skipping over the contents of the cell Shift Tab move backwards from cell to cell Adding charts To insert a chart in a slide you can either use Insert gt Chart from the main menu bar clicking on the Chart icon elh in the main toolbar or after inserting a new slide clicking on the Insert Chart icon Figure 153 Impress will insert a default chart and open the Chart dialog To modify the chart type insert your own data and change the formatting refer to the Impress Guide Adding media files You can insert various types of media files such as music and movie clips into your slide by selecting the Insert Movie icon Figure 153 in an empty contents box A media player
69. Ctrl V Pastes copied or cut items from the clipboard Ctrl Shift V Opens the Paste Special dialog Ctrl A Selects all Ctrl Z Undoes last action Ctrl Y Redoes last action Ctrl Shift Y Repeats last command 366 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Shortcut Keys Result Ctrl F Opens the Find amp Replace dialog Ctrl Shift F Searches for the last entered search term Ctrl Shift R Refreshes redraws the document view Ctrl Shift Shows or hides the cursor in read only text Stopping macros Shortcut Keys Result Shift Ctrl Q Stops a running macro Defining keyboard shortcuts In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in this Appendix you can define your own See Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for instructions Further reading For help with LibreOffice s keyboard shortcuts or using LibreOffice with a keyboard only search the application Help using the shortcut keys or accessibility Keywords Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 367 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument Introduction LibreOffice is a productivity suite that is compatible with other major office suites and available ona variety of platforms It is open source software and therefore free to download use and distribute If you are new to LibreOffice this appendix will provide some information regarding its history its community and some
70. Database File Once in Base you can edit add and delete tables queries forms and reports Using data sources in Writer and Calc Data can be placed into Writer and Calc documents from the tables in the data source window In Writer values from individual fields can be inserted Or a complete table can be created in the Writer document One common way to use a data source is to perform a mail merge Choosing Tools gt Mail Merge Wizard or clicking on the Mail Merge icon on the View Data Source pane launches the Mail Merge wizard which steps you through creating a mail merge document See Chapter 11 in the Writer Guide Writer documents To insert a field from a table opened in the data source window into a Writer document click on the field name the gray square at the top of the field list and with the left mouse button held down drag the field onto the document In a Writer document it will appear as lt FIELD gt where FIELD is the name of the field you dragged For example to enter the cost of meals and who paid for them on a certain date of a vacation 236 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 1 Open the list of data sources F4 and select the Vacations table in the Automobile database 2 Use this sentence On date our breakfast cost amount paid by name our lunch cost amount paid by name and our supper cost amount paid by name But only type On our breakfast cost paid by our lunch c
71. E Figure 102 The Navigator in Calc The Navigator displays lists of all the objects in a document grouped into categories If an indicator plus sign or arrow appears next to a category at least one object of this kind exists To open a category and see the list of items click on the indicator To hide the list of categories and show only the icons at the top click the Contents icon Click this icon again to show the list Moving from cell to cell In the spreadsheet one cell normally has a black border This black border indicates where the focus is see Figure 103 If a group of cells is selected they are highlighted in a light blue color with the focus cell having a black border Using the mouse To move the focus using the mouse simply move the mouse pointer to the cell where you want the focus to be and click the left mouse button This changes the focus to the new cell This method is most useful when the two cells are a large distance apart Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 real i a3 4 5 6 ey B Q i aa s Figure 103 Left One selected cell and right a group of selected cells Using the Tab and Enter keys e By default pressing Enter or Shift Enter moves the focus down or up respectively e Pressing Tab or Shift Tab moves the focus to the right or to the left respectively Using the arrow keys Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard moves the focus in the direction
72. Eh COT oasoreetsas te peccgatsadt seen poaeeanaasecdes cece sans oscenceeneetdeaaanctecetenpeadenncceeendeeeande 296 Fe EU SN ees AAE OE E TE E A AE E A A EA EN 296 Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and FONtTWOPK cccssssessseesseeesseseneeesseeenseoeseeoaseeeasesenseeeasenenees 297 a A O e a R a Ea 298 Adang images 0 A doCUMEN eses asena aa aE ar 298 Modifymg and positioning graphi ssnesisssisirnc aano aa a rr enone tee ae ae ee 302 6 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Managing the LibreOffice GON Yeats 562 ccesoese tad eon iadtaceceuieieesdeeeiedpicaduenaeletoeaiolncasnectacteeetialed 302 Creating an image 10 St ora pe vie ie atincetinc degen ite eet bara deans aed podieg een seed Goebion Hes doaecan obra pehenernn 305 Using LibreOffice s drawing COIS iccracsssenpesqentetinadenaesenenetandindetdecsdacntesceauitednoasstinvaczaueadantersAms 306 USNO FONO K caras AE AE E sine 308 Chapter 12 Creating Web PageS sssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 315 O e E E A 316 Relative and absolute NypPerlinkS ccccccseccseccseeceeecececaeecececeecceeecueeeueceueseuesgesasesaeeseeesaes 316 N E a A a teeceeceonieeesseeeen 316 Saving Writer documents as WED pageS n ns1nsresresrrrnrnrrsrrrrrnrrrnrrrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrsrerrrrnrnna 320 Creating web pages using a Wizard accede ccc ieee nema ececeetarae NEARNE ER 321 Saving Calc spreadsheets as web PaQes
73. Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Customize Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Event o Assigned Action Assign Close Application Maco Document created New Document Document loading finished Remove Open Document Document is going to be closed Document closed View created View is going to be closed View closed Activate Document Deactivate Document Save Document Document has been saved Saving of document Failed Save Document As Document has been saved as Save as has Failed Storing or exporting copy of doc Document copy has been created Creating of document copy Failed Print Document Modified status was changed Document title changed Printing of form letters started Save In 0113G 3 Macros MJF_20110806 odt Figure 344 Assign macro to an application level event Acommon use is to assign the Open Document event to call a specific macro The macro then performs certain setup tasks for the document Select the desired event and click the Macro button to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 345 Macro Selector Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name My Macros __ amp HelloMacro gt ChangePicture S Main gt amp HistMastr b a Standard 3 TestLibrary E Module Help b I basic amp LibreOffice Macros gt capitalise Cancel shh 7 E
74. If you record Calc macros and the recorder can correctly generate a macro there is an add in created by Paolo Mantovani which converts Calc macros when they are recorded The final code manipulates LibreOffice objects rather than generating dispatches This can be very useful for learning the object model You can download the macro recorder from Paolo s web site directly http www paolo mantovani org downloads DispatchToApiRecorder Macro organization In LibreOffice macros are grouped in modules modules are grouped in libraries and libraries are grouped in library containers A library is usually used as a major grouping for either an entire category of macros or for an entire application Modules usually split functionality such as user interaction and calculations Individual macros are subroutines and functions Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 339 Module 1 Module 2 Macro 2 Figure 336 Macro Library hierarchy A computer scientist would use Figure 337 to precisely describe the situation The text 1 means one or more and O means zero or more The black triangle means composed of or contains e Alibrary container contains one or more libraries and each library is contained in one library container e A library contains zero or more modules and each module is contained in one library e A module contains zero or more macros and each macro is contained in one module Figure 337 Mac
75. Introducine OpenDocument Te 422 3 KB 06 12 2011 13 12 28 LibO style quide odt OpenDocument Te 121 3 KB 05 23 2011 07 38 48 peg ag OpenDocument Te 306 6 KB 05 12 2011 03 04 44 z using Alfresco odt OpenDocument Te 682 4 KB 05 18 2011 10 00 04 feb meer OpenDocument Te 437 5 KB 06 12 2011 12 22 18 V2_0101GD3 Introdu OpenDocument Te 411 2 KB 06 12 2011 13 59 15 File name v2_0101GD3 IntroducingLibreOffice Save File type home jaimon Desktop Link to Libre V2_0101GD3 IntroducingLibreOffice odt home jaimon Libre LibO style quide oat home jaimon Desktop Link to Libre 0101GD3 IntroducingLibreOffice odt home jaimon Desktop Link to Libre V1_0101GD3 IntroducingLibreOffice odt home jaimon Libre V1_0101GD3 IntroducingLibreOffice odt O Save with passwi home jaimon Desktop Link to Libre using Alfresco odt _ home jaimon Desktop Link to Libre LibO style quide odt N9 home jaimon Desktop Link to Libre producing LibreOffice userguides odt Edit filter sett Figure 13 The LibreOffice Save as dialog The three buttons in the top right of the LibreOffice Open and Save As dialogs are from left e Go Up One Level in the folder directory hierarchy Click and hold this button for a second to drop down a list of higher level folders to go to one of the folders on the list move the mouse pointer over its name and release the mouse button e Create New Folder e Default Directory For LibreOffice documents that hav
76. Is it written in Java LibreOffice is not written in Java it is written in the C language Java is one of several languages that can be used to extend the software The Java JDK JRE is only required for some features The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine Note Java is available at no cost If you do not want to use Java you can still use nearly all of the features of LibreOffice How can I contribute to LibreOffice You can help with the development and user support of LibreOffice in many ways and you do not need to be a programmer To start check out this webpage http Awww documentfoundation org contribution May I distribute the PDF of this book or print and sell copies Yes as long as you meet the requirements of one of the licenses in the copyright statement at the beginning of this book You do not have to request special permission In addition we request that you share with the project some of the profits you make from sales of books in consideration of all the work we have put into producing them New features in LibreOffice 3 5 For a detailed list of new features see http www libreoffice org download 3 5 new features and fixes Here are some of them General e LibreOffice checks for updates automatically at user defined intervals and allows manual download of the newest version e Import filter for Microsoft Visio documents e Color picker Tools gt Options gt Colors click Edit rewri
77. LibreOffice 3 5 e You can add a word to the dictionary Click Add in the Spelling and Grammar dialog and pick the dictionary to add it to e Click the Options button on the Spelling and Grammar dialog to open a dialog similar to the one in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids described in Chapter 2 There you can choose whether to check uppercase words and words with numbers and you can manage custom dictionaries that is add or delete dictionaries and add or delete words in a dictionary e On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can set paragraphs to be checked ina specific language different from the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for more information Writer includes a grammar checker LightProof which you can access from Tools gt Spelling and Grammar Using built in language tools Writer provides some tools that make your work easier if you mix multiple languages within the same document or if you write documents in various languages The main advantage of changing the language for a text selection is that you can then use the correct dictionaries to check spelling and apply the localized versions of Autocorrect replacement tables thesaurus and hyphenation rules You can also set the language for a paragraph or a group of characters as None Do not check spelling This option is especially useful when you insert text such as web addresses or p
78. Management dialog click any folder 2 Click the Commands button and choose New from the drop down menu A new folder called Untitled appears Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 73 3 Type aname for the new folder and then press Enter LibreOffice saves the folder with the name that you entered Deleting a template folder You cannot delete template folders supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete template folders that you have created To delete a template folder that you have created 1 Inthe Template Management dialog select the folder that you want to delete 2 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears asking you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Moving a template To move a template from one template folder to another template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to move 2 Click the template that you want to move and drag it to the desired folder If you do not have the authority to delete templates from the source folder this action copies the template instead of moving it Deleting a template You cannot delete templates supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete templates that you have created or imported To delete a template 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contai
79. Options dialog has the same effect on all pages of the Options dialog It resets the options to the values that were in place when you opened LibreOffice User Data options Because LibreOffice uses the name or initials stored in the LibreOffice User Data page for several things including document properties created by and last edited by information and the name of the author of notes and changes you will want to ensure that the correct information appears here Fill in the form shown in Figure 20 or amend or delete any existing incorrect information If you are using a version of LibreOffice other than US English some field labels may be different from those shown in the illustrations 34 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Address Company First Last name Initials Jared Kobos JK Street City State Zip Country Region Title Position Tel Home WWork Fax E mail Figure 20 Filling in user data General options The options on the LibreOffice General page are described below Help M Tips Extended tips lw Help Agent Reset Help Agent Open Save dialogs Use LibreOffice dialogs Show ODMA DMS dialogs first Document status Printing sets document modified status Allow to save document even when the document is not modified Year two digits A Interpret as years between 1930 and 2029 V Enable experimental unstable features Figure 21 Setting general options for LibreOffice
80. Print dialog under Ranges and copies choose Pages and type 1 in the box Click the Print button Printing in black and white on a color printer You may wish to print documents in black and white on a color printer Several choices are available Please note that some color printers may print in color regardless of the settings you choose Change the printer settings to print in black and white or grayscale 1 Choose File gt Print to open the Print dialog Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 285 2 Click Properties to open the Properties dialog for the printer The available choices vary from one printer to another but you should find options for the Color settings See your printer s help or user manual for more information 3 The choices for color might include black and white or grayscale Choose the required setting 4 Click OK to confirm your choice and return to the Print dialog 5 Click the Print button to print the document Grayscale is best if you have any graphics in the document Change the LibreOffice settings to print all color text and graphics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Print 2 Select the Convert colors to grayscale option Click OK to save the change 3 Open the Print dialog File gt Print 4 Click the Print button to print the document Change the LibreOffice Writer or Calc Impress Draw settings to print all color text as black and all gra
81. Select the Page layout tab in the Print dialog 5 Select the Brochure option 284 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 6 Inthe Page sides section select Back sides left pages option from the Include drop down list 00 Print General LibreOffice Writer M Options Layout Pages per sheet fl 7 297mm A4 s 1 Orde eft to right then down Libreoftice J 1 bord round eacli ig El E e Brochure ii Page sides Include All pages n All pages Back sides left pages Front sides right pages 10 D Help Print R Cancel 7 Click the Print button 8 Take the printed pages out of the printer turn the pages over and put them back into the printer in the correct orientation to print on the blank side You may need to experiment a bit to find out what the correct arrangement is for your printer 9 On the Print dialog in the Page sides section select Front sides right pages option from the Include drop down box 10 Click the Print button Tip If your printer can print double sided automatically choose All pages Printing envelopes labels business cards Printing envelopes labels or business cards using Writer involves two steps setup and printing For details of how to set these up see Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide To print 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the
82. Select the fields columns for your query To change the order of the fields select the field you want to move and click the up or down arrow Tables Table CD Collection Available fields Fields in the Query CollectionlD CD Collection Artist Format CD Collection AlbumTitle Notes CD Collection DatePurchased Numberoflracks Photo A V Figure 248 First page of the Query Wizard Step 2 Select the sorting order Up to four fields can be used to sort the information of our query A little simple logic helps at this point Which field is most important In our query the artist is most important The album title is less important and the date purchased is of least importance Of course if we were interested in what music we bought on a given day the date purchased would be the most important Sort by Ascendin CD Collection Artist Ascending Descending Then by Ascendin undefined g Descending Figure 249 Sorting order page 1 Click the first Sort by drop down list a Click CD Collection Artist to select it b To list the artists in alphabetical order a z select Ascending on the right 242 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 2 Click the second Sort by drop down list Click CD Collection ArtistTitle and select Ascending 3 Repeat this process for CD Collection DatePurchased 4 Click Next Step 3 Select the search conditions The search conditions allow us t
83. Series type and enter as the 5 E Start value an item from any defined series The selected i au E cells then fill in the other items on the list sequentially i agusl 7 repeating from the top of the list when they reach the end of eh Saat E the list eee J 11 November ee aL dk 5 Wi BA i Figure 118 Result of fill series selection shown in Figure 119 Fill Series Direction Down 2 Up Start value Series type Linear C Growth C Date AutoFill January Figure 119 Specifying the start of a fill series result is in Figure 118 130 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 You can also use Edit gt Fill gt Series to create a one time fill series for numbers by entering the start and end values and the increment For example if you entered start and end values of 1 and 7 with an increment of 2 you would get the sequence of 1 3 5 7 In all these cases the Fill tool creates only a momentary connection between the cells Once they are filled the cells have no further connection with one another Defining a fill series To define your own fill Series 1 Go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Calc gt Sort Lists This dialog shows the previously defined series in the Lists box on the left and the contents of the highlighted list in the Entries box Lists Entries S5un Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun A Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd Mon i Jan Feb Mar Apr May
84. Single column or row Using the Insert menu 1 Select the cell column or row where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Choose either Insert gt Columns or Insert gt Rows Using the mouse 1 Select the cell column or row where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Right click the header of the column or row 3 Choose Insert Rows or Insert Columns Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be inserted at once rather than inserting them one at a time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for inserting a single column or row above The specified number of rows columns will be inserted above or to the left of the first one you selected Deleting columns and rows Columns and rows can be deleted individually or in groups Single column or row A single column or row can only be deleted by using the mouse 1 Select the column or row to be deleted 2 Right click on the column or row header 3 Select Delete Columns or Delete Rows from the pop up menu Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be deleted at once rather than deleting them one at a time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for deleting a sin
85. Times New Roman Arial 5 Fixed Courier New s Figure 287 Fonts dialog The Custom fonts section determines which font will be used when the attribute font serif font sans or font fixed is specified Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 269 To change a font first click on Modify and choose the type of entry you wish to modify The Fonts dialog opens showing all the fonts available on your system Lea SO Fonts Font OK Liberation Serif Cancel Liberation Sans Liberation Sans Narrow Liberation Serif Like Pro Linux Biolinum G Attributes Bold Italic Liberation Serif Figure 288 Font dialog If you enter an initial character in the upper text box the list will jump to that place By entering a few additional characters you can specify the exact font that you want If you do not know its name use the scrollbar to scroll through them Click on any name and the box below will show a preview Variables should be written in italics so make sure that the talic box is checked For all other elements use the basic Roman form The style can be easily altered in the formula itself by using the commands Italic or bold to set these characteristics and nitalic or nbold to unset them When you have chosen a new font for a formula the old font remains in the list alongside the new one and can be selected again This applies only to the current session the old font is not stored permanent
86. a style in a slide master results in changes to all the slides based on that slide master but you can modify individual slides without affecting the slide master Although it is highly recommended to use the slide masters whenever possible there are occasions where manual changes are needed for a particular slide for example to enlarge the chart area when the text and chart layout is used Slide masters have two types of styles associated with them presentation styles and graphic styles The prepackaged presentation styles can be modified but new presentation styles cannot be created In the case of graphic styles you can modify the prepackaged ones and also create new ones Presentation styles affect three elements of a slide master background background objects such as icons decorative lines and text frames and text placed on the slide Text styles are further divided into Notes Outline 1 through Outline 9 Subtitle and Title The outline styles are used for the different levels of the outline to which they belong For example Outline 2 is used for the sub points of Outline 1 and Outline 3 is used for the sub points of Outline 2 Graphic styles affect many of the elements of a slide Notice that text styles exist in both the presentation and graphic style selections 172 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Slide masters Impress comes with a collection of slide masters These slide masters are shown in the Master Pag
87. a shortcut key combination that is already in use you must first delete the existing key Shortcut keys that are greyed out in the listing on the Customize dialog such as F1 and F10 are not available for reassignment Example Assigning styles to shortcut keys You can configure shortcut keys to quickly assign styles in your document Some shortcuts are predefined such as Ctr 0 for the Text body paragraph style Ctr 1 for the Heading 1 style and Ctrl 2 for Heading 2 You can modify these shortcuts and create your own 1 Click Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Keyboard page of the Customize dialog opens Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Shor bat keys A LibreOffice Heading 3 Writer Ctrl 4 Heading 4 y Cirl 5 Heading 5 Cirl 8 Bold Ctrl D Double Underline Ctrl Centred Functions Category Function Frame Index Heading Numbering Index Separator Modify List Internal List i LibreOffice Macros List 1 Cont i Styles List 1 End List 1 Start List 2 List 2 Cont List 2 End List 2 Start Numbering Figure 354 Defining keyboard shortcuts for applying styles Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 359 2 To have the shortcut key assignment available only with one component for example Writer select that component s name in the upper right corner of the page otherwise select LibreOffice to make it available to every co
88. adjusts how far the header or footer is from the side of the page Spacing Spacing affects how far above or below the sheet the header or footer will print So if spacing is set to 1 00 then there will be 1 inch between the header or footer and the sheet 146 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Height Height affects how big the header or footer will be Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Header Same content left right Left margin 0 00cm n Right margin 0 00cm Spacing 025cm G Height 0 50cem G AutoFit height Figure 135 Header dialog Header or footer appearance To change the appearance of the header or footer click the More button in the header dialog This opens the Border Background dialog Figure 136 From this dialog you can set the background and border of the header or footer For more information see Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide O Borders Background Line arrangement Line Spacing to contents Detant Style Left 0 00cm ES JOO none TES a 0 05 pt 4 O0cm Ge User defined E 0 50 pt Top 0 00cm S 1 00 pt i o Bottom 0 00cm S B TIA p still Synchronize MEE 5 00 ot e Color E black Shadow style Position L 2 aa 0 16cm C Gray Figure 136 Header Footer Border Background Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 147 Set
89. also work as a standalone tool You can save formulas in the standard Mathematical Markup Language MathML format for inclusion in web pages and other documents not created by LibreOffice The advantages of LibreOffice Here are some of the advantages of LibreOffice over other office suites No licensing fees LibreOffice is free for anyone to use and distribute at no cost Many features that are available as extra cost add ins in other office suites like PDF export are free with LibreOffice There are no hidden charges now or in the future Open source You can distribute copy and modify the software as much as you wish in accordance with either of LibreOffice s Open Source licenses Cross platform LibreOffice runs on several hardware architectures and under multiple Operating systems such as Microsoft Windows Mac OS X and Linux Extensive language support LibreOffice s user interface is available in over 40 languages and the LibreOffice project provides spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries in over 70 languages and dialects LibreOffice also provides support for both Complex Text Layout CTL and Right to Left RTL layout languages such as Urdu Hebrew and Arabic Consistent user interface All the components have a similar look and feel making them easy to use and master Integration The components of LibreOffice are well integrated with one another All the components share a common spelling c
90. and hold the left mouse button to create the starting point of your curve then while holding down the left mouse button drag from the starting point to draw a line Release the left mouse button and continue to drag the cursor to bend the line into a curve Click to set the end point of the curve and fix the line on the page To continue with your line drag the mouse cursor to draw a straight line Each mouse click sets a corner point and allows you to continue drawing another straight line from the corner point A double click ends the drawing of your line A filled curve automatically joins the last point to the first point to close off the figure and fills it with the current standard fill color A curve without filling will not be closed at the end of the drawing Polygons Click and draw the first line from the start point with the left mouse button held down As soon as you release the mouse button a line between the first and second points is drawn Move the cursor to draw the next line Each mouse click sets a corner point and allows you to draw another line A double click ends the drawing A filled polygon automatically joins the last point to the first point to close off the figure and fills it with the current standard fill color A polygon without filling will not be closed at the end of the drawing Polygons 45 Like ordinary polygons these are formed from lines but the angles between lines are restricted to 45 or 90 degrees
91. are populated with data from the row you selected and the Form Navigation toolbar appears at the bottom of the spreadsheet 8 Click the arrows on the Form Navigation toolbar to view the different records of the table The arrows are circled in red The number in the box changes when you change the record number by clicking an arrow The data in the fields changes correspondingly to the data for that particular record number dH Record 2 of 4 id 4d p py Figure 245 Navigation arrows of a form Entering data in a form Records are used to organize the data we enter into a form They also organize the data we enter into a subform Different types of field allow different methods of data entry In many cases more than one method can be used The first step to entering data in a form is to open it from the main database window Figure 213 1 Click the Forms icon in the Database list 2 Find the form s name in the Forms list Vacations 3 Double click the form s name The quickest way to enter a date in the Date field is to click the arrow that opens the drop down calendar Figure 246 Then click the day the you want Then press the Tab key to go to the Odometer field 4 September 2008 p SMTWTFS 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 17 18 190 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Today None Figure 246 Calendar drop down Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 239 The Odometer Tolls and Motel fields are numeric fields Enter
92. are styles A style is a set of formats that you can apply to selected pages text frames and other elements in your document to quickly change their appearance When you apply a style you apply a whole group of formats at the same time Many people manually format paragraphs words tables page layouts and other parts of their documents without paying any attention to styles They are used to writing documents according to physical attributes For example you might specify the font family font size and any formatting such as bold or italic Styles are ogical attributes Using styles means that you stop saying font size 14pt Times New Roman bold centered and you start saying Title because you have defined the Title style to have those characteristics In other words styles means that you shift the emphasis from what the text or page or other element looks like to what the text is Styles help improve consistency in a document They also make major formatting changes easy For example you may decide to change the indentation of all paragraphs or change the font of all titles For a long document this simple task can be prohibitive Styles make the task easy In addition styles are used by LibreOffice for many processes even if you are not aware of them For example Writer relies on heading styles or other styles you specify when it compiles a table of contents Some common examples of style use are given i
93. be used with any element such as fraction square root etc Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 263 Isolated and unpaired brackets Math expects that for every opening bracket there will be a closing one If you forget a bracket Math places an inverted question mark by the corresponding bracket This disappears when all brackets are matched Sometimes forgetting a bracket causes the whole structure of the formula to fall apart However an unpaired bracket is sometimes necessary In such cases you have two options e With non scalable brackets use a preceding backslash to indicate that the following character should not be regarded as a bracket but as a literal character So the half open interval a b is represented by a b try comparing this with a b e Scalable brackets can also be unpaired The same half open interval is represented by left a b right For scalable brackets you can also use the command none to replace a non existent paired bracket Ix xX for x 0 x for x lt 0O can be represented by abs x left lbrace stack x for x gt 0 x for x lt O right none Recognizing functions in Math In the basic installation Math outputs variables in italics If you enter a function Math usually recognizes it and outputs it normally a list of recognized functions is available in the Math Guide If Math fails to recognize a function you can inform Math about it Enter the markup code
94. below 266 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Untitled 2 LibreOffice Math QQ8Q Bis B ue ae gt The example shows so called curve sketching 4 The example shows so called curve sketching Figure 283 Smart quotes included by copy and paste from Writer Text is shown in the font that was selected from the Text list in the Fonts dialog compare with the section Changing the font on page 269 To use a font from the lower window of the equation editor set the attribute Serif Sans or Fixed before the text By default text is left justified You can change the justification with alignc or alignr Commands are not interpreted within text Use quotes to break up the text if you wish to use special formatting commands In color blue bold isosceles triangles the base angles are equal In isosceles triangles the base angles are equal How do I align my equations at the equals sign Math does not have a command for aligning equations on a particular character but you can use a matrix to do this as shown below Markup Result matrix alignr x y alignl 2 x y 2 alignr x alignl 2 y xX 2 y The empty braces around are necessary because Is a binary operator and thus needs an expression on each side You can reduce the spacing around if you change the inter column spacing of the matrix 1 With the equation editor open choose Format
95. button to import macro libraries See Figure 340 Note You cannot import the library named Standard On Linux the LibreOffice specific files are stored under the user s home directory in a directory whose name begins with a period Directories and files with names beginning with a period are not shown in a normal selection dialog To open the directory either navigate to the home directory enter the name libreoffice 3 and then click Open or press Ctrl H to show hidden folders and files and navigate as usual This will open the directory which is not initially shown 342 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Import Libraries 0 k esto trot a ser bas re i Q Search dialog xlb 290 bytes 15 30 Recently Used script xlb 351 bytes 15 30 E sfazu E Desktop File System t File type Figure 340 Select a macro library to import Navigate to the directory containing the library to import There are usually two files from which to choose dialog xlb and script xlb It does not matter which of these two files you select both will be imported Select a file and click Open to continue Import Libraries File name script xlb TestLibrary Options C Insert as reference read only C Replace existing libraries Figure 341 Choose library import options If the library already exists it will not be replaced unless Replace existing libraries is checked If Insert as reference is checked the library is
96. can also create your own reference items see Setting References in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for instructions To insert a cross reference to a heading figure bookmark or other item 1 In your document place the cursor where you want the cross reference to appear 2 Ifthe Fields dialog is not open click Insert gt Cross reference On the Cross references tab Figure 92 in the Type list select the type of item to be referenced for example Heading or Figure You can leave this page open while you insert many cross references 3 Click on the required item in the Selection list which shows all the items of the selected type In the Insert reference to list choose the format required The list varies according to the Type The most commonly used options are Reference to insert the full text of a heading or caption Category and Number to insert a figure number preceded by the word Figure or Table but without the caption text Numbering to insert only the figure or table number without the word Figure or Table or Page to insert the number of the page the referenced text is on Click Insert Fields eg Document Cross references Functions DocInformation Variables Database Type Selection Set Reference The Writer interface Insert Reference Status bar Sy Changing document views Ei Numbered Paragraphs Moving quickly through a document Figure Working with
97. category To hide the list of categories and show only the toolbars at the top click the List Box On Off icon Click this icon again to show the list box Wale Fas ES Tables E Text Frames my Graphics lib OLE objects s Bookmarks Sections Hyperlinks References T Indexes Comments Gy Draw objects W2_0101GD3 IntroducingLibreOffice Figure 14 The Navigator The Navigator provides several convenient ways to move around a document and find items in it e When a category is showing the list of objects in it double click on an object to jump directly to that object s location in the document Objects are much easier to find if you have given them names when creating them instead of keeping LibreOffice s default graphics1 graphics2 Table1 Table2 and so on which may not correspond to the position of the object in the document 30 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 If you only want to see the content in a certain category highlight the category and click the CJ Content View icon Mal Until you click the icon again only the objects of that category will be displayed e Click the Navigation icon O second icon from the left at the top of the Navigator to display the Navigation toolbar Here you can pick one of the categories and use the Previous and Next icons to move from one item to the next This is particularly helpful for finding items like bookmarks and indexes
98. document Click Keep Old Styles if you do not want to apply the template s changed styles to the document but see the Caution notice below If you choose Keep Old Styles in the message box shown in Figure 58 that message will not appear again the next time you open the document after changing the template it is based on You will not get another chance to update the styles from the template although you can use the macro given in the Note below to re enable A this feature If you are using Writer you can also use the Template Changer extension see page 73 to reactivate the template Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 69 To re enable updating from a template 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic Select the document from the list click the expansion symbol or triangle and select Standard If Standard has an expansion symbol beside it click that and select a module 2 If the Edit button is active click it If the Edit button is not active click New 3 In the Basic window enter the following Sub FixDocV3 set UpdateFromTemplate oDocSettings ThisComponent createInstance _ com sun star document Settings oDocSettings UpdateFromTemplate True End Sub FixDocVv3 4 Click the Run BASIC icon then close the Basic window 5 Save the document The next time you open this document you will be prompted to update the styles from the modified template Adding templates o
99. drag the object until the rotation point is at the desired position This rotation point can even be outside of the object If you press the Shift key while rotating an object rotation will be restricted to 15 of movement This is the default behavior of the Shift key However if When creating or moving objects has been selected in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt Grid the action of the Shift key is reversed that is rotation will be restricted to 15 of movement unless the Shift key is pressed Slanting an object To slant an object use the handles located at the midpoints on the top bottom and sides of a selected object The mouse cursor changes when it hovers over one of these midpoint handles The axis used for slanting an object is the object edge directly opposite the midpoint handle being used to slant the object This axis stays fixed in location while the other sides of the object move in relation to it as you drag the mouse cursor Click and hold the mouse button then start to move the cursor to shear the object A dotted outline of the object being slanted appears Figure 194 and the current angle of slanting is shown in the Status bar If you press the Shift key while slanting an object slanting will be restricted to 15 of movement This is the default behavior of the Shift key However if When creating or moving objects has been selected in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt Grid the act
100. example Math has recognized the minus sign as a prefix for the 1 and has therefore placed it in the numerator of the fraction If you wish to show that the whole thing is negative with the minus sign in front of the fraction you must put the fraction in brackets in order to signify to Math that the characters belong together The braces belong solely to the layout of the markup code and are not printed If you wish to use braces in the formula use the commands Ibrace and rbrace Compare the following examples Markup Result Markup Result X x over lbrace x 1 X x 1 rbrace x 1 x over x 1 Brackets with matrices look ugly For background we start with an overview of the matrix command Markup Result matrix a b cd d T Note Rows are separated by two s and entries within each row are separated by one The first problem people have with matrices is that brackets do not scale with the matrix Markup Result matrix a b c d _ 2 D Math provides scalable brackets That is the brackets grow in size to match the size of their contents Use the commands eft and right to make scalable brackets Markup Result left matrix a b c d right Use eft and right to obtain square brackets The list of all available brackets is available in appendix of Math Guide These scalable brackets may also
101. from those used in Windows and Linux The table below gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this chapter For a more detailed list see the application Help Windows or Linux Mac equivalent Effect Tools gt Options menu LibreOffice gt Preferences Access setup options selection Right click Control click Opens a context menu Ctrl Control do Command Used with other keys FS Shift d F5 Opens the Navigator F11 T Opens the Styles and Formatting window 8 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Preface Who ts this book for Anyone who wants to get up to speed quickly with LibreOffice will find this book valuable You may be new to office software or you may be familiar with another office suite What s tn this book This book introduces the main components of LibreOffice e Writer word processing e Calc Spreadsheets e Impress presentations e Draw vector graphics e Base database e Math equation editor It also covers some of the features common to all components including setup and customization styles and templates macro recording and printing For more detail see the user guides for the individual components Where to get more help This book the other LibreOffice user guides the built in Help system and user support systems assume that you are familiar with your computer and basic functions such as starting a program Opening an
102. gt AutoCorrect gt While Typing Bullets and Numbering x RS re 7 TA I ct l E e oer tT T d te amp Bi ke CEL Eel La ba SE i 1 3 4 5 6 F 8 amp 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 Bullets On Off 6 Promote One Level with 10 Move Down 2 Numbering On Off Subpoints 11 Move Up with Subpoints 3 Numbering Off 7 Demote One Level with 12 Move Down with Subpoints Subpoints 4 Promote One Level 8 Insert Unnumbered Entry 13 Restart Numbering 5 Demote One Level 9 Move Up 14 Bullets and Numbering Figure 82 Bullets and Numbering toolbar Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 95 Hyphenating words You have several choices regarding hyphenation let Writer do it automatically using its hyphenation dictionaries insert conditional hyphens manually where necessary or don t hyphenate at all Automatic hyphenation To turn automatic hyphenation of words on or off 1 Press F11 T on Mac to open the Styles w G p A and Formatting window 2 Onthe Paragraph Styles page Figure 83 right click on Default and select Modify 3 On the Paragraph Style dialog Figure 84 Complimentary close go to the Text Flow page oe i 4 Under Hyphenation select or deselect the Heading 10 Automatically option Click OK to save Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 Automatic Figure 83 Modifying a style Paragraph Style Default x Numbering Tabs Drop Caps Background Borders ne LOrganizer JL Indents amp Spacing Jl Allanment_ T
103. gt Options gt LibreOffice Writer gt General Settings Measurement unit inch k Tab stops 0 507 aie Figure 78 Selecting a default tab stop interval You can also set or change the measurement unit for rulers in the current document by right clicking on the ruler to open a list of units Click on one of them to change the ruler to that unit The selected setting applies only to that ruler millimetre s centimetre inch sd point D Gl l pica Char Figure 79 Changing the measurement unit for a ruler Checking spelling and grammar Writer provides a spelling checker which can be used in two ways asc AutoSpellcheck checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under any misspelled words When the word is corrected the line disappears yer To perform a separate spelling check on the document or a text selection click the Spelling and Grammar button This checks the document or selection and opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog if any misspelled words are found Here are some more features of the spelling checker e You can right click on a word with a wavy underline to open a context menu If you select from the suggested words on the menu the selection will replace the misspelled word in your text Other menu options are discussed below e You can change the dictionary language for example Spanish French or German on the Spelling and Grammar dialog 90 Getting Started with
104. gt Page Number Including the total number of pages To include the total number of pages as in page 1 of 12 1 Type the word page and a space then insert the page number as above 2 Press the spacebar once type the word of and a space then choose Insert gt Fields gt Page Count The Page Count field inserts the total number of pages in the document as shown on the Statistics tab of the document s Properties window File gt Properties If you restart page numbering anywhere in the document then the total page count may not be what you want See Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide for more information Restarting page numbering Often you will want to restart the page numbering at 1 for example on the page following a title page or a table of contents In addition many documents have the front matter such as the table of contents numbered with Roman numerals and the main body of the document numbered in Arabic numerals starting with 1 You can restart page numbering in two ways Method 1 1 Place the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page 2 Choose Format gt Paragraph 3 On the Text Flow tab of the Paragraph dialog select Breaks 4 Select Insert and then With Page Style and specify the page style to use 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Method 1 is also useful for numbering the first page of a document with a page number greater than 1
105. http wiki documentfoundation org Faq User guides how tos and other documentation Documentation http www libreoffice org get help documentation https wiki documentfoundation org Documentation Publications Free community support is provided by a network of experienced users Mailing lists http www libreoffice org get help mailing lists The LibreOffice website in your language http www libreoffice org international sites International mailing lists http wiki documentfoundation org Local_ Mailing_ Lists International support Information about available accessibility options Accessibility options http www libreoffice org get help accessibility What you see may be different LibreOffice runs on Windows Linux and Mac OS X operating systems each of which has several versions and can be customized by users fonts colors themes window managers The pictures in this book were taken from a variety of computers and operating systems Some pictures will therefore not look exactly like what you see on your computer Using LibreOffice on a Mac Some keystrokes and menu items are different on a Mac from those used in Windows and Linux The table below gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this chapter For a more detailed list see the application Help Windows or Linux Mac equivalent Effect Tools gt Options menu LibreOffice gt Preferences Access setup options
106. hyperlink show useful text such as 2009 Sales Graph you need to give such objects useful names instead of leaving them as the default names Graphics6 or you need to edit the resulting link text using the Hyperlink dialog as described below You can also use the Navigator to insert a hyperlink from one document the source to a specific place in another document the target Open the Navigator in the target document and drag the item to the spot in the source document where you want the hyperlink to appear Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 317 Using the Hyperlink dialog To display the dialog click the Hyperlink icon on the Standard toolbar or choose Insert gt Hyperlink from the menu bar To turn existing text into a link highlight it before opening the dialog Hyperlink Hyperlink type je Web Telnet Internet Target Further settings Frame Document A S Mew Document Text Mame Figure 329 Hyperlink dialog showing details for Internet links On the left side select one of the four categories of hyperlink e Internet the hyperlink points to a web address normally starting with http e Mail amp News the hyperlink opens an email message that is pre addressed to a particular recipient e Document the hyperlink points to another document or to another place in the current document e New document the hyperlink creates a new document The top right part of the dialog changes
107. in Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates Customizing menu content In addition to changing the menu font described in Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice you can add and rearrange categories on the menu bar add commands to menus and make other changes To customize menus 1 Choose Tools gt Customize 2 On the Customize dialog choose the Menus page Customise Eee Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events LibreOffice Writer Menus Menu Content Entries New Add Open Recent Documents Modify z Wizards es Close m Dave Dave S Save All I Reload xl Save In LibreOffice Writer ka Description Creates a new LibreOffice document Figure 347 The Menus page of the Customize dialog 3 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed menu for the application for example LibreOffice Writer or for a selected document for example SampleDocument odt 4 Inthe section LibreOffice name of the program example Writer Menus select from the Menu drop down list the menu that you want to customize The list includes all the main menus as well as submenus menus that are contained under another menu For 352 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 example in addition to File Edit View and so on there is File Send and File Templates The commands available for the selected menu are shown in the central part of the dialog 5 To customize the se
108. in a template or document To print a list of the styles defined in a template 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template 2 Double click the required template Styles appears below it Click Styles to select it 3 Click the Commands button and choose Print from the drop down menu The Print dialog opens From here you can print to a file or to a printer as usual For more about the Print dialog see Chapter 10 LELOA Template Management 0103G534 5tylesAndTemplate template test Presentation Backgrounds Presentations Address Book A Templates Documents A File Figure 61 Printing a list of styles in a template To print a list of styles in a document double click on the document s name in the middle column to display Styles and then use Commands gt Print Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 75 Examples of style use The following examples of common use of page and paragraph styles are taken from Writer There are many other ways to use styles see the guides for the various components for details Defining a different first page for a document Many documents such as letters and reports have a first page that is different from the other pages in the document For example the first page of a letterhead typically has a different header or the first page of a report mig
109. in this book Freezing rows and columns Freezing locks a number of rows at the top of a spreadsheet or a number of columns on the left of a spreadsheet or both Then when scrolling around within the sheet any frozen columns and rows remain in view Figure 111 shows some frozen rows and columns The heavier horizontal line between rows 3 and 14 and the heavier vertical line between columns C and H denote the frozen areas Rows 4 through 13 and columns D through G have been scrolled off the page The first three rows and columns remained because are frozen into place BEE cc aa 2 i D T oN 5 A R io bh 3 5 3 S S aj amp Bo g oO D i Lo Ci _ on H ol a edad E g E E S 3 s s D Ss OS OSs 5 Date 10 02 10 03 10 04 10 08 10 06 10 07 10 08 10 09 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 1 3 Average 267 5 Possible 28 0 0 an ol 16 0 28 0 40 eo 60 35 ia 76 0 11 0 lt EuS 7 55 E i a John 26 00 1 00 0 00 8 00 26 00 0 00 6 00 0 00 3 50 4 00 65 50 8 00 11 __ 67 3 181 5 Klein Mike 28 00 1 00 1 00 11 60 8 00 6 00 0 00 5 00 6 00 3 60 3 60 47 60 10 00 11 __ 72 7 186 5 Johnson Tom 27 00 1 00 3 00 0 00 13 00 6 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 00 47 60 9 00 16 82 6 213 0 Doe John 2700 1 00 1 00 2 00 17 00 17 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 60 54 00 9 00 11 __ 96 4 258 0 Doe Jane 28 00 1 00 3 00 9 00 16 00 28 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3
110. is no satisfactory double arrow in Math If you have a font with a correct symbol you may use the method described in Customizing the catalog on page 273 For instance DejaVu fonts have these double arrows 2 S S Otherwise you may find a special character in a document and copy it for instance in this formula C O2CO You will find other double arrows here http dev w3 org html5 html author charref from character x021C4 Math commands Reference The complete list of commands and reserved words used by Math is available in the Math Guide e Unary binary operators e Relations e Set operations e Functions e Operators e Attributes e Brackets e Formats e Others e Characters Greek e Characters Special e Reserved words in alphabetic order 276 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing Introduction This chapter provides general information about printing exporting and e mailing documents from LibreOffice Quick printing Click the Print File Directly icon to send the entire document to the default printer defined for your computer You can change the action of the Print File Directly icon to send the document to the printer defined for the document instead of the default printer for the computer Go to Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General and select the Load printer settings with the document
111. lines lines with arrowheads The information field on the status bar shows them only as lines Click on the Line Ends with Arrow icon to draw an arrow The arrow head is drawn at the end point of the arrow when you release the mouse button Choosing line endings Several types of line endings arrows circles squares and others are available in Draw Click on the small triangle or arrow to the right of the Lines and Arrows gt icon on the Drawing toolbar to open a pop up toolbar with ten tools for drawing lines and arrows Alternatively go to View gt Toolbars gt Arrows to open the Arrows toolbar as a floating toolbar Figure 177 and Table 4 The icon for the tool used most recently will be shown on the Drawing toolbar to make it easier to use the same tool again After drawing the line you can change the arrow style by clicking on the Arrowheads icon in the Line and Filling toolbar and select the arrow start and end options 188 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Figure 177 Arrows toolbar Table 4 Tools on the Arrows toolbar Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Icon Tool name F Line gt Line ends be Line with bn Line with with arrow arrow circle arrow square 2 R Line starts Line with Line with ra Ene with arrow sii circle arrow me square arrow Dimension Line with i line iki arrows Drawing rectangles or squares Drawing a rectangle is simil
112. may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the package installation is complete the templates are available for use through File gt New gt Templates and Documents and the extension is listed in the Extension Manager 70 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 5 Extension Manager English spelling and hyphenation dictionaries and thesaurus 2010 03 16 LanguageTool Open source language checker 1 2 LanguageTool PDF Import 1 0 5 Oracle 4 The PDF Import Extension allows you to import and modify PDF documents Best results with 100 la Presentation Minimizer 1 0 3 Oracle 4 The Presentation Minimizer is used to reduce the file size of the current presentation Images will be co Presenter Console 1 1 0 Oracle The Presenter Console Extension provides more control over your slide show presentation such as th Professional Template Pack II English 1 0 Sun Microsystems The second template pack by Sun Microsystems provides more than 120 professionally designed doc Pee Pie ae 4 A isn mile e Get more extensions online f Check for Updates Figure 59 Newly added package of templates See Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for more about the Extension Manager Setting a default template If you create a document by choosing File gt New gt Text Document or Spreadsheet Presentation or Drawing from the main menu LibreOffice creates the document from the default template for that type of docu
113. of styles for example only custom styles Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 59 Ci Styles and Formatting Ed Paragraph Styles 0 AJ C E3 A E New Style from Selection Defalilt r Update Style Character Styles rine Inddnt Load Styles Hanging indent Frame Styles erchir Heading 1 Fill Format Mode Page Styles eE Heading 2 Heading 3 List Styles ET Heading 5 a Automatic k l Figure 48 The Styles and Formatting window for Writer showing paragraph styles Using Fill Format Mode Use Fill Format to apply a style to many different areas quickly without having to go back to the Styles and Formatting window and double click every time This method is quite useful when you need to format many scattered paragraphs cells or other items with the same style 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and select the style you want to apply 2 Click the Fill Format Mode icon 3 To apply a paragraph page or frame style hover the mouse over the paragraph page or frame and click To apply a character style hold down the mouse button while selecting the characters Clicking on a word applies the character style for that word Repeat step 3 until you made all the changes for that style 4 To quit Fill Format mode click the Fill Format Mode icon again or press the Esc key When this mode is active a right click anywhere in the document undoes the last Fill Format action Be carefu
114. of its technical specifications A short history of LibreOffice The OpenOffice org project began when Sun Microsystems released the source code blueprints for its StarOffice software to the open source community on October 13 2000 OpenOffice org 1 0 the product was released on April 30 2002 Major updates to OpenOffice org included version 2 0 in October 2005 and version 3 0 in October 2008 On January 26 2010 Oracle Corporation acquired Sun Microsystems On September 28 2010 the community of volunteers who develop and promote OpenOffice org announce a major change in the project s structure After ten years successful growth with Sun Microsystems as founding and principle sponsor the project launched an independent foundation called The Document Foundation to fulfil the promise of independence written in the original charter This foundation is the cornerstone of a new ecosystem where individuals and organizations can contribute to and benefit from the availability of a truly free office suite Unable to acquire the trademarked OpenOffice org name from Oracle Corporation The Document Foundation named its product LibreOffice Continuing the version numbers from OpenOffice org LibreOffice 3 3 was released in January 2011 In February 2012 The Document Foundation was incorporated in Berlin as a German Stiftung You can read more about The Document Foundation at hitp www documentfoundation org The LibreOffice commun
115. of the arrows Using Home End Page Up and Page Down e Home moves the focus to the start of a row e End moves the focus to the column furthest to the right that contains data e Page Down moves the display down one complete screen and Page Up moves the display up One complete screen e Combinations of Control and Alt with Home End Page Down Page Up and the cursor keys move the focus of the current cell in other ways See the Help or Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts in the Calc Guide for details Tip Use one of the four A t Arrow key combinations to resize a cell Customizing the Enter key You can customize the direction in which the Enter key moves the focus by selecting Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Calc gt General The four choices for the direction of the Enter key are shown on the right hand side of Figure 104 It can move the focus down right up or left Depending on the file being used or on the type of data being entered setting a different direction can be useful The Enter key can also be used to switch into and out of editing mode Use the first two options under nput settings in Figure 104 to change the Enter key settings Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 117 Input settings a Press Enter to move selection L Press Enter to switch to edit mode L Expand formatting E Expand references when new columns rows are inserted Figure 104 Customizing the effect of t
116. only Cancel Figure 298 Printing a selection of text Calc You can choose single sheets multiple sheets and selections of cells for printing Range and copies All sheets Number of copies i i Selected sheets Selected cells Mcollate 2 Su Thereof print All pages Pages 1 3 Figure 299 Choosing what to print in Calc Printing an individual sheet 1 In the spreadsheet click on the sheet tab to select the sheet you want to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog choose the Selected sheets option 4 Click the Print button 282 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Printing a range of sheets 1 Inthe spreadsheet select the sheets to print a Select the first sheet b Hold down the Control key c Click on the additional sheet tabs d Release the Control key when all required sheets are selected 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog choose the Selected sheets option 4 Click the Print button Printing a selection of cells 1 Inthe document select the section of cells to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu 3 Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Selected cells option 4 Click the Print button After printing be sure to deselect the extra sheets If you keep them selected the next time you enter data on one sheet you e
117. only the data that is changed or added to a table or query They do not show any modifications made to the table or query itself For example after creating the report below open the fuel economy query created in the previous section For the End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer column change the A number 1 to the number 3 The report will be identical before and after you make the change But if you add more data to the query and run the report again it will contain the new data Creating a report We will create a report on vacation expenses Certain questions need to be asked before creating the report e What information do we want in the report e How do we want the information arranged e What fields are required to provide this information e Will a query or view have to be created because these fields are in different tables e Are there any calculations required in the data before being added to the report The expenses for our vacation are motel tolls miscellaneous breakfast lunch Supper snacks and fuel One possible report could list the totals of each of these expense groups Another could Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 249 list the expense totals for each day of the vacation A third could list the totals for each expense group for each type of payment This would let us know where the money came from to pay the expenses Once you create a query to do any one of these you can crea
118. order as in Figure 239 Click OK 5 Save and close the form 6 Save the database Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 233 Tab Order Controls Ey k Move Up w fmt dometer fac fmtTolls w fmtMotel El txtMPayment fmtMiscellaneous Automatic Sort EM MiscPayment ex fmtBreakfast E txtBPayment fmtLunch E txtLPayment Move Down m FmtSupper OK Em txtSPayment e FmcSnackNo Cancel ae FrmtSnackCost EB txtSnPayment asc ExEMiscNotes i Help Figure 239 Tab order for the main form Creating forms and sub forms in Design View This method requires using the Form Controls and Form Design toolbars extensively These techniques are beyond the scope of this document Instructions for creating forms using Design view will be described in the Database Guide Accessing other data sources LibreOffice allows data sources to be accessed and then linked into LibreOffice documents For example a mail merge links an external document containing a list of names and addresses into a letter with one copy of the letter being generated for each entry To access a data source that is not a odb file 1 2 3 4 File gt New gt Database opens the Database Wizard window Select Connect to an existing database Click the arrow next to the Database type field and select the database type from the drop down list Click Next Click Browse and select the database Click Next Accept the default settin
119. sheets in Calc before printing 1 Choose File gt Page Preview The Calc window now displays the Page Preview toolbar instead of the Formatting toolbar as Ley E C Format Page Margins Close Preview Figure 301 Page Preview toolbar Calc 2 To print the document from this view click the Print document icon lt 24 to open the Print dialog 3 Choose the print options and click the Print button Exporting to PDF LibreOffice can export documents to PDF Portable Document Format This industry standard file format is ideal for sending the file to someone else to view using Adobe Reader or other PDF viewers The process and dialogs are the same for Writer Calc Impress and Draw with a few minor differences mentioned in this section Quick export to PDF Click the Export Directly as PDF icon to export the entire document using the PDF settings you most recently selected on the PDF Options dialog You are asked to enter the file name and location for the PDF file but you do not get a chance to choose a page range the image compression or other options Controlling PDF content and quality For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF use File gt Export as PDF The PDF Options dialog opens This dialog has five pages General Initial View User Interface Links and Security Select the appropriate settings and then click Export Then you are asked to enter the locatio
120. standard default behavior for activating hyperlinks within LibreOffice is to use Ctrl click This behavior can be changed in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Security gt Options by deselecting the option Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks If clicking in your links activates them check that page to see if the option has been deselected Removing hyperlinks You can remove the clickable link from hyperlink text leaving just the text by right clicking on the link and selecting Remove Hyperlink You may then need to re apply some formatting in order for the text to match the rest of your document To erase the link text or button from the document completely select it and press the Backspace or Delete key Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 319 Saving Writer documents as web pages Writer s HTML capabilities include saving existing documents in HTML format creating new documents as HTML not described here and creating several different types of web pages using a wizard The easiest way to create HTML documents is to start with an existing Writer document You can get a good idea of how it will appear as a web page by using View gt Web Layout However web layout view will not show you which features will or will not save correctly to HTML Some considerations are described in the introduction to this chapter Saving a document as a single web page To save a document as a single web page HTML format choose Fil
121. style press the F11 key to open the Styles and Formatting window Handout view Handout view is for setting up the layout of your slide for a printed handout Click the Handout tab in the workspace then choose Layouts in the Tasks pane You can then choose to print 1 2 3 4 6 or 9 slides per page Tasks View X b Master Pages a 7 Layouts goe Figure 145 Handout layouts Use this view also to customize the information printed on the handout Refer to Chapter 10 Printing E mailing Exporting and Saving Slide Shows of the Impress Guide for instructions on printing slides handouts and notes 156 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Select from the main menu Insert gt Page Number or Insert gt Date and Time and in the dialog box that opens click on the Notes and Handouts tab Figure 146 Use this dialog to select the elements you want to appear on each handout page and their contents More details on how to use this dialog are provided in the mpress Guide x Header and Footer Slide Notes and Handouts Ee Header text fo Date and time Fixed eS Variable Language 12 07 11 English USA Sal Footer Footer text C Page number Figure 146 Dialog to set the page information for handouts and notes Slide Sorter view Slide Sorter view Figure 147 contains all of the slide thumbnails Use this view to work with a group of slides or with only one slide Da
122. styles available on the Bullets page If a graphics style is needed select one from those available on the Graphics page If a numbered list is needed select one of the default numbering styles on the Numbering type page x Bullets and Numbering Bullets Numbering type Graphics Position Customize Selection x Mi Y WV x NX OK Cancel Help Reset Figure 156 Bullets and Numbering dialog For a single line in the list click anywhere in the line to place the cursor in it and then follow steps 2 and 3 in the previous instruction set If the list was created in an AutoLayout text box then an alternative way to change the entire list is to modify the Outline styles Changes made to the outline style will apply to all the slides using them Sometimes this is what you want sometimes it is not so Some care must be taken Adding pictures tables charts and media As we have seen besides text a contents box can contain also pictures tables charts or media clips This section provides a quick overview of how to work with these objects however for a more detailed description please refer to the Impress Guide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 169 Adding pictures To add a picture to a contents box e Goto Insert gt Picture on the main menu bar and then select either From file or Scan e Alternatively or after inserting a new slide click the Insert Picture icon Figure 153 a
123. text the Line and Filling toolbar automatically changes to show the Text Formatting toolbar Figure 197 You can also open the Text Formatting toolbar by selecting View gt Toolbars gt Text Formatting The tools on this toolbar will not become active until text has been selected Available tools on the Text Formatting toolbar are shown from left to right in Figure 198 Text Formatting Liberation Sans 3 E w N ic E Figure 197 Text Formatting toolbar Font Name vx Kix Silk AM A g ST ss zz T IIll III A Font Size Bold Italic U Underline Shadow Line Spacing 1 Line Spacing 1 5 Line Spacing 2 Bullets On Off Increase Font Reduce Font Align Left Centered Align Right Justified Left To Right Right To Left Text direction from left to right Text direction from top to bottom Character Paragraph Se SS Sik E36 Ai 1 M M Increase Spacing Decrease Spacing Font Color Special Character Figure 198 Available tools on Text Formatting toolbar Line A Area Text B amp Position and Size eA Character Paragraph Alignment Flip Convert Description Name Edit Style a6 Cut Copy Paste Bring to Front Bring Forward Send Backward Send to Back In Front of Object Behind Object Figure 199 Context menu 200 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Context menu When an object is selected and yo
124. that would go from A3 to C6 you would enter A3 C6 Range of non contiguous cells 1 Select the cell or range of cells using one of the methods above 2 Move the mouse pointer to the start of the next range or single cell 3 Hold down the Control key and click or click and drag to select a range 4 Repeat as necessary Selecting columns and rows Entire columns and rows can be selected very quickly in LibreOffice Single column or row To select a single column click on the column identifier letter See Figure 94 To select a single row click on the row identifier number Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 119 Multiple columns or rows To select multiple columns or rows that are contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Shift key 3 Click the last column or row in the group To select multiple columns or rows that are not contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Control key 3 Click on all of the subsequent columns or rows while holding down the Control key Entire sheet To select the entire sheet click on the small box between the A column header and the 1 row header Select All Al 7 Ps Figure 106 Select All box You can also press Contro l A to select the entire sheet Selecting sheets You can select either one or multiple sheets It can be advantageous to select multiple sheets at times when you want to make changes to many s
125. the controls on your form Arrangement of the main form Columnar Labels on Top Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 225 Step 5 Arrange controls A control in a form consists of two parts label and field This step in creating the form determines where a control s label and field are placed relative to each other The four choices from left to right are Columnar left Columnar Labels on top As Data Sheet and In Blocks Labels Above 1 Arrangement of the main form Click the second icon Columnar Labels on top The labels will be placed above their field 2 Arrangement of the sub form Click the third icon As Data Sheet The labels are column headings and the field entries are in spreadsheet format Click Next Step 6 Set data entry Unless you have a need for any of these entries to be checked accept the default settings Click Next Step 7 Apply styles 1 Select the color you want in the Apply Styles list I chose the beige which is Orange 4 in the Color table 2 Select the Field border you want I prefer the 3D look You might want to experiment with the different possible settings 3 Click Next Step 8 Set name 1 Enter the name for the form In this case it is Fuel 2 Click Modify the form 3 Click Finish The form opens in Edit mode Modifying a form We will be moving the controls to different places in the form and changing the background toa picture We will also m
126. the document If you now look in File gt Properties you will see the new template listed at the bottom of the General page In Writer if you do not see Assign Template current document or Assign Template folder under File gt Templates you need to download the Template Changer extension from http extensions libreoffice org and install it as described on page 70 Then close and reopen LibreOffice to activate the extension In Calc Impress and Draw only the Assign Template folder choice is available when the extension is installed Organizing templates LibreOffice can only use templates that are in LibreOffice template folders You can create new LibreOffice template folders and use them to organize your templates For example you might have one template folder for report templates and another for letter templates You can also import and export templates To begin choose File gt Templates gt Organize from the main menu to open the Template Management dialog Figure 53 on page 65 All the actions made by the Commands button in the Template Management dialog can be made as well by right clicking on the templates or the folders The location of LibreOffice template folders varies with your computer s operating system To learn where the template folders are stored on your computer go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Paths Creating a template folder To create a template folder 1 Inthe Template
127. the font size back to its original value when the work is finished Warning this modify only current formula and future formulas you will write To modify all formulas already existing in the document you need to use a macro see section about macros in Math Guide The size of a subset of characters in a formula may be modified using the size command For example b size 5 a ba In the Elements window the icon A on the Attributes tab gives the size command The value just after size may be absolute numeric value or relative to the context base size by default for example 6 3 2 or 2 Changing the font The fonts used in formulas can be changed using Format gt Fonts The Formula fonts section of the Fonts dialog Figure 287 refers to the four specified formula elements The font for operators relationships and brackets is not affected as these elements normally come from the OpenSymbol font Similarly elements from the catalog See Customizing the catalog on page 273 continue to be displayed in the font specified there a0 Fonts Formula fonts OK Variables Times New Roman Italic a i e Cancel Functions Times New Roman lt ul Numbers Times New Roman Modify Te Times New Roman Default e Custom fonts Serif
128. the largest or smallest values or a percentage of them Useful in themselves standard filters take on added value when used to further refine automatic filters Advanced filters are structured similarly to standard filters The differences are that advanced filters are not limited to three conditions and their criteria are not entered in a dialog Instead advanced filters are entered in a blank area of a sheet then referenced by the advanced filter tool to apply them 140 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Sorting records Sorting arranges the visible cells on the sheet In Calc you can sort by up to three criteria which are applied one after another Sorts are handy when you are searching for a particular item and become even more powerful after you have filtered data In addition sorting is often useful when you add new information When a list is long it is usually easier to add new information at the bottom of the sheet rather than adding rows in the proper places After you have added information you can then sort it to update the sheet Highlight the cells to be sorted then select Data gt Sort to open the Sort dialog or click the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending toolbar buttons Using the dialog you can sort the selected cells using up to three columns in either ascending A Z 1 9 or descending Z A 9 1 order On the Options tab of the Sort dialog you can choose the following options Case sensitive If tw
129. the other desired slides e Use the Shift key Click on the first slide and while pressing the Shift key select the final Slide in the group This selects all of the other slides between the first and the last e Use the mouse Click slightly to one side left or right of the first slide to be selected Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer until all of the slides you want selected are highlighted To move a group of slides 1 Select a group of slides 2 Drag and drop the group to their new location Working in Slide Sorter view You can work with slides in the Slide Sorter view just as you can in the Slide pane To make changes right click a slide and choose any of the following from the pop up menu e Add anew slide after the selected slide e Delete Slide deletes the selected slide e Rename Slide allows you to rename the selected slide e Slide Layout allows you to change the layout of the selected slide e Slide Transition allows you to change the transition of the selected slide For one slide click the slide to select it and then add the desired transition For more than one slide select the group of slides and add the desired transition e Hide Slide hidden slides are not shown in the slide show e Cut removes the selected slide and saves it to the clipboard e Copy copies the selected slide to the clipboard without removing it e Paste inserts a slide from the clipboard This option will also
130. them at one time The order of the fields in the table you create will be the same as in the data source table e To remove a single field from the Table Column s list click the field and use the single arrow pointing to the left 5 To start over click the double arrow pointing to the left 6 Select the settings for your table Use the default settings as in Figure 244 7 Click OK Save the document eq Insert Database Columns ka Insert data as Table Fields Text Table Database columns Table column s Miscellaneous a Date MiscNotes Breakfast MiscPayment BPayment Motel Lunch MPayment LPayment Odometer SnackCost snackNo Format From database Insert table heading O ETE Apply column name AutoFormat Create row only Figure 244 Insert Database Columns dialog Calc spreadsheets There are two ways to transfer data into a Calc spreadsheet One enters the data into the spreadsheet cells The other creates complete new records in the spreadsheet While you can directly access the data inserted into the spreadsheet cells new records created in the spreadsheet are read only Entering data directly to the spreadsheet cells uses the Data to Text icon as when making a table in a Writer document But there are certain differences The steps are straightforward 1 Click the cell of the spreadsheet which you want to be the top left cell of your data including the column names 2 Use F4 to open the databas
131. these three fields While on vacation want the expenses for each day to be listed together The date fields suggest a relationship between the vacation table and the dates in each of these tables fuel and food This means that the date fields in these tables will be linked as we create the database The type of payment includes two bank cards and cash So we will create a table with a field for the type of payment and use it in list boxes in the forms While we have listed fields we will create in the tables of the database there is one more field that may be needed in a table the field for the primary key In some tables the field for the primary key has already been listed In other tables such as the payment type an additional field for the primary key must be created Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 213 Creating a new database To create a new database choose File gt New gt Database from the menu bar or click the arrow next to the New icon on the Standard toolbar and select Database from the drop down menu Both methods open the Database Wizard On the first page of the Database Wizard select Create a new database and then click Next The second page has two questions Make sure the choice for the first question is Yes register the database for me and the choice for the second question is Open the database for editing Click Finish If the database is not registered it will not be accessible to the other LibreO
132. this without deleting the old cell contents first The process is the similar to the one described above but you need to place the cursor inside the cell You can do this in two ways Using the keyboard After selecting the appropriate cell press the F2 key and the cursor is placed at the end of the cell Then use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor through the text in the cell Using the mouse Using the mouse either double click on the appropriate cell to select it and place the cursor in it for editing or single click to select the cell and then move the mouse pointer up to the input line and click into it to place the cursor for editing Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 133 Formatting data The data in Calc can be formatted in several ways It can either be edited as part of a cell style so that it is automatically applied or it can be applied manually to the cell Some manual formatting can be applied using toolbar icons For more control and extra options select the appropriate cell or cells right click on it and select Format Cells All of the format options are discussed below All the settings discussed in this section can also be set as a part of the cell style See Chapter 4 in the Calc Guide for more information Formatting multiple lines of text Multiple lines of text can be entered into a single cell using automatic wrapping or manual line breaks Each method is useful for different situations Usi
133. to select the fields we need 1 Category Select Personal The Sample Tables drop down list changes to a list of personal sample tables 2 Sample tables Select CD Collection The Available fields box changes to a list of available fields for this table 3 Selected fields Using the gt button move the following fields from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window in this order CollectionID AlbumTitle Artist DatePurchased Format Notes and NumberofTracks 4 Selected Fields from another sample table Click Business as the Category Select Employees from the drop down list of sample tables Use the gt button to move the Photo field from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window It will be at the bottom of the list directly below the NumberofTracks field 5 If you make a mistake in selecting fields click on the field name in the Selected fields list and use the lt button to move it from the Selected fields list back to the Available fields list 6 If you make a mistake in the order of the selected fields click on the field name that is in the wrong order and use the Up or Down arrow on the right side of the Selected fields list to move the field name to the correct position 7 Click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 215 Category Business Personal Sample tables Employees i Available fields Selected fields Notes AlbumTitle iy cael rchased de ka are
134. to show all of the available options by default only a subset of these options is shown On the Formatting toolbar you have a large choice of options for customizing your object These choices are the same as the ones for other drawing objects For more information see the Draw Guide Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 311 Line options Line icon Opens a dialog with three tabs Line Line Styles Arrow Styles Use the Line tab to edit the most common properties of the line around the selected Fontwork object by choosing from previously defined attributes including line style line color and arrow styles Use the Lines Styles and Arrow Styles tabs to edit the properties of line and arrow styles and define new styles Arrow Style icon Choose from the different arrow styles Line Style box Choose from the available line styles Line Width box Set the width of the line Line Color box Select the color of the line Area options Area icon Opens a dialog with seven tabs Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps e Area tab Choose from the predefined list a color bitmap gradient or hatching pattern to fill the selected object e Shadow tab Set the shadow properties of the selected object e Transparency tab Set the transparency properties of the selected object e Colors tab Modify the available colors or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Gradients tab Modify the available grad
135. update If the Download updates automatically option is selected the download starts when you click the icon To change the download destination click the Change button and select the required folder in the file browser window 46 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Online Update Options V Check for updates automatically 0 Every Day C Every Week Every Month Last checked 08 25 10 05 27 00 PM Check now Download updates automatically Download destination Ci Users Jared Desktop Change Figure 35 Online update options Choosing options for loading and saving documents You can set the Load Save options to suit the way you work If the Options dialog is not already open click Tools gt Options Click the expansion symbol or triangle to the left of Load Save r Options Load Save LibreOffice General VBA Properties Microsoft Office by HTML Compatibility This where you define general settings Figure 36 Load Save options Load Save General Load Save options Most of the choices on the Load Save General page are familiar to users of other office suites Some items of interest are described below Load user specific settings with the document When you save a document certain settings are saved with it Some settings printer name data source linked to the document are always loaded with a document whether or not this option is selected If you select this option these do
136. updating from a selection 62 167 172 Styles and Formatting window 59 SUB 334 subroutines 339 subroutines in macros 334 Sun Microsystems 370 support 10 system font user interface 38 T tab stops 89 table of contents automated 102 tear off toolbars 23 template associate with document 72 create document from 66 create from document 67 create using wizard 68 deleting 74 description 58 editing 69 exporting 75 folders 73 update document styles from 69 Template Management dialog 64 templates importing 74 text bulleted or numbered list 167 outline level 168 pasting 167 text boundaries show hide 44 text box AutoLayout 165 168 text documents opening 372 Text Formatting toolbar 167 text tool 165 theme deleting 304 themes 302 themes Gallery 304 toolbar icons macros 345 toolbars 153 adding commands 356 block arrows 194 choosing icons for commands 356 connectors 192 creating 356 curve 190 customizing 24 displaying or hiding 23 Draw 184 Fontwork 308 Line and Filling toolbar 185 lines and arrows 188 moving 23 overview 22 show or hide icons 24 tooltips 35 162 track changes 104 transparency 206 two digit years 36 typing errors autocorrect 129 U undo change 31 Ungrouping 208 unsaved changes flag 81 URL Recognition 316 user data options 34 User guides 11 user interface options 37 user interface parts of 12 user specific settings 47 V validating cell contents Calc 132 variables in macros 334
137. use of styles Styles allow you to define a formatting template a style and then to apply that style to multiple objects For more information on styles see Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates in this guide Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles in the Writer Guide and Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes in the Draw Guide Positioning objects Snap function In Draw objects can be accurately and consistently positioned using the snap function Grid points Snap points and lines object frames individual points on objects or page edges can all be used with the snap function Snap function is easier to work with at the high zoom values that are practical for your display Two different snap functions can be used at the same time for example snapping to a guide line and to the page edge It is recommended however to activate only the functions that you really need For more detailed information about the snap function see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Snap to grid Snap to grid allows you to position an object to a grid point Figure 204 Go to View gt Grid gt Be Snap to Grid or click on the Snap to Grid icon on the Options toolbar to turn on or off the Displaying the grid To display the grid in Draw or to switch off the grid go to View gt Grid gt Display Grid or click on Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 203 Options LibreOffice Draw
138. which can be difficult to see The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic or Next Bookmark TE Page Figure 15 Navigation toolbar e To jump to a specific page in the document type its page number in the box at the top of the Navigator A bit of experimentation with the other icons will demonstrate their functions Some component specific uses are described in the chapters on Writer and the other components Undoing and redoing changes To undo the most recent change press Control Z or click the Undo icon D on the Standard toolbar or choose Edit gt Undo from the menu bar The Edit menu shows the latest change that can be undone see below for an example from Writer File View Insert Format Table E Undo Typing Fox Ctrl Z Redo Delete Fox ctrl Figure 16 Edit gt Undo last action Click the small triangle to the right of the Undo icon to get a list of all the changes that can be undone You can select multiple changes and undo them at the same time pecon to undo 1 Typing rabbit L Typing q Typing Fox A Figure 17 List of actions that can be undone Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 31 After changes have been undone Redo becomes active To redo a change select Edit gt Redo or press Contro Y or click on the Redo icon As with Undo click on the triangle to the right of the arrow to get a li
139. you can create graphical text art objects to make your work more attractive There are many different settings for text art objects line area position size and more so you have a large choice You will surely find one that fits your document Fontwork is available with each component of LibreOffice but you will notice small differences in the way that each component displays it The Fontwork toolbars You can use two different toolbars for creating and editing a Fontwork object e Go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Fontwork T x ml Aa AV Figure 321 The floating Fontwork toolbar 308 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 e If you click on an existing Fontwork object the Formatting toolbar changes to display the Fontwork options as shown in Figure 326 The contents of this tooloar vary depending on the LibreOffice component with which it is being used Creating a Fontwork object 1 On the Drawing or Fontwork toolbar click the Fontwork Gallery icon toolbar is not visible go to View gt Toolbars gt Drawing to display it If the Drawing 8 0 0 Fontwork Gallery Fontwork Conal il ii Lr h ere a Fe di INGI Eontyork f Laan ch ny WW ui Li OK cancel Heip Figure 322 The Fontwork Gallery 2 Inthe Fontwork Gallery select a Fontwork style then click OK The Fontwork object will appear in your document Notice the colored squares around the
140. you use the Math component of LibreOffice directly with File gt New gt Formula you create documents with the file suffix odf each containing a single formula You can use these to build up a library of frequently used formulas Embedded formulas can also be stored as separate Math documents by right clicking on the formula and choosing Save copy as from the context menu To insert such a Math document into a Writer document use Insert gt Object gt OLE Object Select the option Create from file and enter the pathname of the file or browse for it using your system s file manager by pressing the Search button You cannot insert the document by dragging and dropping with the mouse nor by using Insert gt File Formulas cannot be stored in the gallery because they are not in graphical format You can however store a formula as AutoText Write the formula in a separate paragraph select it and go to Edit gt AutoText For further information see Using AutoText in Chapter 3 Working with Text in the Writer Guide Fast insertion of formulas If you already know the markup of your formula here is a faster method to build your formula e Write formula markup in Writer e Select the markup e Insert the formula using a toolbar button a menu item or a keyboard shortcut This method avoids the need to open and close the Math window and thus saves time Customizations Customizing the catalog If you need to use a symbol that i
141. z e 4 4 Modify Save In LibreOffice Writer Descripton Loads a document specdfied by an entered URL You can type a new URL edit an URL or select one from the list Displays the full path of the current document Figure 350 The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 355 Modifying existing toolbars To modify an existing toolbar 1 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed toolbar for the application for example Writer or for a selected document 2 Inthe section LibreOffice name of the program example Writer gt Toolbars select from the Toolbar drop down list the toolbar that you want to customize 3 You can create a new toolbar by clicking on the New button or customize existing toolbars by clicking on the Toolbar or Modify buttons and add commands to a toolbar by clicking on the Add button These actions are described below 4 When you have finished making all your changes click OK to save them Creating a new toolbar To create a new toolbar 1 Choose Tools gt Customize from the menu bar and go to the Toolbars tab 2 Click New On the Name dialog type the new toolbar s name and choose from the Save In drop down list where to save this changed menu for the application for example Writer or for a selected document Click OK 0 Name Toolbar Name OK New Toolbar 1 Cancel Save In LibreOffice Writer tal Help Th
142. 3 Using the Wizard to create a table Wizards are designed to do the basic work Sometimes this is not sufficient for what we want in those cases we Can use a wizard as a Starting point and then build upon what it produces The Table Wizard in Base contains two categories of suggested tables business and personal Each category contains sample tables from which to choose Each table has a list of available fields We can delete some of these fields and add other fields A field in a table is one bit of information For example a price list table might have one field for item name one for the description and a third for the price Since none of the fields we need for our Automobile database are contained in any of the sample wizard tables we will create a simple table using the wizard that has nothing to do with our database This section is merely an exercise in explaining how the Wizard works The Wizard permits the fields of the table to come from more than one suggested table We will create a table with fields from three different suggested tables in the Wizard Every table requires a Primary key field What this field does will be explained later We will use this field to number our entries and want that number to automatically increase as we add each entry Click Use Wizard to Create Table This opens the Table Wizard Figure 214 Step 1 Select fields We will use the CD Collection Sample table in the Personal category
143. 3 Getting Started with Macros 341 Where are macros stored LibreOffice stores user specific data in a directory under the user s home directory The location is operating system specific Use Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Paths to view where other configuration data is stored On Windows XP this is C Documents and Settings lt name gt Application Data User macros are stored in LibreOffice 3 user basic Each library is stored in its own directory off the basic directory It is not important to understand where macros are stored for casual use If you know where they are stored however you can create a backup share your macros or inspect them if there is an error Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Dialogs to open the LibreOffice Macro Organizer dialog Another common way to open this dialog is to use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to open the LibreOffice Macros dialog and then click the Organizer button LibreOffice Basic Macro Organizer xI Modules Dialogs Libraries Location My Macros amp Dialogs Library ChangePicture File h ome sfazu libreoffice HistMastr File home sfazu libreoffice Standard 4 gt Figure 339 The macro organizer dialog Importing macros The LibreOffice Macro Organizer dialog provides functionality to create delete and rename libraries modules and dialogs Select the library container to use and then click the Import
144. 68 Choosing Zoom and View Layout options Moving quickly through a document In addition to the navigation features of the Status bar described above you can use the main Navigator window and the Navigation toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice In Writer you can also display the Navigation toolbar by clicking on the small Navigation icon near the lower right hand corner of the window below the vertical scroll bar as shown in Figure 69 ae Previous 4 By Figure 69 Navigation icons The Navigation toolbar Figure 70 shows icons for all the object types shown in the Navigator plus some extras for example the results of a Find command Navigation a Repeat search Figure 70 Navigation toolbar Click an icon to select that object type Now all the Previous and Next icons in the Navigator itself in the Navigation Toolbar and on the scroll bar will jump to the next object of the selected type This is particularly helpful for finding items like index entries which can be difficult to see in Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 83 the text The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic Next Bookmark or Continue search forward For more uses of the Navigator in Writer see the Writer Guide Working with documents Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice includes instructions on starting new documents opening exis
145. 7 Add fields to the table at the bottom of the query We are going to calculate the fuel economy To do this we need the FuelQuantity and distance traveled Since the FuelQuantity we want to use is the final odometer reading we will use the End Reading query to get it We will also use the Odometer field from the Fuel table and End Reading query ES Fuel End Reading x FuellD FuellD Date Odometer FuelCost FuelQuantity FuelQuantity FuelCost Odometer PaymentType Figure 257 Tables in this query 1 Double click Fue Quantity in the End Reading query 2 Double click Odometer in the End Reading query 3 Double click Odometer in the Fuel table FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading gt End Reading Fuel amp amp amp Figure 258 Added fields to the query Step 8 Enter the FuellD difference field We want the difference between the FuellD value of the Fuel table and FuellD value of the End Reading query to equal one 1 1 Type End Reading FuelID Fuel FuelID in the field to the right of the Odometer field of the Fuel Table 2 Type the numeral 1 one in the Criterion cell of this column 246 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 3 Calculate the distance traveled e Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer in the Field cell e Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell 4 Calculate fuel economy Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading Fuel
146. Catalog with new symbol Insert Close Edit Many symbols occur in more than one font If you want to exchange documents with others take care to use a font that is installed on their machine In the basic LibreOffice installation only those user defined symbols that actually occur in the document are stored with it Sometimes it is useful to embed all the user defined symbols for example when the document is going to be further edited by another person Go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Math and on the Settings page uncheck the option Embed only used symbols smaller file size This setting is only available when you are working on a Math document Default layout with style In Writer formulas are formatted according to the Formula frame style In the Style and Formatting window displayed with F11 click on the third icon at the top Frame Styles Right click on Formula and select Modify By this means you can directly modify all formulas in your document regarding spacing page 272 or background page 273 unless you manually modify formula formatting To apply this style in all your new Writer documents you must include the Formula style in your default template To do so create a new Writer document and modify the Formula at A E G amp s E Frar Grap Labe Marginalia OLE Wami New Modify Figure 293 Modify Frame Style Formula frame style as you wish Save the documen
147. Characters dialog where you can insert special characters Inserting dashes and non breaking spaces and hyphens To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line press Ctrl Shift when you type the Space between the two words In cases where you do not want the hyphen to appear at the end of a line for example in a number such as 123 4567 you can press Shift Ctrl minus sign to insert a non breaking hyphen To enter en and em dashes you can use the Replace dashes option on the Options tab under Tools gt AutoCorrect Options This option replaces two hyphens under certain conditions with the corresponding dash is anen dash that is a dash the width of the letter n in the font you are using Type at least one character a space one or two hyphens another space and at least one more letter then a space The one or two hyphens will be replaced by an en dash is anem dash that is a dash the width of the letter m in the font you are using Type at least one character two hyphens and at least one more character then a space The two hyphens will be replaced by an em dash See the Help for more details For other methods of inserting dashes see the Writer Guide Setting tab stops and indents The horizontal ruler shows both the default tab stops and any tab stops that you have defined Tab settings affect indentation of full paragraphs using the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent icons on the Form
148. Conf or gre lade Ta ee ah a o rer Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 97 For an index or other document with two columns of text where the text continues from the left hand column to the right hand column and then to the next page all in sequence also known as snaking columns of text use page styles with two columns If the title of the document on the first page is full page width put it in a single column section For a newsletter with complex layout two or three columns on the page and some articles that continue from one page to some place several pages later use page styles for basic layout Place articles in linked frames and anchor graphics to fixed positions on the page if necessary For a document with terms and translations to appear side by side in what appear to be columns use a table to keep items lined up and so you can type in both columns Title is ina single column section ee ea Be fel Basic layout isintwo columns Thisis a header on the first page only This frame is linked to a frame on another page These frames are not linked to other frames This is a borderless table Each pair of words is in a separate row and each word is in a cell of the table n e n are iram ae ane sr ne a te ee aa Ll 7 mT em EE ae ap _ ahh og _ maT Tenka Soup ma G TES i ina Tra Lra ia ieee Te c
149. Creating Web Pages 321 3 Chose a layout for the web site by clicking on the layout boxes Click Next gt Steps Choose a layout for the table of contents of your web site 1 Introduction Layouts Documents Main layout Layouk details Style Web site information 4 oP WB oN Preview Simple 4 Chose the information to be listed and the screen resolution Click Next gt Steps Customize the selected layout Introduction Include the Following information for each document in the table of contents Documents File name File Format Main layout Description File Format icon Author Number of pages Creation date Size in KB Last change date Web site information Optimize the layout for screen resolution Preview gt 640x480 300 600 1024x766 5 Select a style for the page Use the drop down list to choose different styles and color combinations You can browse to select a background image and icon set from the Gallery Click Next gt Steps Select a style for the table of contents page 1 Introduction Style water ae 2 Documents Background image no background image The icon set is used for presentations in HTML Format 3 Main layout 4 Layout details ia aei Benen esiniieek 6 Web site information 7 Preview Document Creation Date Last Change Date Filename 322 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5
150. Date field to the Grouping list Click Next Fields Groupings Date Tolls Miscellaneous Breakfast Lunch Supper gt SnackCost Figure 269 Selecting fields for grouping data Step 4 Sort options We do not want to do any additional sorting e Click Next Step 5 Choose layout Use Columnar three columns for the layout 1 Select Co umnar three columns for the Layout of data 2 Layout of headers and footers has no possible selections 3 Select Landscape as the Orientation for the page layout 4 Click Next Misc Figure 270 Report Builder Step 6 Create report 1 Label the report Vacation Expenses 2 Select Dynamic report 3 Click Finish The report has been created but it needs some editing The date could be formatted better and all the numbers need to be formatted as currency It could use a heading that includes its name its author and the date it was prepared If the report had more than one page the page numbers could be put in a footer of each page perhaps including the total number of pages 252 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Date 05 25 07 Motel 50 Breakfast 11 Snack Cost Tolls Lunch 15 Misc 2 Supper 13 Date 05 26 07 Motel 48 Breakfast 13 Snack Cost Tolls 4 Lunch 10 Misc Supper 15 Date 05 2 7 07 Motel Breakfast Snack Cost Tolls Lunch Misc Supper Date 09 10 08 Motel Breakfast Snack Cost Tolls Lunch Misc Supper Figure 271 Report without modifications
151. E E E EE 142 Chapter 6 Getting Started with IMpreSS s ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 149 T a E E 150 NO MDE aipe a E e en eee or eee eee re 150 The main Impress WINGO osctsrsictectetonidwcneasabiesoudslnneuanesewanbeswotraatdioesemiaincnaonidinnswaomwaumnonmeustnelaus 151 WorkSpace VOWS acipenser r ee aE eee ene ee aE nee eee ert 154 creanga now PSS SAO a cece acscecduenceesepneseoasies E D 159 media thine PSS O eraan tier tee Meet ee ker sree rece ee ee etn cee eee ee 161 Addmg and Orman Alc ea rere oe meter eter te een te tent iat 165 Adding pictures tables charts and MWCO nice sects ceseieceietecdccderdes eneuecccescntecsseceadeweleecidescieetndes 169 Working with Master pages ANC STYIOS ccc ecceecceecceeeceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaeeeaes 172 Adding comments to a PreS ntatiOn cccccccceeecececeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeaesageceeesaeesaeesseeseeesseees 177 Seting Upe SIde SNOW asiarra iiai ei i ariei 178 E E E A EEA E A E A A E EEIE E NE NS 179 Chapter 7 Getting Started with DraW siss issanda niniin aaa i aa 181 CDa EO e E A an E 182 PE EE E e EE A A TE E E AAE EE E EE E EA T A 183 Gi ales aisles a OM 1 116 819 CO a aE E AN 185 Bee ais Dace NaNO ae ner eee ee orenie eer not rene ieee mere ire one eee nn te er enter eRe oer rere ere ever eee oer 186 Nim ocala s ani conne O eee eee ete nee a ee snen ener ne teen eer ee eee ee 192 Drawing g
152. FDF 289 features Calc 110 Impress 150 Writer 80 fields bookmarks 106 cross reference 106 Fields dialog box References tab 106 file locations 40 file sharing options 43 Fill Format 60 Fill tool Calc 129 filtering visible cells Calc 140 Flash export 324 floating toolbars 23 24 floating window 24 font history 38 ignore settings when importing HTML 51 options 42 preview 38 replacement table 43 replacements 42 sizes for HTML 50 Fontwork alignment 311 anchoring 312 area options 312 attributes 311 character spacing 311 creating an object 309 editing an object 310 Formatting toolbar 311 Gallery 309 grouping 312 line options 312 moving and resizing objects 313 positioning options 312 same letter heights 310 toolbar 308 310 Form Wizard 223 formatting pages 97 Formatting toolbar 22 formatting Calc AutoFormat 137 conditional 139 themes 138 formula bar Calc 111 formula files opening 373 formula layout 262 Free Software Foundation FSF 371 function key shortcuts 367 Function Wizard Calc 111 G Gallery adding objects 302 creating a new theme 304 deleting images 304 deleting objects 304 hide show 302 inserting object as background 301 location 304 opening 301 themes 302 views icon detailed 302 general options 35 GNU Linux system requirements 20 gradients 206 grammar checker 91 graphic files opening 373 saving 375 graphic styles 167 graphics adding from file 298 linking 299 Grid points 203 H
153. FOr anO DAGO eaa ar nr eer ore eitnt ent ern te mer Me reen ese mrrre eee 97 Adding commente tO prs 6 0166 19 9 ssis aa tree eieyitee sac are ann eect Meira ee 102 Creating a table Of CONTENTS ccccccceccceeeceeeceeeseeeceeeceeecauecueeeecaeceanseaesauesgesasesaseseeesesesagss 102 Creating indexes and biblOGraphles ccccccceccceccceecceeeeeeceeeceeeseeceeecaeesseesaeesesesseeseeeseeess 103 NSP R ON NG Ss ENEE IET E E T EE A sonnet AEE EEE A E TT 103 E EEEIEE EI T PO EA A E A E E E SE A E AE PEE AAN S T 103 E a E EE N 104 Tracking changes to SOC UNI a preers datetie ence sta cesataddansadasensaesaieneasdcbagatacuneieaete a E 104 BE NS AA ar setts eee eee eect tees eee eg ce as sie cn ecco 104 Linking to another part Of a COCUMENL cccccccceeeceeeceeeeeeceeeeaeceeecaeesauesaeeseeesaeeseeeseeenenens 104 Using master 1G MN Soret eset cg cigs cinee nd sotasweuenseseace ai iin aa iai 107 RU A NON eee Seco ieececie stew tec ce tente ous eeue couse esau eeces ee tecwedtuetencctecteeganiieececanyecceensenes 107 Chapter 5 Getting Started with Gy caeeeeeene ee onet Cres een nee ner nee earn concen vee ne en rece nanmanna nannaa annann 109 OEE 07 anc eee ee ee era tt en ee een eee eee Meee rc ee ee nee er ee ee ere eer ee 110 Spreadsheets sheets and CONS sce scesoucesccascncinaednanestvenceaaypendennenaandendiasciadancemducndsanersemenientessiond 110 Fes Te A VNAO asoini nae NEE a iisas 110 apennd and Sayin
154. FT SEC CSC SECH and CSCH as declared in the ODF 1 2 specification Autofilter popup window has been re designed for better visual appearance and the ability to allow multiple selections Redesigned all range name dialogs to work much better with local range names and make it easier to use the dialogs Unlimited number of rules for conditional formatting Impress Draw Start Impress without the wizard by default Elliptical arcs are properly imported and rendered Better handling of custom animation list Better handling of export to PDF for hidden slides Better support for importing Smart Art Standard palette includes some new line ends Custom Shapes import greatly enhanced many bugs fixed and new presets implementation added New does not exist A symbol Support for export and import of Math formulas in Office Open XML docx documents New symbols for Games theory Integrated PostgreSQL native driver for versions 8 4 Many bug fixes Preface 15 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice What is LibreOffice LibreOffice is a freely available fully featured office productivity suite Its native file format is OpenDocument an open standard format that is being adopted by governments worldwide as a required file format for publishing and accepting documents LibreOffice can also open and save documents in many other formats including those used by several versions of
155. Figure 223 More complex forms can contain much more including additional text graphics selection boxes and many other elements Figure 224 is made from the same table with a text label Fuel Purchases a list box placed in PaymentType and a graphic background A list box is useful when a field contains a fixed choice of options It saves you from having to type in data by hand and ensures that invalid options are not entered In our database payments for food or fuel might be made from one of two credit cards Dan or Kevin or in cash so these would be the available options for all boxes that contain payments To create a list box we first need to create a small separate table containing the options This is then linked to the corresponding field in the form The topic is dealt with in detail in the Base User Guide and will not be pursued further here Using the Wizard to create a form We will use the Form Wizard to create a Vacations form which will contain a form and a subform In the main database window Figure 213 click the Forms icon in the left column In the Tasks list double click Use Wizard to Create Form to open the Form Wizard Figure 225 Simple forms require only some of these steps while more complex forms may use all of them Step 1 Select fields 1 Under Tables or queries select Table Vacations Available fields lists the fields for the Vacations table 2 Click the right double arrow to move all of thes
156. Formatting window using F11 Right clicking the Heading 2 paragraph style allows you to modify the appearance of all three headings See Chapter 6 of the Writer Guide for details Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 231 Step 9 Change the background of a form The background for a form can be a color or a graphic picture You can use any of the colors in the Color Table at Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Colors If you know how to create custom colors you can use them You can also use a picture graphic file as the background 1 Right click the form to open a context menu 2 Select Page 3 Make sure the Background tab has been selected It will be in bold type while the other tabs will be in default type Page Style Default Organizer Page Background Header Footer Borders Colui AS Color te Background color Figure 236 Page style dialog 4 Click Light cyan Second row fourth column from the left 5 Click Apply to see the effects of adding the color OR click OK to close the dialog Learning how to use styles can be very helpful at times By using styles we changed the font color for all three headings at one time There are other methods of changing the font color but they require repeating the same steps for each heading 6 To add a graphic to the background a Click the Gallery tool circled in red The gallery window opens OCEL b Select the gra
157. Getting Started with Math 257 Example 1 5x4 For this example we will enter a simple formula 5x4 On the Elements window 7 Select the top left button of the categories top section 8 Click on the multiplication symbol Elements Unary binary operators Multiplication Figure 275 Selecting the multiplication symbol When you select the multiplication symbol on the Elements window two things happen e The equation editor shows the markup lt gt times lt gt e The body of the document shows a gray box like this UxU ruxi gogik Figure 276 Result of selecting the multiplication symbol The lt gt symbols shown in Figure 276 are placeholders that you can replace by other text for example 5 and 4 The equation will update automatically and the result should resemble Figure 277 When you add a formula reserved placeholders are indicated by squares in the formula and lt gt in the command window You can navigate through these placeholders using F4 and Shift F4 258 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 5x4 gagy Figure 277 Result of entering 5 and 4 next to the times operator To keep the equation from updating automatically select View gt AutoUpdate display to deselect it To update a formula manually press F9 or select View gt Update Right click context menu Another way to access ma
158. Graphics Figure 4 Moving a docked toolbar Title bar of floating toolbar Bullets and Numbering x es 7 4 oie Figure 5 Moving a floating toolbar Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 23 Floating toolbars LibreOffice includes several additional context sensitive toolbars whose defaults appear as floating toolbars in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is in a table a floating Table toolbar appears and when the cursor is in a numbered or bullet list the Bullets and Numbering toolbar appears You can dock these toolbars to the top bottom or side of the window if you wish see Moving toolbars above Docking floating windows and toolbars Toolbars and some windows such as the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window are dockable You can move resize or dock them to an edge To dock a window or toolbar hold down the Control key and double click on the frame of the floating window or in a vacant area near the icons at the top of the floating window to dock it in its last position DefinitionTerm Figure Figure 6 Control click to dock or undock To undock a window hold down the Contro key and double click on the frame or a vacant area near the icons at the top of the docked window Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar You
159. Grid v LibreOffice User Data Grid General Snap to grid Memo View i v Visible grid Print Paths Resolution Subdivision Colors Horizontal 1 00cm Horizontal 10 space s Fonts i i 10 parats Security Vertical 1 00cm B Vertical 10 B space s Appearance SS Accessibility O Synchronize axes Java hs Online Update Snap Snap position b Load Save M To snap lines When creating or moving objects p Language Settings v LibreOffice Draw v To the page margins Extend edges General View v To object frame 1 When rotating 15 00 degrees B Print v To object points Point reduction 45 00 degrees B b LibreOffice Base te eres Snap range 5 Pixels D gt Internet OK Cancel Help Revert Figure 205 Configuring the grid Configuring the grid The resolution Snap and snap position of the grid points can be configured Go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt Grid to open the options dialog for the grid Figure 205 e Vertical and horizontal spacing of the dots in the grid You can also change the unit of measurement used in the general Draw options by going to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt General e The resolution is the size of the squares or rectangles in the grid If the resolution is 1 cm horizontal and 2 cm vertical the grid consists of rectangles 2 cm high and 1 cm wide e Subdivisions are additional points that appear along the sides of each rectangle or square in the grid Objects sn
160. Jun Jul Aug 5 Tue January February March April May Wed Thu Fri Delete Sat New Figure 120 Predefined fill series 2 Click New The Entries box is cleared 3 Type the series for the new list in the Entries box one entry per line Click Add The new list will now appear in the Lists box 4 Click OK at the bottom of the dialog to save the new list Entries Sun Mon ue Wed Thu Fri Sat ACT sid Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd NSW E ilan Fep Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug NT January February March April May amp LD Add SA TAS VIC WA Discard Figure 121 Defining a new fill series Using selection lists Selection lists are available only for text and are limited to using only text that has already been entered in the same column To use a selection list select a blank cell and press Ctrl D A drop down list appears of any cell in the same column that either has at least one text character or whose format Is defined as Text Click on the entry you require Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 131 November December 13 Sharing content between sheets You might want to enter the same information in the same cell on multiple sheets for example to set up standard listings for a group of individuals or organizations Instead of entering the list on each sheet individually you can enter it in all the sheets at once To do this select all the sheets
161. Microsoft Office LibreOffice includes the following components Writer word processor Writer is a feature rich tool for creating letters books reports newsletters brochures and other documents You can insert graphics and objects from other components into Writer documents Writer can export files to HTML XHTML XML Adobe s Portable Document Format PDF and several versions of Microsoft Word files It also connects to your email client Calc spreadsheet Calc has all of the advanced analysis charting and decision making features expected from a high end spreadsheet It includes over 300 functions for financial statistical and mathematical operations among others The Scenario Manager provides what if analysis Calc generates 2 D and 3 D charts which can be integrated into other LibreOffice documents You can also open and work with Microsoft Excel workbooks and save them in Excel format Calc can export spreadsheets to Adobe s PDF and to HTML Impress presentations Impress provides all the common multimedia presentation tools such as special effects animation and drawing tools It is integrated with the advanced graphics capabilities of LibreOffice s Draw and Math components Slide shows can be further enhanced with Fontwork s special effects text as well as sound and video clips Impress is compatible with Microsofts PowerPoint file format and can also save your work in numerous graphics formats inclu
162. Quantity in the next column to the right of the word Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuelID Quantity Begin End End Reading Fuel End Reading amp amp i 1l Figure 259 Typing in calculation of fields End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer Distance gt 0 Figure 260 Field for distance traveled calculations End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity Fuel Economy Figure 261 Fuel economy calculation field Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 247 When entering fields for these calculations you must follow this format table or query name followed by a period follow by the field name For hyphenated or multiple word names table or query use double quotes around the table or query name The query will then add the rest of the double quotes as in Figure 261 Use the arithmetical symbol between the two More than one calculation can be done by using parentheses to group the arithmetical operations Step 9 Run the query and make some modification After we run the query to make sure it works correctly we will hide all of the fields that we do not need End Reading Odometer Fuel 6 430 f04 via 11 59 19 570 tfB 7 1032 3 12 96 15 150 1037 3 1239 4 13 67 Figure 262 Result of running the fuel economy query 1 Click the Run Query icon in the Design Query toolbar Figure 253 The results are in Figure 262
163. Report Builder another way to create reports When we used the Report Wizard we created a template in Report Builder for our report If we edit our report we open Report Builder with this template By modifying the template we also modify the report For example we can change the Date field s format and it will change the format of all the dates contained in that field in the above report Similarly we can change the field formatting of any of the other fields and change the format everywhere that field appears in the report Report Builder can also create reports by itself To do this you click Create Report in design View For instructions on how to use the Report Builder see Chapter 4 of the Base Guide Data Output We will discuss it in detail there For detailed instructions on using Report Builder see Dmitri Popov s Sun Report Builder Guidebook available in PDF search for Sun Report Builder Guidebook and printed versions from Lulu com http www lulu com spotlight writertools Report Builder is a LibreOffice extension to assist in report creation With Report Builder you can create stylish complex database reports You can define group and page headers group and page footers and calculation fields It is installed by default with LibreOffice Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 253 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math LibreOffice s Equation Editor What is Math
164. Size optimization for ODF format LibreOffice documents are XML files When you select this option LibreOffice writes the XML data without indents and line breaks If you want to be able to read the XML files in a text editor in a structured form deselect this option Document type If you routinely share documents with users of Microsoft Office you might want to change the Always save as attribute for documents to one of the Microsoft Office formats Although LibreOffice can open and save files in the docx and xlsx formats produced by Microsoft Office 2007 and 2010 it does not yet save in pptx format This capability is planned for a future release VBA Properties Load Save options On the Load Save VBA Properties page you can choose whether to keep any macros in Microsoft Office documents that are opened in LibreOffice Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP Load Basic code Executable code Save original Basic code Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP Load Basic code Executable code Save original Basic code Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Load Basic code Save original Basic code Figure 38 Choosing Load Save VBA Properties e f you choose Load Basic code the changed code is saved in an LibreOffice document but is not retained if you save into a Microsoft Office format e f you choose Save original Basic code the macros will not work in LibreOffice but are retained if you save the file into Microsoft Office format e lf you are impo
165. Slide Design The main window in the dialog shows the slide masters already available for use To add more 1 Click the Load button 2 Select in the Load Slide Design dialog Figure 161 the template from which to load the slide master and click OK 3 Click OK again to close the slide design dialog The slide masters in the template you selected are now shown also in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane in the Available for use subsection 174 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 The slide masters you have loaded will also be available the next time you load the presentation If you want to delete the unused slide masters click the corresponding checkbox in the Slide Design dialog If the slide master was not used in the presentation it is removed from the list of available slide masters anyway To limit the size of the presentation file you may want to minimize the number of slide masters used x Load Slide Design Categories Templates Business Correspondence Cancel Forms and Contracts Presentation Backgrounds Help Presentations Figure 161 Load Slide Design dialog for selecting templates Modifying a slide master The following items can be changed on a slide master e Background color gradient hatching or bitmap e Background objects for example add a logo or decorative graphics e Size placement and contents of header and footer elements to appear on every slide e Size and placement of defau
166. Solver is similar to Goal Seek but you can use more than one variable The Solver is designed to minimize or maximize the result according to a set of rules that you define All of these options are further discussed in Chapter 9 in the Calc Guide Printing Printing from Calc is much the same as printing from other LibreOffice components See Chapter 10 but some details are different especially regarding preparation for printing Using print ranges Print ranges have several uses including printing only a specific part of the data or printing selected rows or columns on every page For more about using print ranges see Chapter 6 Printing Exporting and E mailing in the Calc Guide Defining a print range To define a new print range or modify an existing print range 1 Highlight the range of cells that comprise the print range 2 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Define The page break lines display on the screen 142 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 You can check the print range by using File gt Page Preview LibreOffice will only display the cells in the print range Adding to the print range After defining a print range you can add more cells to it This allows multiple separate areas of the same sheet to be printed while not printing the whole sheet After you have defined a print range 1 Highlight the range of cells to be added to the print range 2 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Add Th
167. StarDraw format sda sdd and vor However Draw can also export to BMP EMF EPS GIF JPEG MET PBM PCT PGM PNG PPM RAS SVG SVM TIFF WMF and XPM Writer Web can save in these formats HTML document html and htm as HTML 4 0 Transitional OpenOffice org 1 0 HTML Template stw OpenOffice org 2 x HTML Template oth StarWriter Web 4 0 and 5 0 vor Text LibreOffice Writer Web txt Text Encoded LibreOffice Writer Web txt Exporting to other formats LibreOffice uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find the file type you are looking for under Save As look under Export for additional types LibreOffice can export files to XHTML In addition Draw and Impress can export to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File gt Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the desired format in the File format list and click the Export button Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 375 Index 3 3D objects 209 A accepting or rejecting changes 104 accessibility features 367 accessibility options 45 adding macros from other sources 330 advantages of LibreOffice 19 antialiasing screen font 38 appearance options 44 Apply Style list 60 Arrows 202 Asian language support 52 AutoCorrect 55 91 AutoFormat Calc 137 Autolnput 129
168. TS Typing text Ss a E ZN a text ee frame ree eee eeaeee eee ee OLOH Layout Dimension Lines h m e n e 0M TextEdit Paragraph 1 Row 1 Column 10 ct 0 30 25 96 Figure 179 Text information on the Status Bar You can insert a line break with the Shift Enter key combination or start a new paragraph with the Enter key The insertion of line breaks or new paragraphs does not terminate text editing or deselect the text frame When you have finished typing text click outside the text frame to cancel adding text If you want to edit text double click on the text to open the Text Formatting toolbar and highlight the text to start editing Text properties can also be changed during text input with any changes taking effect from the cursor position onwards To change the properties for all of the text in the text frame you have to highlight all text in the text frame You can create Graphics styles that you can reuse for other text frames Select Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting dialog Graphics styles affect all of the text within a text frame To only format parts of the text use direct formatting with the toolbar Text frames can also have fill colors shadows and other attributes just like any other Draw object You can rotate the frame and write the text at any angle These options are available by right clicking on the text frame itself If you double click on a
169. You can also insert an already existing spreadsheet and use the viewport to select the data that you want to display on your slide Impress offers the capability of inserting in a slide various other types of objects such Writer documents Math formulas or even another presentation For details on using these objects refer to Chapter 7 Including Spreadsheets Charts and Other Objects of the Impress Guide Working with master pages and styles A slide master is a slide that is used as the starting point for other slides It is similar to a page style in Writer and it controls the basic formatting of all slides based on it A slide show can have more than one slide master LibreOffice uses three terms for a slide that is used to create other slides master Slide slide master and master page This book uses the term slide master except when describing the user interface A slide master has a defined set of characteristics including the background color graphic or gradient objects such as logos decorative lines and other graphics in the background headers and footers placement and size of text frames and the formatting of text Styles All of the characteristics of slide masters are controlled by styles The styles of any new slide you create are inherited from the slide master from which it was created In other words the styles of the slide master are available and applied to all slides created from that slide master Changing
170. a NumberofTracks Figure 214 Selecting fields for the table Step 2 Set field types and formats In this step you give the fields their properties When you click a field the information on the right changes See Figure 215 You can then make changes to meet your needs Click each field one at a time and make the changes listed below Selected fields Field information Collection ID Field name Collection D AlbumTitle Artist Field type Integer INTEGE DatePurchased MEE Format AutoValue No Notes 3 pE NumberofTracks Entry required No v Photo j Length 110 Figure 215 Changing field types If any of these fields requires a mandatory entry set Entry required to Yes A blank field will then not be allowed In general only set Entry required to Yes if something must always be put in that field By default Entry required is set to No CollectionID Change AutoValue from No to Yes example of a manditory entry AlbumTitle Entry required Leave Entry required as No unless all of your music is in albums Length Unless you have an album title that exceeds 100 characters counting the spaces do not change the length Artist Use the Default setting And since music has artists set Entry Required to Yes Date Purchased Field type default date setting Entry required should be No You may not know the date 216 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 In Base the maximum leng
171. a sources but not spreadsheets can be edited in the View Data Sources dialog A record can be edited added or deleted View a table s data If you click on a table its rows and columns of data appear on the right side of the Data Source window Editing this data requires only a click in the cell whose data should be changed change the data and click in the row above or below it to save the new data Beneath the records are five tiny buttons The first four move backwards or forwards through the records or to the beginning or end The fifth button with a small star inserts a new record Record 1 a el n l inser new record Figure 241 View Data Sources navigation buttons To delete a record right click on the gray box to the left of a row to highlight the entire row and select Delete Rows to remove the selected row Fe Date FuelCost _FuelQuantty_ Odometer PaymentType aay May 25 2007 16 00 14 690 704 2 Kevin Table Format iy may25 2007 7 00 6 430 778 7 Dan Row Height rday May 26 2007 20 00 19 570 1032 3 Kevin Copy rday May 26 2007 16 00 15 150 1239 4 Dan rday May 26 2007 16 00 15 144 1639 4 Dan Delete Rows er gi ui 5 7 a Ate Figure 242 Deleting a row in the Data View window Launching Base to work on data sources You can launch LibreOffice Base at any time from the View Data Source pane Just right click on a database or the Tables or Queries icons and select Edit
172. able for the supplied menus and Move is not available for submenus To move a menu such as File choose Menu gt Move A dialog similar to the one shown in Figure 348 but without the Menu name box opens Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the menu into the required position Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 353 To move submenus such as File Send select the main menu File in the Menu list and then in the Menu Content section of the dialog select the submenu Send in the Entries list and use the arrow keys to move it up or down in the sequence Submenus are easily identified in the Entries list by a small black triangle on the right hand side of the name In addition to renaming you can allocate a letter in a custom menu s name which will become underlined to be used as a keyboard shortcut that allows you to select that menu when you press Alt that letter Existing submenus can be edited to change the letter which is used to select them from the keyboard once the menu is open 1 Select a custom menu or a submenu in the Menu drop down list 2 Click the Menu button and select Rename 3 Add a tilde in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator For example to select the Send submenu command by pressing S after opening the File menu using Alt F enter Send This changes it from the default d When allocating a shortcut to custom menus be careful to not use an existing shortcut letter
173. able from the existing tables based upon how you create the query Areport organizes the information from the fields of a query into a document according to your requirements The database in LibreOffice requires Java Runtime Environment JRE If you do not have it on your computer you can download it from www java com and install it following the instructions on the site It should be Java 6 0 In LibreOffice use Tools A gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Java to register Java Windows version of JRE can not be used while there are other versions that can Base creates relational databases This makes it fairly easy to create a database in which the fields of the database have relationships with each other For example Consider a database for a library It will contain a field for the names of the authors and another field for the names of the books There is an obvious relationship between the authors and the books they have written The library may contain more than one book by the same author This is what is known as a one to many relationship one author and more than one book Most if not all the relationships in such a database are one to many relationships Consider an employment database for the same library One of the fields contains the names of the employees while others contain the social security numbers and other personal data The relationship between the names and social security numbers is one to one only one social
174. according to the choice made for the hyperlink category in the left panel A full description of all the choices and their interactions is beyond the scope of this chapter Here is a summary of the most common choices For an Internet hyperlink choose the type of hyperlink Web FTP or Telnet and enter the required web address URL For a Mail and News hyperlink specify whether it is a mail or news link the receiver s address and for email also the subject For a Document hyperlink specify the document path the Open File button opens a file browser or leave this blank if you want to link to a target in the same document Optionally specify the target in the document for example a specific slide Click on the Target in Document icon to open the Navigator where you can select the target or if you know the name of the target you can type it into the box For a New Document hyperlink specify whether to edit the newly created document immediately Edit now or just create it Edit later enter the file name and select the type of document to create text soreadsheet and so on Click the Select Path button to open a file browser and choose where to store the file 318 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 The Further settings section in the bottom right part of the dialog is common to all the hyperlink categories although some choices are more relevant to some types of links e Set the value of Frame to determine how the h
175. aceeteseneeees 360 Adding functionality WIE HT CNSIONS sssusa rira a Rari 361 Appendix A KeyDOATO SNOTICUTS asinn inaa 363 PAIGE ELETE i sae cece geese E E E EIE T AE AE EEEE E EI E E EET 364 General KEyDOArd Oe ag secede etree se a E a 365 DENNING koyDoard SMOC UTG ose Sco sese geansgateenaetacsadeaasceceseacedemsocias O aae aai 367 S E E E E A AE ETE A OE EEE EEE E E A E PE TE 367 Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OPEnNDOCUMENL cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeneneesesenseseeeeseees 369 A MEPIS MM scares ie tise erases eis sentences esses esc se E S E 370 A NONDO Or LUDE 6 eee nen erent E arr eee eer nee na ae eo eee ees 370 ThE ETI TRIC OC ON senses icseneatnncinccaesede dese sien Ea a 370 Oh goa LIDrOOTCS ICONS oO men ene meen et en Reo eee Noe erence eee ee ere ne eee ee eee erin 371 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 7 ij archi OPEN OUNCE aa Aenea ee ne ne me eee nt ann pone ee E 371 What OPO QDGTISUANG ANOS 2 scdccivncc cx cccesaesveciadadestanceancntichadivceieuagotidemed eceecdidassinsicunmernddaadeneeancaweend 371 Whati I I eistirimo nnn irea ni aeia inani n eniai 371 File formats Mialeo lie cao 88 6 tn ere ie eee ee eae ee cee ees ee eee ee eee 372 File Tomat SURGE eG AM Save TO pasted et ocsenceceetcursc aes aesauaceendoonecscembeiauscedeosacesiuedigeseceseaeceeraete 374 EEO TOE Mele ii S E E 3 5 ELE EAI A E E E E E A E EE T 376 Note for Mac users Some keystrokes and menu items are different on a Mac
176. acro recorder which records your keystrokes and saves them for use In LibreOffice recording of macros is currently classified as an experimental unstable feature To enable macro recording use Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt General and select the Enable experimental unstable features option Options LibreOffice General Ea v Libre ffice User Data HEP General Tips E Extended tips Memory View Help Agent Reset Help Agent Print Paths Open Save dialogs Colors E Use LibreOffice dialogs Fonts Security Document status RppeE ERs LJ Printing sets document modified status Accessibility Java O Allow to save document even when the document is not modified Load Save i Language Settings Year two digits LibreOffice Writer Interpret as years between fi 930 and 2029 LibreOffice Writer Web LibreOffice Base Charts Enable experimental unstable Features internet TO FO O FO O N O NO F O Figure 332 Enable macros in the Options dialog Most tasks in LibreOffice are accomplished by dispatching a command sending a command which is intercepted and used The macro recorder works by recording the commands that are dispatched see The dispatch framework on page 338 Adding an existing macro The first step in learning macro programming is to find and use existing macros This section assumes that you have a macro that you want to use the macro may be in an email on a web page or even
177. acros http www pitonyak org OOME_3_0 odt Andrew Pitonyak s book on macros http www pitonyak org database numerous macro examples using Base Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 349 Printed and eBook materials There are currently no books specific to LibreOffice macros that are available for download For OpenOffice org the following books are available for purchase in both printed and eBook form from their publishers Dr Mark Alexander Bain s Learn OpenOffice org Spreadsheet Macro Programming See hitp www packtpub com openoffice ooobasic calc automation book Roberto Benitez s Database Programming with OpenOffice org Base amp Basic See hitp www lulu com product paperback database programming with openofficeorg base basic 3568728 350 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice Introduction This chapter describes some common customizations that you may wish to do You can customize menus toolbars and keyboard shortcuts in LibreOffice add new menus and toolbars and assign macros to events However you cannot customize context right click menus Other customizations are made easy by extensions that you can install from the LibreOffice website or from other providers Customizations to menus and toolbars can be saved in a template To do so first save them in a document and then save the document as a template as described
178. age order just drag and drop one or more pages In LibreOffice Draw the maximum size of a drawing page is 300 cm by 300 cm Rulers You should see rulers bars with numbers on the upper and left hand sides of the workspace If they are not visible you can enable them by selecting View gt Ruler in the main menu bar The rulers show the size of a selected object on the page using double lines highlighted in Figure 165 When no object is selected they show the location of the mouse pointer which helps to position drawing objects more accurately You can also use the rulers to manage object handles and guide lines making it easier to position objects Figure 165 Rulers showing size of a selected object an a L Millimeter L Centimeter Meter L Kilometer Inch _ Foot a7 Miles _ Point Pica _ char _ Line Figure 166 Ruler units Er E E ere er Pr N Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 183 The page margins in the drawing area are also represented on the rulers You can change the margins directly on the rulers by dragging them with the mouse The margin area is indicated by the grayed out area on the rulers as shown in Figure 165 To modify the measurement units of the rulers which can be defined independently right click on the desired ruler as illustrated for the horizontal ruler in Figure 166 Status bar The Status bar is located at the bottom of the screen in
179. ages section of the Tasks pane You can also create and save additional slide masters or add more from other sources See Chapter 2 Using Slide Masters Styles and Templates in the Impress Guide for information on creating and modifying slide masters If all you need to do is to change the background you can take a shortcut 1 Select Format gt Page and go to the Background tab 2 Select the desired background between solid color gradient hatching and bitmap 3 Click OK to apply it A dialog box will open asking if the background should be applied to all the slides If you click yes Impress will automatically modify the master page for you Inserting and correctly formatting a background is beyond the scope of this chapter but you can find all the information you need in Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes of the Draw Guide or in Chapter 6 Formatting Graphic Objects of the Impress Guide 164 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Modifying the slide show By default the slide show will display all the slides in the same order as they appear in the slide sorter without any transition between slides and you need some keyboard or mouse interaction to move from one slide to the next You can use the Slide Show menu to change the order of the slides choose which ones are shown automate moving from one slide to the next and other settings To change the slide transition animate slides add a soundtrack to the presentation and
180. all LibreOffice components it includes several Draw specific fields For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this guide and Chapter 1 Introducing Draw in the Draw Guide Information area Position Digital signature Page style Zoom slider Shape selected SV U 20 1 15 10 2 90e7 95 Side 1 1 Layout Default cia 40 Object size Unsaved changes Slide number Zoom percentage Figure 167 Draw status bar The sizes are given in the current measurement unit and are not to be confused with the ruler units This current measurement unit is defined in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt General where you can also change the scale of the page Another way to change the scale is to double click on the number shown in the Status bar Toolbars To display or hide the various Draw toolbars choose View gt Toolbars On the menu that appears select which toolbars you want to display For more about working with toolbars see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this guide The tools available in the Draw toolbars are explained in the following sections The appearance of the toolbar icons may vary depending on your operating system and the selection of icon size and Style in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt View Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is the same for all LibreOffice components and is not described in detail in this chapter Standard E i Bae Bea Se
181. allery into a document To insert an object 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery or click the Gallery icon on the Standard toolbar in Writer and Calc or the Drawing toolbar in Impress and Draw 2 Select a theme 3 Select an object with a single click 4 Drag and drop the image into the document See Figure 315 You can also right click on the object and choose Insert gt Copy B B H a Tees a Ea eee Backgrounds Bullets fs Homepage B My Theme fs Rulers fs Sounds L B Bee eee 4 Figure 315 Copying a graphic object from the Gallery into a document oval marks the Hide Show button for the Gallery To insert an object as a link 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click then while pressing the Shift and Control keys drag and drop the object into the document Inserting an image as a background To insert an image as the background to a page or paragraph 1 Choose Tools gt Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click right click on the object and choose Insert gt Background gt Page or gt Paragraph Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 301 Modifying and positioning graphics LibreOffice provides many tools for resizing modifying filtering and positioning graphics wrapping text around graphics and using graphics as backgrounds and watermarks These tools are described in relevant chapters of the other gu
182. allow you to specify whether you want to paste the copied slide Before or After the selected slide 158 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Creating a new presentation This section describes how to start a new presentation using the Presentation Wizard The first thing to do is decide on the purpose of the presentation and plan the presentation Although you can make changes as you go having an idea of who the audience will be the structure the content and how the presentation will be delivered will save you a lot of time from the start When you start Impress the Presentation Wizard appears Figure 149 x Presentation Wizard Type Empty presentation From template Open existing presentation Preview O Do not show this wizard again Help _ cancel ese ack create Figure 149 Choosing the type of presentation 1 Under Type choose one of the options These options are covered in the Impress Guide e Empty presentation creates a blank presentation e From template uses a template design already created as the basis for a new presentation The wizard changes to show a list of available templates Choose the template you want e Open existing presentation continues work on a previously created presentation The wizard changes to show a list of existing presentations Choose the presentation you want 2 Click Next Figure 150 shows the Presentation Wizard step 2 as it appears if you selecte
183. ame height Powework FOOI Figure 325 Left normal letters right same letter heights 310 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Fontwork Alignment Changes the alignment of characters AW Choices are left align center right align word justify and left Alion stretch justify The effects of the text alignment can only be i z hh 4 seen if the text spans over two or more lines In the stretch Center l justify mode all the lines are filled completely Right Align Word Justify Stretch Justify AY Fontwork Character Spacing Changes the character spacing AW and kerning in the object For custom spacing input a nmin percentage value 100 is normal spacing less than 100 is r tight spacing more than 100 is expanded spacing a Nocnal Loose Very Loose Custom w Kern Character Pairs Using the Formatting toolbar Now let us go further and customize the Fontwork object with several more attributes Click on the Fontwork object The Formatting toolbar changes to show the options for editing the object The toolbar shown in Figure 326 appears when you use Fontwork in Writer Area Style Filling Line Width Area Style Filling Drawing Object Properties x Figure 326 Formatting toolbar for a Fontwork object in Writer This figure shows the toolbar floating In its default docked position it is one of the toolbars located below the menu bar The example toolbar has also been customized
184. an Madden Michel Pinquier Andrew Pitonyak Carol Roberts lain Roberts Hazel Russman Gary Schnabl Robert Scott Joe Sellman Janet Swisher Jim Taylor Alex Thurgood Barbara M Tobias Claire Wood Linda Worthington Frequently asked questions How is LibreOffice licensed LibreOffice is distributed under the Open Source Initiative OSI approved Lesser General Public License LGPL The LGPL license is available from the LibreOffice website http www libreoffice org download license May distribute LibreOffice to anyone Yes How many computers may install it on As many as you like May I sell it Yes May I use LibreOffice in my business Yes Is LibreOffice available in my language LibreOffice has been translated localized into over 40 languages so your language probably is Supported Additionally there are over 70 spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries available for languages and dialects that do not have a localized program interface The dictionaries are available from the LibreOffice website at www libreoffice org How can you make it for free LibreOffice is developed and maintained by volunteers and has the backing of several orgainzations Preface 13 I am writing a software application May use programming code from LibreOffice in my program You may within the parameters set in the LGPL Read the license http www libreoffice org download license Why do I need Java to run LibreOffice
185. angle will be selected To select multiple objects by framing the Select icon R on the Drawing toolbar must be active When dragging the mouse cursor to select multiple objects the selection rectangle being drawn is also known as a marquee Selecting hidden objects Even if objects are located behind others and not visible they can still be selected Hold down the Alt key and click on the object at the front of where the hidden object is located then click again to select the hidden object If there are several hidden objects keep holding down the Alt key and Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 195 clicking until you reach the object you want To cycle through the objects in reverse order hold down the Alt Shift keys and click When you click on the selected object its outline will appear briefly through the objects covering it Using the A t key method works on computers using a Windows or Mac operating systems On a computer using a Linux operating system the Tab key method described below has to be used To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard use the Tab key to cycle through the objects stopping at the object you want to select To cycle through the objects in reverse order press Shift Tab This is a very quick way to reach an object but it may not be practical if there a large number of objects in a drawing Arranging objects In a complex drawing several objects may be stack
186. ap to subdivisions as well as to the corners of the grid e The pixel size of the snap area defines how close you need to bring an object to a snap point or line before it will snap to it e The default color of the grid is light gray To change the color of the grid points go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Appearance Help lines Draw has help lines to easily allow you to position an object using the rulers at the top and left side of the workspace To turn on or off the help lines go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt View and select Snap Lines when moving option or go to the Options toolbar and by click on the a E Helplines While Moving icon Applying special effects With Draw you can apply many special effects to objects and groups of objects and this section is an introduction to some of these effects For more information on special effects can be found in Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes of the Draw Guide 204 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 To access the tools used for special effects go to View gt Toolbars gt Mode Figure 206 and Figure 207 Rotate and Flip can also be accessed by going to Modify on the main menu bar or by right clicking on the object and using the context menu Mode ToK Ghdwwrte Figure 206 Mode toolbar Rotate Flip In 3D Rotation Object Set in Circle perspective EBG S Set to circle slant Distort Transparency Gradient Figure 207
187. ar to drawing a straight line Click on the Rectangle icon E in the Drawing toolbar As you draw the rectangle with the mouse cursor the rectangle appears with the bottom right corner of the rectangle attached to the cursor Squares are rectangles with all sides of equal length To draw a square click on the Rectangle icon ll and hold down the Shift key whilst you draw a square If the option When creating or moving objects has been selected in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt General the action of the Shift key is reversed When the Rectangle tool is selected a square is drawn To draw a rectangle you have to press the Shift key when drawing This Shift key reversal also applies when drawing ellipses and circles To draw a rectangle or square from its center rather than the bottom right corner position your cursor on the drawing press the mouse button and then hold down the Alt key while dragging with the cursor The rectangle or square uses the start point where you first clicked the mouse button as the center Drawing circles or ellipses To draw an ellipse also called an oval click on the Ellipse icon on the Drawing toolbar A circle is an ellipse with both axes the same length To draw a circle click on the Ellipse icon and hold down the Shift key whilst you draw a circle To draw an ellipse or circle from its center position your cursor on the drawing press the mouse button and then hold down the Alt key wh
188. arget document 2 Inthe source document select the image to be copied 3 Move the mouse pointer over the selected image and press Contro C to copy the image to the clipboard 4 Switch to the target document 5 Click to place the cursor where the graphic is to be inserted 6 Press Control V to insert the image If the application from which the graphic was copied is closed before the graphic is A pasted into the target the image stored on the clipboard could be lost Inserting an image using a scanner If a scanner is connected to your computer LibreOffice can call the scanning application and inserted the scanned item into the LibreOffice document as an image To start this procedure place the cursor where you want the graphic to be inserted and choose Insert gt Picture gt Scan gt Select Source Although this practice is quick and easy it is unlikely to result in a high quality image of the correct size You may get better results by scanned material into a graphics program and cleaning it up there before inserting the resulting image into LibreOffice 300 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Inserting an image from the Gallery The Gallery provides a convenient way to group reusable objects such as graphics and sounds that you can insert into your documents The Gallery is available in all components of LibreOffice See Managing the LibreOffice Gallery on page 302 You can copy or link an object from the G
189. ars as dotted lines to help with repositioning Figure 191 To locate the object at its new location release the mouse button 196 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Figure 191 Moving an object Adjusting object size To change the size of a selected object or a group of selected objects move the mouse cursor to one of the selection handles The mouse cursor will change shape to indicate the direction of movement for that selection handle As you change the size of the object a ghosted outline of the object appears Figure 192 When you have reached the desired size of the object release the mouse button The results depend on which selection handle you use To resize an object along one axis use a side handle To resize along both axes use a corner handle Figure 192 Adjusting object size If you press the Shift key while resizing an object the change in size will be carried out symmetrically with respect to the two axes so that the aspect ratio of the object remains the same This Shift key behavior works on all selection handles This is the default behavior of the Shift key However if When creating or moving objects has been selected in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt Grid the action of the Shift key is reversed that is the aspect ratio will be preserved unless the Shift key is pressed Rotating and slanting an object For more information on rotating and slanting an object see Chapter 3 Wo
190. art make sure that the headings are styled consistently For example you can use the Heading 1 style for chapter titles and the Heading 2 and Heading 3 styles for chapter subheadings 102 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Although tables of contents can be customized extensively in Writer often the default settings are all you need Creating a quick table of contents is simple 1 When you create your document use the following paragraph styles for different heading levels Such as chapter and section headings Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 and so on These are what will appear in your table of contents 2 Place the cursor where you want the table of contents to be inserted 3 Choose Insert gt Indexes and Tables gt Indexes and Tables 4 Change nothing in the Insert Index Table dialog Click OK If you add or delete text so that headings move to different pages or you add delete or change headings you need to update the table of contents To do this 1 Place the cursor within the table of contents 2 Right click and choose Update Index Table from the pop up menu If you cannot place your cursor in the table of contents choose Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Writer gt Formatting Aids and then select Enable in the Cursor in protected areas section You can customize an existing table of contents at any time Right click anywhere in it and choose Edit Index Table from the pop up menu Chapter 12 Creati
191. ary key field The primary key serves only one purpose to identify the record uniquely Any name can be used for this field We have used Fuel D for convenience so we know to which table it belongs 3 All other fields Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType a Type the next field name in the Field Name column b Select the Field Type for each field e For Date use Date DATE Press the D key to select it e PaymentType uses Text VARCHAR the default setting e All other fields use Number NUMERIC Press the N key once to select it c FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer need changes in the Field Properties section Figure 217 e FuelQuantity Change Length to 6 and Decimal places to 3 Many fuel pumps measure fuel to thousandths of a gallon in the USA where live e Odometer Change the Length to 10 and the Decimal places to 1 e FuelCost Change the Length to 5 and Decimal places to 2 Click the Format example button Figure 217 This opens the Field Format window Figure 218 Use Currency as the Category and your currency as the Format My currency has two decimal places Use what is appropriate for yours Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 219 E dometer 4L Entry required Length Decimal places Default value Field mae Field Type Fueld Juantit PaymentTyp Text VARCHAR Format example nt ger INTEGER Date Number NUME y Number NUMERIC
192. as Open Save and Export as PDF e Edit contains commands for editing the document such as Undo xxx where xxx is the command to undo and Find amp Replace It also contains commands to cut copy and paste selected parts of your document e View contains commands for controlling the display of the document such as Zoom and Web Layout e Insert contains commands for inserting elements into your document such as Header Footer and Picture e Format contains commands such as Styles and Formatting and AutoCorrect for formatting the layout of your document e Table shows all commands to insert and edit a table in a text document e Tools contains functions such as Spelling and Grammar Customize and Options e Window contains commands for the display window e Help contains links to the LibreOffice Help file What s This and information about the program Toolbars LibreOffice has several types of toolbars docked fixed in place floating and tear off Docked toolbars can be moved to different locations or made to float and floating toolbars can be docked The top docked toolbar just under the Menu bar is called the Standard toolbar It is consistent across the LibreOffice applications The second toolbar at the top is the Formatting bar It is context sensitive that is it shows the tools relevant to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is on a graphic the Formatting bar provides
193. asks View X Master Pages Layouts Figure 152 Available slide layouts The first slide in a presentation is normally a title slide The Title Slide which also contains a section for a subtitle or Title Only are suitable layouts for the first slide while for most of the slides you will probably use the Title Contents layout To create the title click on Click to add title assuming the Blank Slide layout was not used and then type the title text To adjust the formatting of the title modify the Title presentation style see Chapter 2 Using Slide Masters Styles and Templates in the Impress Guide for instructions If you are using the Title Slide layout click on Click to add text to add a subtitle Proceed as above to make adjustments to the formatting if required modifying the Subtitle presentation style instead Text and graphic elements can be readjusted at any time during the preparation of the presentation but changing the layout of a slide that already contains some contents can have a dramatic effect It is therefore recommended that you pay particular attention to the layout you select If you do need to change the layout after contents have been added the contents are not lost though they may need to be reformatted To view the names for the included layouts use the Tooltip feature position the cursor on an icon in the Layout section or on any toolbar icon and its name will be displayed in a small rectangle
194. ation on the page Notes prints a single slide per page with any notes entered for that slide in Notes View Outline prints the title and headings of each slide in outline format To print handouts notes or outlines 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 Inthe Print section of the Print dialog select the required option 3 For Handouts you can then choose how many slides to print per page and the order in which they are printed 4 Click the Print button Range and copies All slides Number of copies 1 Slides 1 5 och f rs Collate 4 2 4 1 Selection E b Print Document Handouts Slides per page Default v Order Left to right then down Printing a brochure In Writer Impress and Draw you can print a document with two pages on each side of a sheet of paper arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in half the pages are in the correct order to form a booklet or brochure Plan your document so it will look good when printed half size choose appropriate margins font sizes and so on You may need to experiment To print a brochure on a single sided printer 1 Choose File gt Print 2 Inthe Print dialog click Properties 3 Check the printer is set to the same orientation portrait or landscape as specified in the page setup for your document Usually the orientation does not matter but it does for brochures Click OK to return to the Print dialog 4
195. ation Wizard in future you can select Do not show this wizard again You can enable the wizard again later under Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Impress gt General gt New document and select the Start with wizard option 150 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 The main Impress window The main Impress window Figure 138 has three parts the Slides pane Workspace and Tasks pane Additionally several toolbars can be displayed or hidden during the creation of a presentation File Edit View nsert Format Jools lideShow Window Help x E Boo Be e Gi T EE 0 EON OO amp SE B wy E da ee roo e cray 5 color SEBs c my slides x formai Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Tasks x Click to add title Click to add text b Table Design lt amp Custom Animation EEE Slide Transition f 7M eT e B B x 7 a eh B amp ty 039 455 iH 002000 Side 1 1 Gefault a 65 Figure 138 Main window of Impress ovals indicate the Hide Show markers You can close the Slides pane or the Tasks pane by clicking the X in the upper right corner of the pane or by choosing View gt Slide Pane or View gt Tasks Pane to deselect the pane To reopen a pane choose View gt Slide Pane or View gt Tasks Pane again You can also maximize the Workspace area by clicking on the Hide Show marker in the middle of the vertical separator line indicated by ovals in Figure 138 Using the
196. atting toolbar as well as indentation of parts of a paragraph by pressing the Tab key on the keyboard Using the default tab spacing can cause formatting problems if you share documents with other people If you use the default tab spacing and then send the document to someone else who has chosen a different default tab spacing tabbed material will change to use the other person s settings Instead of using the defaults define your own tab settings as described in this section To define indents and tab settings for one or more selected paragraphs double click on a part of the ruler that is not between the left and right indent icons to open the Indents amp Spacing page of the Paragraph dialog Double click anywhere between the left and right indent icons on the ruler to open the Tabs page of the Paragraph dialog A better strategy is to define tabs for the paragraph style See Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide for more information Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 89 Using tabs to space out material on a page is not recommended Depending on what you are trying to accomplish a table is usually a better choice Changing the default tab stop interval Any changes to the default tab setting will affect the existing default tab stops in any document you open afterward as well as tab stops you insert after making the change To set the measurement unit and the spacing of default tab stop intervals go to Tools
197. aurus 4 5 Dicollecte n fr Dictionnaire Modernes 4 5 Synonymes 2 3 e C sures 3 0 Pour signaler une erreur ajouter POF Import 1 0 5 The Document Foundation 4 The PDF Import Extension allows you to import and modify PDF documents Best results with 1 Presentation Minimizer 1 0 3 The Document Foundation 4 The Presentation Minimizer is used to reduce the file size of the current presentation Images Presenter Console 1 1 0 The Document Foundation 4 The Presenter Console Extension provides more control over your slide show presentation suc Report Builder 1 2 1 The Document Foundation Use the Report Builder to create stylish smart looking database reports The flexible report ed ah Script provider for Python 3 3 0 The Document Foundation 4 eo Add support for Python via the Scripting Framework to enable Python scripts in the user and s Type of Extension El Installation Shared 4 User Get more extensions online Add Check for Updates Figure 355 Using the Extension Manager Help To download extensions that are listed in the repository you can open the Extension Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 361 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts Introduction You can use LibreOffice without requiring a pointing device such as a mouse or touchpad by using its built in keyboard shor
198. ay rem 16 Press Down Arrow to move to the next line dim argsi9 1 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args19 0 Name Count args19 0 Value 1 argsi19 1 Name Select args19 1 Value false dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoDown 0 args19 end sub Cursor movements are used for all operations as opposed to searching If run on the DONTKNOW line the word weight is moved to the front of the line and the first The is changed to She This is not perfect but should not have run the macro on the lines that did not have the proper format need to do these manually Running the macro quickly It is tedious to repeatedly run the macro using Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro see Figure 335 The macro can be run from the IDE Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to open the Basic Macro dialog Select your macro and click Edit to open the macro in the IDE The IDE has a Run Basic icon in the toolbar that runs the first macro in the IDE Unless you change the first macro it is the empty macro named Main Modify Main so that it reads as shown in Listing 6 Listing 6 Modify Main to call CopyNumToCo 1 Sub Main CopyNumToColl End Sub Now you can run CopyNumToCol1 by repeatedly clicking the Run Basic icon in the toolbar of the IDE This is very fast and easy especially for temporary macros that will be used a few times and then discarded Sometimes the ma
199. ble click then click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and click on Update Style O Styles and Formatting AOD Ss _ New Style from Selection _ Update Style iS Load Styles First line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 y Automatic Figure 50 Updating a style from a selection Using AutoUpdate AutoUpdate applies to paragraph and frame styles only If the AutoUpdate option is selected on the Organizer page of the Paragraph Style or Frame Style dialog applying direct formatting toa paragraph or frame using this style in your document automatically updates the style itself If you are in the habit of manually overriding styles in your document be sure that AutoUpdate is not enabled Updating styles from a document or template You can update styles by copying or loading them from a template or another document See Copying and moving styles on page 64 Creating new custom styles You may want to add some new styles You can do this in two ways e Creating a new style using the Style dialog e Creating a new style from a selection 62 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Creating a new style using the Style dialog To create a new style using the Style dialog right click in the Styles and Formatting window and select New from the pop up menu If you want your new style to be linked with an ex
200. ble includes what our fuel economy is We will do this using the Design View Queries that require calculations are best created with the Design view Using the Wizard to create a query Queries created by the wizard provide a list or lists of information based upon what one wants to know It is possible to obtain a single answer or multiple answers depending upon the circumstances In the main database window Figure 213 click the Queries icon in the Databases section then in the Tasks section click Use Wizard to Create Query The Query Wizard window opens Figure 248 The information we want is what albums are by a certain musical group or individual the album s author We can include when each album was bought When working with a query more than one table can be used Since different tables may contain the same field names the format for naming fields in a query is Table name field name with a period between the table name and the field name For example the Lunch field of the Vacation table used in a query has the name Vacation Lunch Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base Step 1 Select the fields 1 Select the CD Collection table from the drop down list of tables 2 Select fields from the CD Collection table in the Available fields list a Click Artist and use the gt button to move it to the Fields in the Query list b Move the AlbumTitle and DatePurchased fields in the same manner c Click Next
201. breOffice uses for all documents or for specific documents In the Options dialog click Language Settings gt Languages Options Language Settings E LibreOffice Load Sawe Languages Writing Aids LibreOffice Writer This is where you make settings concerning language E LibreOffice Writer Web with LibreOffice Figure 41 Language Setting Options Language Settings On the right hand side of the Language Settings Languages page change the User interface Locale setting Default currency and Default languages for documents as required In the example English USA has been chosen for all the appropriate settings Language of User interface Default English USA gt Locale setting Default English USA Decimal separator key Same as locale setting Default currency Default USD Default languages for documents Western 7 English USA L Eor the current document only Enhanced lanquage support Enabled for Asian languages Enabled for com plex text layout CTL Figure 42 Choosing language options If you want the language dictionary setting to apply to the current document only instead of being the default for all new documents select the option labeled For the current document only If necessary select the options to enable support for Asian languages Chinese Japanese Korean and support for CTL complex text layout languages such as Urdu Thai Hebrew and Arab
202. btained from other sources You can download templates for LibreOffice from many sources including the official template repository at http templates libreoffice org and install them on your computer On other websites you may find collections of templates that have been packaged into extension OXT files These are installed a bit differently as described below Installing individual templates To install individual templates 1 Download the template and save it anywhere on your computer 2 Import the template into a template folder by following the instructions in Importing a template on page 74 For advanced users If you know the location of LibreOffice template folders you can manually copy new templates into them The location varies with your computer s operating system To learn where the template folders are stored on your computer go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Paths Installing collections of templates The Extension Manager provides an easy way to install collections of templates that have been packaged as extensions Follow these steps 1 Download the extension package OXT file and save it anywhere on your computer 2 In LibreOffice select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog Figure 59 click Add to open a file browser window 3 Find and select the package of templates you want to install and click Open The package begins installing You
203. cBocntetahechancevspsaddeacisdnniosbeed cis dausdomedoutbodeedeatiaeceenlanAbesdodenaeaseies 215 Creating a aisle 9 did er ee ee eee ree ee een ne eee eee er ee eee eee eee ne eee 223 Accessing other dalta SOU assesses ase cexsanaconsaeaciendenscuessocenesieaedadanes eare Nini adan ainiai iini 234 Using data Sources in Le OI cect ccrete caustencasibsecedandecngeneusdneedsseececuesinacotuiigeulensplaonsededandun 235 E a TOs eE EEA O O 239 Cream QUEE eren E A AE 241 25 yo LATA 8 8 610 fee en E ee E E nem EAE A ee ae EA E A ee ae eee eer 249 Chapter 9 Getting Starica WAN Matiisen aa a aa aren esee EE 254 E 2 Lg E EE E E eere eee eee 255 T E a E E E E ee eee eee 259 ENING a TONTU ecenin ia a a a eE 257 AT e E E E E EA TE 262 Changing the appearance of MOMMA S ace ccteccccscceccsses ceeiexsenvenceasendetasentaneeacneasinnaseneetacseresscedee 268 Formulas n Witer docume ee iinn rA N S 271 ONG I css nese eas A A PE A E EE E E aces ice A E A I ET 273 Mah commands FR OICN ONGC aseriisrocniunnei coin E A EREE Aai 276 Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing ss ssssssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 277 OE ee E E wueeediperseaeeecie se 278 T 01 9 916 ea E E EE 278 Beee 06 Wl 91a AAs EEA AE A A EEE A TE E P E E EEE E EEA EE A meter 278 iy 6101411915 O ag OF a E eee eee ere 287 Exporning O oher hace actrees a eaa a eaaa iiaa 292 E mailing docUMEMS cassini eieaa reana area daii aa 292 Digital signing Ol
204. can also add icons and create new toolbars as described in Chapter 14 To access a toolbar s customization options use the down arrow at the end of the toolbar or on its title bar Toolbar customization icons q2 07 x a fe U Bi Figure 7 Customizing toolbars To show or hide icons defined for the selected toolbar choose Visible Buttons from the drop down menu Visible icons are indicated by an outline around the icon Click on icons to select or deselect them See Figure 8 Right click context menus You can quickly access many menu functions by right clicking on a paragraph graphics or other object A context menu will pop up Often the context menu is the fastest and easiest way to reach a function If you are not sure where a function is located in the menus or toolbars you can often find it by right clicking 24 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Load URL New New DRouent From Template Open m hs Visible Buttons Customize Toolbar Dock Toolbar Dock All Toolbars Oa Otol 2 Lock Toolbar Position ae Visible icons Close Toolbar Save As Documents E mail Edit File Figure 8 Selection of visible toolbar icons Status bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the workspace It provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some features It is similar in Writer Calc Impress and Draw although each component includes some comp
205. can find more information on using styles in Default layout with style on page 275 and in Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates of the Getting Started guide Text mode Larger formulas should always be in a paragraph of their own separated from the text When you use formula elements in running text they can often be higher than the letter height However if it is necessary to place a formula within running text switch into the equation editor and go to Format gt Text mode Math will try to shrink the formula to fit the letter height The numerators and denominators of fractions are shrunk and the limits of integrals and sums are placed beside the integral sum sign Example A formula in a separate paragraph 2 I Me II N I and the same formula embedded in text mode X gt i 272 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Background borders and size With regard to formatting formulas are treated as objects of the Frame Style type with the Formula frame style Background color and borders can be set using this style or directly with Format gt Frame Object or by right clicking the formula and choosing Object from the context menu In the basic installation formulas have a transparent background and no borders The size of a formula cannot be adjusted in a Writer document it depends directly on the way the formula is constructed see Changing the font size on page 268 Creating a formula library When
206. ces openoffice org Another forum with many examples and help How to run a macro A typical method to run a macro is as follows 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to open the Macro Selector dialog See Figure 342 2 Select the library and module in the Library list left hand side 3 Select the macro in the Macro name list right hand side 4 Click Run to run the macro Macro Selector Ea Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name gt a My Macros g EnterMyName run gt amp LibreOFfice Macros Main Metin gt E Martin Gi necon gt G Recorded Help Figure 342 Use the Macro Selector dialog to run macros 344 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Although you can use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to run all macros this is not efficient for frequently run macros A more common technique is to assign a macro to a toolbar button menu item keyboard shortcut or a button embedded in a document While choosing a method it is also good to ask questions such as e Should the macro be available for only one document or globally for all documents e Does the macro pertain to a specific document type such as a Calc document e How frequently will the macro be used The answers will determine where to store the macro and how to make it available For example you will probably not add a rarely used macro to a toolbar To help dete
207. ch to choose Double clicking on the zoom level percent opens the Zoom amp View Layout dialog Starting a new document You can start a new blank document in LibreOffice in several ways When LibreOffice is open but no document is open for example if you close all the open documents but leave the program running the Start Center is shown Click one of the icons to open a new document of that type or click the Templates icon to start a new document using a template You can also start a new document in one of the following ways e Use File gt New and choose the type of document e Use the arrow next to the New button on the main toolbar From the drop down menu select the type of document to be created e Press Control N on the keyboard e Use File gt Wizards for some special types of documents If a document is already open in LibreOffice the new document opens in a new window S LibreOffice 3 The Document Foundation L Drawing x spreadsheet Database x Presentation Formula ES Templates Figure 11 LibreOffice Start Center 26 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Opening an existing document When no document is open the Start Center provides an icon for opening an existing document or choosing from a list of recently edited documents Open a file browser I Open Open a list of recently opened documents You can also open an existing document in one of the following ways
208. column breaks can exist on the same page When you want to remove them you have to remove each one individually This may be confusing at times because although there may be a column break set on the page when you go to Edit gt Manual Break Column break may be grayed out In order to remove the break you have to be in the cell next to the break For example if you set the column break while you are in H15 you can not remove it if you are in cell D15 However you can remove it from any cell in column H Headers and footers Headers and footers are predefined pieces of text that are printed at the top or bottom of a sheet outside of the sheet area Headers are set in the same way as footers Headers and footers are assigned to a page style You can define more than one page style fora spreadsheet and assign different page styles to different sheets For more about page styles see Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide Setting a header or footer To set a header or footer 1 Navigate to the sheet that you want to set the header or footer for Choose Format gt Page 2 On the Page Style dialog select the Header or Footer tab See Figure 135 3 Select the Header on option From here you can also set the margins the spacing and height for the header or footer You can check the AutoFit height box to automatically adjust the height of the header or footer Margin Changing the size of the left or right margin
209. controls have numbered buttons for hiding different levels If you no longer need a group place the mouse cursor in any cell in it and select Data gt Group and Outline gt Ungroup To remove all groups on a sheet select Data gt Group and Outline gt Remove Filtering which cells are visible A filter is a list of conditions that each entry has to meet in order to be displayed You can set three types of filters from the Data gt Filter sub menu Automatic filters add a drop down list to the top row of a column that contains commonly used filters They are quick and convenient and are useful with text and with numbers because the list includes every unique entry in the selected cells In addition to these unique entries automatic filters include the option to display all entries the ten highest numerical values and all cells that are empty or not empty as well as a standard filter The automatic filters are somewhat limited In particular they do not allow regular expressions so you cannot use them to display cell contents that are similar but not identical Standard filters are more complex than automatic filters You can set as many as three conditions as a filter combining them with the operators AND and OR Standard filters are mostly useful for numbers although a few of the conditional operators such as and lt gt can also be useful for text Other conditional operators for standard filters include options to display
210. createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem nee en nee ene eee eee ee dim argsi 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Value Andrew Pitonyak dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args1 end sub Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 333 The macro in Listing 4 is not as complicated as it first appears Learning a few things helps significantly in understanding the generated macros The discussion starts with features near the top of the macro listing and describes them If you like to avoid details then simply change the text Andrew Pitonyak in the macro above to what you want to insert at the current cursor position Comments start with REM The keyword REM short for remark starts a macro comment All text after REM on the same line is ignored As a short cut the single quote character can also be used to start a comment LibreOffice Basic is not case sensitive for keywords So REM Rem and rem all start a comment If you use symbolic constants defined by the API it is safer to assume that the names are case sensitive symbolic constants are an advanced topic not usually needed by people that use the macro recorder Defining subroutines with SUB Individual macros are stored in subroutines defined with the keyword SUB The end of a subroutine is indicated by the words END SUB The code starts by defining
211. cro recorder fails Understanding the LibreOffice internals helps to understand how and why the macro recorder frequently fails The primary offender is related to the dispatch framework and its relationship to the macro recorder The dispatch framework The purpose of the dispatch framework is to provide uniform access to components documents for commands that usually correspond to menu items can use File gt Save from the menu the shortcut keys Ctrl S or click on the Save toolbar icon All of these commands are translated into the same dispatch command 338 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 The dispatch framework can also be used to send commands back to the UI User Interface For example after saving the document the File Save command is disabled As soon as the document has been changed the File Save command is enabled If we see a dispatch command it is text such as uno InsertObject or uno GoToStartOfLine The command is sent to the document s frame and the frame passes on the command until an object is found that can handle the command How the macro recorder uses the dispatch framework The macro recorder records the generated dispatches The recorder is relatively simple to implement and the same commands that are issued are recorded for later use The problem is that not all dispatched commands are complete For example inserting an object generates the following code dispatcher executeDispa
212. cument Format by default LibreOffice 3 has adopted version 1 2 of the OpenDocument standard LibreOffice can also open and save many other file formats see File formats LibreOffice can open on this page File formats LibreOffice can save to on page 374 and Exporting to other formats on page 375 OpenDocument filename extensions The most common filename extensions used for OpenDocument documents are odt for word processing text documents ods for spreadsheets odp for presentations odb for databases odg for graphics vector drawings odf for formulas mathematical equations File formats LibreOffice can open LibreOffice can open a wide variety of file formats in addition to the OpenDocument formats including Portable Document Format PDF if an ODF file is embedded in the PDF see Chapter 10 for more information Opening text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt ott oth odm and fodt Writer 3 can open the formats used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxw stw and sxg and the following text document formats Microsoft Word 6 0 95 97 2000 XP doc and dot Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Word 2007 2010 XML docx docm dotx dotm Microsoft WinWord 5 doc WordPerfect Document wpd Microsoft Works wps Lotus WordPro lwp Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarWriter formats sdw sgl vor DocBook xml Unified Office Format text
213. cument settings are overruled by the user specific settings of the person who opens it If you deselect this option the user s personal settings do not overrule the settings in the document For example your choice in the options for LibreOffice Writer of how to update links is affected by the Load user specific settings option Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 47 Load W Load user specific settings with the document Load printer settings with the document Save Edit document properties before saving Always create backup copy Save AutoRecovery information every 15 Minutes Save URLs relative to file system K A A N Save URLs relative to internet Default file format and ODF settings ODF format wersion 1 2 Extended recommended l Size optimization for ODF format Warn when not saving in ODF or default format Document type Always save as Text document ODF Text Document Figure 37 Choosing Load and Save options Load printer settings with the document If this option is not selected the printer settings that are stored with the document are ignored when you print it using the Print File Directly icon The default printer in your system will be used instead Edit document properties before saving If you select this option the Document Properties dialog pops up to prompt you to enter relevant information the first time you save a new document or whenever you use Save As Save AutoRecove
214. d Empty Presentation at step 1 If you selected From template an example slide is shown in the Preview box Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 159 x Presentation Wizard Select a slide design lt Original gt A Black and White Blue Border Blue Lines and Gradients Blin Cham ra dimm khe Select an output medium Original Screen Overhead sheet Slide Preview Paper Figure 150 Selecting a slide design 3 Choose a design under Select a slide design The slide design section gives you two main choices Presentation Backgrounds and Presentations Each one has a list of choices for slide designs If you want to use one of these other than lt Original gt click it to select it e The types of Presentation Backgrounds are shown in Figure 150 By clicking an item you will see a preview of the slide design in the Preview window Impress contains three choices under Presentations lt Original gt Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy e lt Original gt is for a blank presentation slide design Both Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy have their own prepackaged slide designs Each design appears in the Preview window when its name is clicked Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy are included presentation templates They can be used to create a presentation by choosing From template in the first step Figure 149
215. d with the Default Text body or Text body indent paragraph styles To turn autoformatting on or off choose Format gt AutoCorrect and select or deselect the items on the list Creating numbered or bulleted lists There are several ways to create numbered or bulleted lists e Use autoformatting as described above e Use list numbering styles as described in Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles and Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide e Use the Numbering and Bullets icons on the paragraph formatting toolbar See Figure 80 select the paragraphs in the list and then click the appropriate icon on the toolbar It is a matter of personal preference whether you type your information first then apply Numbering Bullets or apply them as you type Using the Bullets and Numbering toolbar You can create nested lists where one or more list items has a sub list under it as in an outline by using the buttons on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar Figure 82 You can move items up or down the list or create sub points and even change the style of bullets Use View gt Toolbars gt Bullets and Numbering to see the toolbar The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt View If numbering or bullets are being applied automatically in a way that you find inappropriate you can switch them off temporarily by unchecking Format
216. d saving files Help system LibreOffice comes with an extensive Help system This is your first line of support for using LibreOffice To display the full Help system press F1 or select LibreOffice Help from the Help menu In addition you can choose whether to activate Tips Extended tips and the Help Agent using Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt General If Tips are enabled place the mouse pointer over any of the icons to see a small box tooltip with a brief explanation of the icon s function For a more detailed explanation select Help gt What s This and hold the pointer over the icon Free online support The LibreOffice community not only develops software but provides free volunteer based support See Table 1 and this web page http www libreoffice org get help Users can get comprehensive online support from the community through mailing lists Other websites run by users also offer free tips and tutorials This forum provides community support for LibreOffice and other programs http user services openoffice org en forum Paid support and training Alternatively you can pay for support services Service contracts can be purchased from a vendor or consulting firm specializing in LibreOffice 10 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Table 1 Free support for LibreOffice users Free LibreOffice support Answers to frequently asked questions FAQs http www libreoffice org get help fag
217. d would save all of the fields clear them and make the form ready to accept data on the second record Since we have a subform using the Tab key places the cursor in the first Date field of the subform with the date automatically entered to match the Date field of the main form The FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer fields are numeric fields The Payment field is a drop down list Enter the data just as you did in the main form and use the Tab key to go to the next field When you use the Tab key to leave the Payment field it goes to the Date field of the next line and automatically enters the date Now you can enter your second set of fuel data for this day To move to another record when the form has a subform click any of the fields of the main form In this case click the Date field of the main form Then use the directional arrows at the bottom There are four of them from left to right First Record Previous Record Next Record and Last Record Figure 245 To the right of these arrows is the New Record icon To create a new record while in another record in the main form click either the Next Record icon or the New Record icon The number in the Record box is the number of the record whose data is shown in the form If you know the number of the record you want you can enter it into the record box and then press Enter to take you to that record Figure 247 is arecord with data inserted in its fields 240 Ge
218. dation Chapter amp Getting Started with Base LibreOffice s Database Component Introduction A data source or database is a collection of pieces of information that can be accessed or managed by LibreOffice For example a list of names and addresses is a data source that could be used for producing a mail merge letter A shop stock list could be a data source managed through LibreOffice LibreOffice uses the terms Data Source and Database to refer to the same thing which could be a database such as MySQL or dBase or a spreadsheet or text document holding data This chapter covers creating a database showing what is contained in a database and how the different parts are used by LibreOffice It also covers using the Base component of LibreOffice to register other data sources A data source can be a database spreadsheet or text document LibreOffice Base uses the HSQL database engine All of the files created by this engine including the database forms are kept in one zipped file A database consists of a number of fields that contain the individual pieces of data Each table of the database is a group of fields When creating a table you also determine the characteristics of each field within it Forms are for data entry into the fields of one or more tables which have been associated with the form They can also be used for viewing fields from one or more tables associated with the form A query creates a new t
219. dation org Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 19 Minimum requirements LibreOffice 3 5 requires one of the following operating systems e Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or higher XP Vista Windows 7 or Windows 8 e GNU Linux Kernel version 2 6 18 glibc2 v2 5 or higher and gtk v2 10 4 or higher e Mac OS X 10 4 Tiger or higher Administrator rights are needed for the installation process Some LibreOffice features wizards and the HSQLDB database engine require that the Java Runtime Environment JRE be installed on your computer Although LibreOffice will work without Java support some features will not be available For a more detailed listing of requirements see the LibreOffice website http www libreoffice org get help system requirements How to get the software The software can be downloaded from http www libreoffice org You can also download the software by using a Peer to Peer client such as BitTorrent at the same address Linux users will find LibreOffice included in many of the latest Linux distributions Ubuntu is just one example How to install the software Information on installing and setting up LibreOffice on the various supported operating systems is given here http www libreoffice org get help installation Extensions and add ons Extensions and add ons are available to enhance LibreOffice Several extensions are installed with the program and others are available from the offic
220. der menu To format a header you can use either the menu item shown in Figure 87 or Format gt Page gt Header Both methods take you to the same tab on the Page Style dialog Inserting header and footer contents Other information such as document titles and chapter titles is often put into the header or footer These items are best added as fields That way if something changes the headers and footers are updated automatically Here is one common example To insert the document title into the header 1 Choose File gt Properties gt Description and type a title for your document 2 Add a header Insert gt Header gt Default 3 Place the cursor in the header part of the page 4 Choose Insert gt Fields gt Title The title should appear on a gray background which does not show when printed and can be turned off 5 To change the title for the whole document go back to File gt Properties gt Description Fields are covered in detail in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide For more about headers and footers see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages and Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles in the Writer Guide Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 99 Numbering pages To automatically number pages 1 Insert a header or footer as described in Creating headers and footers above 2 Place the cursor in the header or footer where you want the page number to appear and choose Insert gt Fields
221. desktop for example KDE or Gnome on Linux User Interface Use system font for user interface If you prefer to use the system font the default font for your computer and operating system instead of the font provided by LibreOffice for the user interface select this option User interface Screen font anti aliasing Not available in Windows not shown in Figure 23 Select this option to smooth the screen appearance of text Enter the smallest font size to apply anti aliasing Menu icons in menus Causes icons as well as words to be visible in menus Font Lists Show preview of fonts Causes the font list to look like Figure 24 Left with the font names shown as an example of the font with the option deselected the font list shows only the font names not their formatting Figure 24 Right The fonts you will see listed are those that are installed on your system Fonts which are tuned for use with a specific script such as Arabic Hebrew Malayalam and SO on now show an additional preview of some sample text in the target script wo ae a u amp tLiberation Mono Liberation Mono Liberation Sans Liberation Sans pani Liberation Sans Narrow Liberation Serif Ag Liberation Serif LilyUPC Ag unvuPC Linux Biolinurm G af Linux Biolinum C Linux Biolinum satya Linux Libertine AG Linux Biolinum O nux Libertine G AE Liberation Sans Narrow 111 lii Figure 24 Font list Left With pr
222. dialog opens Language Shows the language for the selected text Click to open a menu where you can choose another language for the selected text or for the paragraph where the cursor is located You can also choose None Do not check spelling to exclude the text from a spelling check or choose More to open the Character dialog Insert mode Click to toggle between nsert and Overwrite modes when typing Selection mode Click to toggle between STD Standard EXT Extend ADD Add and BLK Block selection EXT is an alternative to Shiftt click when selecting text See Working with text on page 85 for more information about ADD and BLK Unsaved changes This icon replaces the default icon here if changes to the document have not been saved Bullets 1 Level 1 B GOGO ch 6 e 100 Digital Object view Zoom zoom signature information layout slider percent Figure 66 Right end of status bar Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 81 Digital signature If the document has been digitally signed an icon shows here You can double click the icon to view the certificate Section or object information When the cursor is on a section heading or list item or when an object Such as a picture or table is selected information about that item appears in this field Double clicking in this area opens a relevant dialog For details consult the Help or the Writer Guide View layout Click an icon to change between singl
223. ding Macromedia Flash SWF Draw vector graphics Draw is a vector drawing tool that can produce everything from simple diagrams or flowcharts to 3 D artwork Its Smart Connectors feature allows you to define your own connection points You can use Draw to create drawings for use in any of LibreOffice s other components and you can create your own clip art and add it to the Gallery Draw can import graphics from many common formats and save them in over 20 formats including PNG HTML PDF and Flash Base database Base provides tools for day to day database work within a simple interface It can create and edit forms reports queries tables views and relations so that managing a relational database is much the same as in other popular database applications Base provides many new features such as the ability to analyze and edit relationships from a diagram view Base incorporates HSQLDB as its default relational database engine It can also use dBASE Microsoft Access MySQL or Oracle or any ODBC compliant or JOBC compliant database Base also provides support for a subset of ANSI 92 SQL 18 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Math formula editor Math is LibreOffice s formula or equation editor You can use it to create complex equations that include symbols or characters not available in standard font sets While it is most commonly used to create formulas in other documents such as Writer and Impress files Math can
224. documents Bookmarks Saving as a Microsoft Word file Working with text Selecting items that are not consecutive iF Insert reference to Name Page Norking with documents Chapter 5 eference Value Above Below Number no context Number full context Insert Close Help Figure 92 The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog 106 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Using bookmarks Bookmarks are listed in the Navigator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse click You can cross reference to bookmarks and create hyperlinks to bookmarks as described above 1 Select the text you want to bookmark Click Insert gt Bookmark 2 On the Insert Bookmark dialog the larger box lists any previously defined bookmarks Type a name for this bookmark in the top box and then click OK Insert Bookmark Bookmarks insertpagenum usedocproperties Cancel Figure 93 Inserting a bookmark Using master documents Master documents are typically used for producing long documents such as a book a thesis or a long report or when different people are writing different chapters or other parts of the full document so you don t need to share files A master document joins separate text documents into one larger document and unifies the formatting table of contents TOC bibliography index and other tables or lists Yes master documents do work in Writer However until you become fam
225. e Aaa LETT A 98 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Creating headers and footers A header is an area that appears at the top of a page A footer appears at the bottom of the page Information such as page numbers inserted into a header or footer displays on every page of the document with that page style Inserting a header or footer To insert a header you can either e Choose Insert gt Header gt Default or the page style if not Default or e Hover the mouse over the top of the text area until the Header marker appears Figure 86 and then click on the What is Writer Header OOoPageStyle Writer is the word processor component of LibreOffice In addition to the usual features of a word processor spelling check thesaurus hyphenation autocorrect find and replace automatic generation of tables of contents and indexes mail merge and others Writer provides these Figure 86 Header marker at top of text area After a header has been created a down arrow appears on the header marker Click on this arrow to drop down a menu of choices for working with the header Figure 87 Creating headers and footers Header OOoPageStyle Format Header A header is an area that appears at the top of a page A footer appears atthe Border and Background Information such as page numbers inserted into a header or footer displays O0 Delete Header document with that page style Figure 87 Hea
226. e Drag the mouse to the left and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen is split into two views each with its own horizontal scroll bar You can scroll the left and right parts of the window independently Removing split views To remove a split view do any of the following e Double click on each split line e Click on and drag the split lines back to their places at the ends of the scroll bars e Choose Window gt Split to remove all split lines at the same time Entering data using the keyboard Most data entry in Calc can be accomplished using the keyboard Entering numbers Click in the cell and type in the number using the number keys on either the main keyboard or the numeric keypad To enter a negative number either type a minus sign in front of it or enclose it in parentheses brackets like this 1234 By default numbers are right aligned and negative numbers have a leading minus symbol Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 127 If a number beginning with O is entered in to a cell Calc will drop the O for example 01234 becomes 1234 To enter a number and retain the leading O right click on the cell and choose Format Cells gt Numbers In the Format Cells dialog under Options select the required number of Leading zeros The number selected for leading zeros needs to be one higher than the digits in a number For example if the number is 1234 the number entered for the leadi
227. e do any one of the following e Inthe equation editor click on the location e Select an area of the markup code that you wish to change e Click on an element in the preview area the cursor will automatically move to the corresponding point in the equation editor e Double click on an element in the preview area the corresponding section in the equation editor will be selected To be able to work in the upper preview area in the stand alone Math window Figure 272 the formula cursor must be activated Use the Formula Cursor button on the Tools toolbar aaga Ci You can change an equation by overwriting selected text or by inserting new markup code at the cursor position Formula layout The most difficult part of using LibreOffice Math comes when writing complicated formulas This section provides some advice Brackets are your friends Math knows nothing about order of operation You must use brackets to state the order of operations explicitly Consider the following examples Markup Result Markup Result 2 over x 1 244 2 over x 1 2 X X 1 1 over 2 1 over 2 7 262 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 In the first example Math has recognized that the 2 before and the x after the over belong to the fraction and has represented them accordingly If you want x 1 rather than x to be the denominator you must bracket them together so that both will be placed there In the second
228. e gt Save As and specify HTML Document as the file type Writer does not replace multiple spaces in the original document with the HTML code for non breaking spaces If you want to have extra spaces in your HTML file or web page you need to insert non breaking spaces in LibreOffice To do this press Control Spacebar instead of just Spacebar Saving a document as a series of web pages Writer can save a large document as a series of web pages HTML files with a table of contents page To do this 1 Decide which headings in the document should start on a new page and make sure all those headings have the same style for example Heading 1 2 Choose File gt Send gt Create HTML Document 3 Inthe Name and Path of the HTML Document dialog type the file name to save the pages under Also specify which style indicates a new page as decided in step 1 r Mame and Fath of the HTML Document Save Ir B 001 9 100 testdocs EE E A E webpage btn Mi Recent Dacuments Ss Desktop i hy Network FI jiii File name webpage E Save as type HTML Document Cancel styles Heading 1 iz Default Fiqure Heading 1 Figure 331 Creating a series of web pages from one document 320 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 4 Click Save to create the multi page HTML document The resulting HTML files conform to the HTML 4 Transitional Creating web pages using a Wizard LibreOffice s Web
229. e Choose File gt Open e Click the Open button on the main toolbar e Press Control O on the keyboard In each case the Open dialog appears Select the file you want and then click Open Ifa document is already open in LibreOffice the second document opens in a new window In the Open dialog you can reduce the list of files by selecting the type of file you are looking for For example if you choose Text documents as the file type you will only see documents Writer can open including odt doc txt if you choose Spreadsheets you will see ods x1s and other files that Calc opens You can also open an existing document that is in an OpenDocument format by double clicking on the file s icon on the desktop or in a file manager such as Windows Explorer If you have associated Microsoft Office file formats with LibreOffice you can also open these files by double clicking on them Under Microsoft Windows you can use either the LibreOffice Open and Save As dialogs or the ones provided by Microsoft Windows See Using the Open and Save As dialogs on page 29 Saving a document To save a new document do one of the following e Press Control S e Choose File gt Save from the menu bar e Click the Save button on the main toolbar When the Save As dialog appears enter the file name verify the file type if applicable and click Save To save an open document with the current file name choose File gt Save This w
230. e Format Cells dialog Use the Font Effects tab to set other font characteristics See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for more information Automatic 7 HZ SS 136 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Formatting the cell borders To add a border to a cell or group of selected cells click on the Borders icon on the formatting toolbar and select one of the border options displayed in the palette To quickly choose a line style and color for the borders of a cell click the small arrows next to the Line Style and Line Color icons on the Formatting toolbar In each case a palette of choices is displayed For more controls including the spacing between the cell borders and the text use the Borders tab of the Format Cells dialog There you can also define a shadow See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for details The cell border properties apply to a cell and can only be changed if you are editing that cell For example if cell C3 has a top border which would be equivalent visually to a bottom border on C2 that border can only be removed by selecting C3 It cannot be removed in C2 Formatting the cell background To quickly choose a background color for a cell click the small arrow next to the Background Color icon on the Formatting toolbar A palette of color choices similar to the Font Color palette is displayed To define custom colors use Too
231. e Formula button to the Standard toolbar or create a keyboard shortcut See Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for more information Entering a formula The equation editor uses a markup language to represent formulas For example beta creates the Greek character beta P This markup is designed to read similar to English whenever a possible For example a over b produces a fraction re You can enter a formula in three ways e Select a symbol from the Elements window e Right click on the equation editor and select the symbol from the context menu e Type markup in the equation editor The context menu and the Elements window insert the markup corresponding to a symbol This provides a convenient way to learn the LibreOffice Math markup Click on the document body to exit the formula editor Double click on a formula to enter the formula editor again The Elements window The simplest method for entering a formula is the Elements window j Elements a sal asb deA f x a aon Ue gt Categories 4 a ad 0 d a b a b axb a b aab a b a b a b avb aob Figure 274 Symbols are divided into categories The Elements window is divided into two main parts e The top shows the symbol categories Click on these to change the list of symbols e The bottom shows the symbols available in the current category Tip You can hide or show the Elements window with View gt Elements Chapter 9
232. e been saved with more than one version use the Version drop down to select which version you wish to open in read only mode For Microsoft Office documents only the current version can be opened Use the File type field to specify the type of file to be opened or the format of the file to be saved Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 29 The Read only option on the Open dialog opens the file for reading and printing only Consequently most of the toolbars disappear and most menu options are disabled An Edit File button is displayed on the Standard toolbar to open the file for editing You can open files from the Web by typing a URL in the File name field on the Open dialog Using the Navigator The Navigator lists objects contained in a document collected into categories For example in Writer it shows Headings Tables Text frames Comments Graphics Bookmarks and other items as shown in Figure 14 In Calc it shows Sheets Range Names Database Ranges Graphics Drawing Objects and other items In Impress and Draw it shows Slides Pictures and other items To open the Navigator click its icon 2 on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose View gt Navigator on the menu bar You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main LibreOffice window or leave it floating see Docking floating windows and toolbars on page 24 Click the marker or triangle by any of the categories to display the list of objects in that
233. e both use a plain mouse click and drag to the desired spot Step 4 Change the label wording Field names have been required to be single words for some time However the labels for the fields in a form can be more than one word So we will change them by editing the text in the label 1 Control click the SnackNo label Do one of the following Right click the SnackNo label and select Control from the pop up menu e Or click the Control icon in the Form Control toolbar Figure 231 2 The dialog that opens is labeled Properties Label Field It contains all the properties of the selected label In the Label selection edit the label to Snack No e Close the Properties dialog 3 Use the same procedure to change these labels as well BPayment to Payment LPayment to Payment SPayment to Payment Miscellaneous to Misc SnackCost to Snack Cost MPayment to Payment MiscPayment to Misc Payment and MiscNotes to Misc Notes You can modify all of the listings in the Properties window For example if you change the Alignment from Left to Center the word or words in the label are centered within the label When you have some time you might want to experiment with different settings just to see the results you get Step 5 Change the widths of the labels and fields We want the following controls to be 2 cm wide 0 8 inches Breakfast Lunch Supper Odometer Snack No Tolls Snack Cost Motel and Misc All of the pa
234. e dialog Figure 209 Result of a duplication 206 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Cross fading Cross fading transforms one object shape to another object shape and only works when two objects are selected 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select two differently shaped objects Go to Edit gt Cross fading to open the Cross fading dialog Figure 210 Select Increments to determine the number of shapes between the two objects Select Cross fading to apply a gradual change of line and fill properties between the two objects Select Same orientation to apply a smooth transition between the two objects Click on OK and the result is a new group of objects with the first object selected as the Start object and the second object selected as the end object The intermediate objects show the transformation from one shape to another Figure 211 Cross fading oie ges Increments 16 Cross fade attributes Cancel same orientation Help Figure 211 Cross fading result Combining multiple objects Using Draw you can group or combine objects together allowing you to treat multiple objects as one unit or to merge objects to form a new shape For more information see Chapter 5 Combining Multiple Objects in the Draw Guide Grouping of objects is similar to putting objects into a container You can move the objects asa group and apply global changes to the objects withing the group A group can always be undone and the object
235. e fields to the Fields in the form list Click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 223 Select the fields of your form Tables or queries Table Vacations F Available fields Fields in the form Date Odometer Breakfast Lunch Supper Motel Tolls BPayment LPayment H Figure 225 Form Wizard steps Step 2 Set up a subform Since we have already created a relationship between the Fuel and Vacations tables we will use that relationship If no relationship had been defined this would need to be done in step 4 1 Click the box labeled Add Subform 2 Click Sub form based upon existing relation 3 Fuel is listed as a relation we want to add So click Fuel to highlight it as in Figure 226 Click Next Decide if you want to set up a subform Add Subfoarm Subform based on existing relation Which relation do you wart imme to add Subform based on manual selection of fields i A subform is a form that is inserted in another form Use subforms to show data from tables or queries with a one to many Figure 226 Adding a subform Step 3 Add subform fields This step is exactly the same as step 1 The only difference is that not all of the fields will be used in the subform 1 Fuel is preselected under Tables or queries 2 Use the gt gt button to move all the fields to the right 3 Click the FuellD field to highlight it 4 Use the lt button to move the FuellD to
236. e from one document to another Loading styles from a template or document You can copy styles by loading them from a template or another document 1 Open the document you want to copy styles into 2 Inthe Styles and Formatting window click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and then click on Load Styles see Figure 50 3 On the Load Styles dialog Figure 54 find and select the template you want to copy styles from Load Styles Categories Templates Drawing HB Systems phb Presentation Presentation Backgrounds Presentations Figure 54 Copying styles from a template into the open document 4 Select the categories of styles to be copied Select Overwrite if you want the styles being copied to replace any styles of the same names in the document you are copying them into 5 Click OK to copy the styles You will not see any change on screen Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 65 To copy the styles from another document click the From File button to opena window from which you can select the required document If your document has a table of contents and if you have used custom styles for headings the heading levels associated with outline levels in Tools gt Outline Numbering will revert to the defaults of Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on when you load styles this way You will need to change these back to your custom heading S
237. e keyboard configuration file in the File name box or select an existing file from the list If you need to browse to find a file from another location 4 Click Save A confirmation dialog appears if you are about to overwrite an existing file otherwise there will be no feedback and the file will be saved Loading a saved keyboard configuration To load a saved keyboard configuration file and replace your existing configuration click the Load button at the right of the Customize dialog and then select the configuration file from the Load Keyboard Configuration dialog Resetting the shortcut keys To reset all of the keyboard shortcuts to their default values click the Reset button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog Use this feature with care as no confirmation dialog will be displayed the defaults will be set without any further notice or user input Assigning macros to events In LibreOffice when something happens we say that an event occured For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved You can associate a macro with an event so the macro is run when the event occurs Acommon use is to assign the open document event to run a macro that performs certain setup tasks for the document To associate a macro with an event use the Events page of the Customize dialog For more information see Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 360 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Adding fu
238. e level of each paragraph as well as its position within the text by using the arrow buttons on the Text Formatting toolbar see Outline view on page 155 For more information on text see Adding and formatting text on page 165 Adding pictures or objects to a slide To add any pictures or objects to a slide for example a picture clipart drawing photograph or spreadsheet click on Insert then select from the drop down menu what type of insert you require For more information see Adding pictures tables charts and media on page 169 Modifying the appearance of all slides To change the background and other characteristics of all slides in the presentation you need to modify the master page or choose a different master page as explained in the section Working with master pages and styles on page 172 A Slide Master is a slide with a specified set of characteristics that acts as a template and is used as the starting point for creating other slides These characteristics include the background objects in the background formatting of any text used and any background graphics LibreOffice uses three interchangeable terms for this one concept Master slide slide master and master page These terms all refer to a slide that is used to create other slides This guide however uses only the term slide master except when describing the user interface Impress has included a range of slide masters found in the Master P
239. e mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows A 2 i Figure 114 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar with cursor 126 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 3 Hold down the left mouse button A gray line appears running across the page Drag the mouse downwards and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen splits into two views each with its own vertical scroll bar You can scroll the upper and lower parts independently Notice in Figure 112 the Beta and the AO values are in the upper part of the window and other calculations are in the lower part Thus you can make changes to the Beta and AO values and watch their affects on the calculations in the lower half of the window You can also split the screen using a menu command Click in a cell immediately below and to the right of where you wish the screen to be split and choose Window gt Split Splitting the screen vertically To split the screen vertically 1 Move the mouse pointer into the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen and place it over the small button on the right with the black triangle Immediately to the right of this button is a thick black line se Split screen bar Figure 115 Split bar on horizontal scroll bar 2 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows 3 Hold down the left mouse button and a gray line appears running up the pag
240. e new toolbar now appears on the list of toolbars in the Customize dialog After creating a new toolbar you need to add some commands to it as described below Adding a command to a toolbar If the list of available buttons for a toolbar does not include all the commands you want on that toolbar you can add commands When you create a new toolbar you need to add commands to it 1 On the Toolbars page of the Customize dialog select the toolbar in the Toolbar list and click the Add button in the Toolbar Content section of the dialog 2 The Add Commands dialog is the same as for adding commands to menus Figure 349 Select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close If you insert an item which does not have an associated icon the toolbar will display the full name of the item the next section describes how to choose an icon for a toolbar command 3 Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence 4 When you are done making changes click OK to save Choosing icons for toolbar commands Toolbar buttons usually have icons not words on them but not all of the commands have associated icons 356 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 To choose an icon for a command select the command and click Modify gt Change icon On the Change Icon dial
241. e or arrow to the right of the icon opens a floating toolbar giving access to the tools for that geometric shape The use of these tools for geometric shapes is similar to the tool used for drawing rectangles and squares For more information see Drawing rectangles or squares on page 189 and Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes in the Draw Guide The icons for geometric shapes displayed on the Drawing toolbar will change shape according to the last tool selected and used to draw an object Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 193 Basic shapes Click on the triangle or arrow to the right of the Basic Shapes icon P to open the Basic Shapes toolbar for drawing basic shapes This toolbar also includes a rectangle tool identical to the one already displayed on the Drawing toolbar Basic Shapes YX me nee e eGirkv amp eoe r agaEa Figure 184 Basic Shapes toolbar Symbol shapes Click on the triangle or arrow to the right of the Symbol Shapes icon to open the Symbol Shapes toolbar for drawing symbols Symbol Shapes _ x Ge irVe eoriwiec i Oil ES Figure 185 Symbol Shapes toolbar Block arrows Click on the triangle or arrow to the right of the Block Arrows icon to open the Block Arrows toolbar for drawing block arrows Block Arrows we gt BEZET A PERSAS Figure 186 Block Arrows toolbar Flowcharts Click on the triangle or arrow to the right of the Flowcharts icon in to open the Flowchart toolbar f
242. e page side by side and book layout views The effect varies with the combination of window width and zoom factor in use You can edit the document in any view Figure 67 View layouts single side by side book Zoom To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from which to choose Zoom interacts with the selected view layout to determine how many pages are visible in the document window CG _s __ 100 Changing document views Writer has several ways to view a document Print Layout Web Layout and Full Screen To access these and other choices go to the View menu and click on the required view When in Full Screen view press the Esc key to return to either Print or Web Layout view When in Print Layout you can use both the Zoom slider and the View Layout icons on the status bar In Web Layout you can use only the Zoom slider 82 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 You can also choose View gt Zoom from the menu bar to display the Zoom amp View Layout dialog where you can set the same options as on the Status bar In Web Layout view most of the choices are not available foom amp View Layout oom factor View layout CO Optimal 0 Automatic C Fit width and height Single page Fit width Columns a 100 Book mode 0 Variable Figure
243. e password in the Enter password to allow editing field Repeat the password in the Confirm password field Click OK Changing the password for a document When a document is password protected you can change the password while the document is open Choose File gt Properties gt General and click the Change Password button Saving a document automatically You can choose to have LibreOffice save files for you automatically Automatic saving like manual saving overwrites the last saved state of the file To set up automatic file saving 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General 2 Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and set the time interval 28 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Renaming and deleting files You can rename or delete files within the LibreOffice dialogs just as you can in your usual file manager However you cannot copy or paste files within the dialogs Using the Open and Save As dialogs You can choose whether to use the LibreOffice Open and Save As dialogs or the ones provided by your operating system To view or change which type of dialog LibreOffice uses 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt General 2 Select the Use LibreOffice dialogs option This section discusses the LibreOffice Open and Save As dialogs Figure 13 shows the Save As dialog the Open dialog is similar b Saveas Jets home jaimon Desktop Link to Libre Cat C5 Date modified 0101GD3
244. e pop up menu Modifying styles LibreOffice provides several ways to modify styles both the predefined styles and any custom styles that you create e Changing a style using the Style dialog e Updating a style from a selection e Use AutoUpdate paragraph and frame styles only e Load or copy styles from another document or template Any changes you make to a style are effective only in the current document To change styles in more than one document you need to change the template or copy the styles into the other documents as described on page 64 Changing a style using the Style dialog To change an existing style using the Style dialog right click on the required style in the Styles and Formatting window and select Modify from the pop up menu The Style dialog displayed depends on the type of style selected Each style dialog has several tabs See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 61 Updating a style from a selection To update a style from a selection 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 Inthe document select an item that has the format you want to adopt as a style Make sure that there are unique properties in this paragraph For example if there are two different font sizes or font styles that particular property will remain the same as before 3 Inthe Styles and Formatting window select the style you want to update single click not dou
245. e source window and select the table whose data you want to use 3 Select the rows of data you want to add to the spreadsheet Click the gray box to the left of the row you want to select if only selecting one row That row is highlighted e To select multiple rows hold down the Control key while clicking the gray box of the rows you need Those rows are highlighted e To select all the rows click the gray box in the upper left corner All rows are highlighted 4 Click the Data to text icon to insert the data into the spreadsheet cells 5 Save the spreadsheet 238 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Adding records to a spreadsheet is fairly easy You need to have the Data Source window open your spreadsheet open and the table you want to use selected 1 Click the gray box containing the field name for the table s ID field 2 Drop and drag the gray box for the table s ID field to where you want the record to appear in the spreadsheet 3 Repeat until you have moved all of the fields you need to where you want them 4 Name and save the spreadsheet 5 Click a row of the table in the Data Source window 6 Drag the data in the ID field in the selected row onto the ID field in the spreadsheet The Save icon should activate 7 Click the Edit File button to make the spreadsheet read only Click Save when asked if you want to save the file The Data Source window goes blank the fields in the spreadsheet
246. e to display pages in frames with a navigator and set an index page For more information see Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages in this guide Inserting comments in a drawing You can insert comments into your drawing and this a similar process used in Writer and Calc 1 Goto Insert gt Comment on the menu bar A small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of your drawing with a larger text box beside it Figure 212 Draw automatically adds your name and the date at the bottom of this text box Jean Hollis Weber Today 03 44 Figure 212 Inserting comments 2 Type or paste your comment into the text box You can apply basic formatting to parts of the text by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the context menu From this menu you can also delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document 3 You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the drawing Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment 4 To show or hide the comment markers go to View gt Comments on the main menu bar 5 Go to Tools gt Options gt User Data to enter the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment 6 If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color 210 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 LibreOffice The Document Foun
247. e unrest Set permission password rotating pages Password Confirm jages The password can be empty Bssibility tools Help ok Cancel Figure 307 Setting a password to encrypt a PDF Exporting to other formats LibreOffice uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find what you want under File gt Save As look under File gt Export as well LibreOffice can export files to XHTML if the appropriate filter is installed standard on Mac and Linux optional on Windows In addition Draw and Impress can export to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File gt Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the required format in the File format list and click the Export button E mailing documents LibreOffice provides several ways to send documents quickly and easily as e mail attachments in one of three formats OpenDocument LibreOffice s default format Microsoft Office formats or PDF To send the current document in OpenDocument format 1 Choose File gt Send gt Document as E mail LibreOffice opens your default e mail program The document is attached 2 In your e mail program enter the recipient subject and any text you want to add then send the e mail Documents can only be sent from the LibreOffice menu if a mail profile has been set
248. e width of some fields All of the fields with a label containing the word payment are too wide They need to be shortened before the controls are moved Date m Figure 232 Selecting a field 1 Control click the BPayment field 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right The cursor becomes a double headed arrow 3 Drag the cursor to the left until the field is 2 5 cm 1 inch wide 4 Repeat these steps to shorten these fields Lpayment SPayment SnPayment Mpayment and MiscPayment Step 3 Move the controls to group them by category If you have the Snap to Grid and Guides when moving icons selected in the Design Format toolbar you will see how wide the field is as you shorten it We want to move the controls so that they look like Figure 233 1 Click the first control you want to move A border appears around the control with eight green handles 2 Move the cursor over the label or field of the control It change shape to a drag icon 3 Drag and drop the control to where you want it 4 Use the same steps to move the rest of the controls to where they belong 228 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Date Odometer Tolls Motel Payment Misc Misc Payment Breakfast Payment snack No Snack Cost Payment Misc Notes a i E supper Payment Figure 233 Positioning of controls Do not use Control click when moving a field It moves either the field or the label A but not both To mov
249. eOffice from loading during system startup deselect the Load LibreOffice during system start up item on the pop up menu You might want to do this if your computer has insufficient memory for example Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 21 Reactivating the Quickstarter If the Quickstarter has been disabled you can reactivate it by selecting the Load LibreOffice during system start up checkbox in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Memory Using the Quickstarter in Linux and Mac OS X LibreOffice under Linux has a Quickstarter that looks and acts like the one described above for Windows The checkbox on the Memory page is labeled Enable systray quickstarter If you do not have this checkbox the Quickstarter module is not installed on your system Mac OS X provides similar functionality through a pop up menu from the dock Parts of the main window The main window is similar in each component of LibreOffice although some details vary See the chapters in this book about Writer Calc Draw and Impress for descriptions of those details Common features include the menu bar the standard toolbar and the formatting toolbar at the top of the window and the status bar at the bottom Menu bar The Menu bar is located across the top of the LibreOffice window just below the Title bar When you choose one of the menus listed below a submenu drops down to show commands e File contains commands that apply to the entire document such
250. ecommended for other kinds of images or graphics e JPEG compression Allows for varying degrees of quality A setting of 90 works well with photographs small file size little perceptible loss of quality e Reduce image resolution Lower DPI dots per inch images have lower quality For viewing on a computer screen generally a resolution of 72dpi for Windows or 96dpi GNU Linux is sufficient while for printing it is generally preferable to use at least 300 or 600 dpi depending on the capability of the printer Higher dpi settings greatly increase the size of the exported file EPS Encapsulated PostScript images with embedded previews are exported only as previews EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders General section e Embed OpenDocument file Makes this PDF easily editable in LibreOffice or similar programs e PDF A 1a PDF A is an ISO standard for long term preservation of documents by embedding all the information necessary for faithful reproduction such as fonts while forbidding other elements including forms security and encryption PDF tags are written If you select PDF A 1a the forbidden elements are grayed out not available e Tagged PDF Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document s contents This can help to display the document on devices with different screens and when using screen reader software Some tags that are exported are table of contents
251. ed Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may also be placed into frames or tables If you do not like the results click the Undo icon or press Ctr Z To make the pasted text take on the formatting of the surrounding text where it is being pasted e Choose Edit gt Paste Special or e Click the triangle to the right of the Paste icon or e Click the Paste icon without releasing the left mouse button Then select Unformatted text from the resulting menu The range of choices on the Paste Special menu varies depending on the origin and formatting of the text or other object to be pasted See Figure 74 for an example with text on the clipboard SWE h v HAE DDE link HTML HyperText Markup Language Formatted text RTF Unformatted text Figure 74 Paste Special menu 86 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Finding and replacing text and formatting Writer has two ways to find text within a document the Find toolbar for fast searching and the Find amp Replace dialog In the dialog you can e Find and replace words and phrases e Use wildcards and regular expressions to fine tune a search e Find and replace specific formatting e Find and replace paragraph styles Using the Find toolbar If the Find toolbar is not visible you can display it by choosing View gt Toolbars gt Find from the menu bar or by pressing Ctrl F The Find toolbar is shown docked at the bottom of the LibreOffice window just above the Stat
252. ed on top of one another To rearrange the stacking order by moving an object forward or backward select an object click Modify gt Arrange on the main menu bar and select Bring Forward or Send Backward Alternatively right click the object select Arrange from the context menu then Bring Forward or Send Backward The Arrange options are also available by clicking on the small triangle or arrow to the right of the Arrange icon on the Drawing toolbar This opens the Position toolbar giving access to the various arrangement options Moving and adjusting object size When moving an object or changing its size check the left hand area of the status bar at the bottom of the Draw window Figure 190 The area on the left of the Drawing toolbar from left to right shows what object is selected its position on the drawing in X Y coordinates and dimensions of the object The units of measurement are those selected in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt General For more information on moving and adjusting object size see Chapter 3 Working with Objects and Object Points in the Draw Guide 21 Shape selected ic 0 57 20 49 2 2 4 37 x 1 65 Figure 190 Left end of status bar when moving or adjusting an object Moving objects To move an object or a group of objects select it and then click within the object borders and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the mouse During movement the shape of the object appe
253. edge indicating that the object is selected and the yellow dot these are discussed in Moving and resizing Fontwork objects on page 313 3 Double click the object to edit the Fontwork text see Figure 323 Type your own text in place of the black Fontwork text that appears over the object 4 Click anywhere in a free space or press Esc to apply your changes Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 309 Figure 323 Editing Fontwork text Editing a Fontwork object Now that the Fontwork object is created you can edit some of its attributes To do this you can use the Fontwork toolbar the Formatting toolbar or menu options as described in this section If the selected Fontwork object is a 3 D object you can also use the 3D Settings toolbar Using the Fontwork toolbar Make sure that the Fontwork toolbar shown in Figure 321 is visible If you do not see it go to View gt Toolbars gt Fontwork Click on the different icons to edit Fontwork objects Fontwork Shape Edits the shape of the selected object i Fontwork x t You can choose from a palette of shapes t Aa iW u e ew be AVPdavyv ee om AvYVCIOS avC JO0S Figure 324 Fontwork toolbar showing palette of shapes Fontwork Same Letter Heights Changes the height of characters in the object Toggles Aa between normal height some characters taller than others for example capital letters d h and others and all letters the s
254. ee if can record a macro to format the text remember the two questions that ask AS an example copied the FontWeight constants group from the API web site The first column indicates the constant name Each name is followed by a space and a tab Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 335 DONTKNOW The font weight is not specified known THIN specifies a 50 font weight ULTRALIGHT specifies a 60 font weight LIGHT specifies a 75 font weight SEMILIGHT specifies a 90 font weight NORMAL specifies a normal font weight SEMIBOLD specifies a 110 font weight BOLD specifies a 150 font weight ULTRABOLD specifies a 175 font weight BLACK specifies a 200 font weight want the first column to contain the numeric value the second column the name and the third column the description The desired work is easily accomplished for every row except for DONTKNOW and NORMAL which do not contain a numeric value but know that the values are O and 100 so I will enter those manually The data can be cleaned in multiple ways all of them easy The first example uses keystrokes that assume the cursor is at the start of the line with the text THIN 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Record Macro to start recording 2 Press Ctrl Right Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies 3 Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space 4 Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name 5 Press Dele
255. een Click on this checkmark A row of information now appears in the larger box below the input boxes Select the options under Always and Screen 5 Inthe bottom section of the page you can change the typeface and size of the font used to display source code such as HTML and Basic in macros Security options Use the LibreOffice Security page to choose security options for saving documents and for Opening documents that contain macros Security options and warnings Adjust security related options and define warnings for hidden information in documents Options Passwords for web connections IE Persistently save passwords for web connections Onnections Protected 4 ter eco Lis i 3 f LECTe p jj 1 4 I Li Wlactej F I ENLE er session tf LibreOffice retrieves a pa Jra i are Ee protected pa ard Macro security Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted Macro Security macro developers Figure 30 Choosing security options for opening and saving documents Security options and warnings If you record changes save multiple versions or include hidden information or notes in your documents and you do not want some of the recipients to see that information you can set warnings to remind you to remove it or you can have LibreOffice remove some of it automatically Note that unless removed much of this information is retained in a file whether the file is in LibreOffice s default OpenDocument for
256. eet Page order Top to bottom then right Fi Left to right then down Ww First page number Print O Column and row headers w Charts CI Grid Drawing objects 3 C Comments C Formulas Wi Objects graphics W Zero values Scale Scaling mode Reduce enlarge printout A scaling Factor 100 ic i Figure 1 Dialog showing common controls 1 Tabbed page not strictly speaking a control 2 Radio buttons only one can be selected at a time 3 Checkbox more than one can be selected at a time 4 Spin box click the up and down arrows to change the number shown in the text box next to it or type in the text box 5 Thumbnail or preview 6 Drop down list from which to select an item 7 Push buttons 12 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Who wrote this book This book was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community Profits from sales of the printed edition will be used to benefit the community Acknowledgements This book is adapted from Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 The contributors to that book are Jean Hollis Weber Michele Zarri Magnus Adielsson Thomas Asileitner Richard Barnes Agnes Belzunce Chris Bonde Nicole Cairns Daniel Carrera JiHui Chol Richard Detwiler Alexander No l Dunne Laurent Duperval Spencer E Harpe Regina Henschel Peter Hillier Brook Richard Holt John Kane Rachel Kartch Stefan A Keel Jared Kobos Michael Kotsarinis Peter Kupfer lan Laurenson Dan Lewis Al
257. eet sxc OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet Template stc Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP Template xlt Microsoft Excel 5 0 and 95 xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Microsoft Excel 2007 2010 XML xlsx Office Open XML Spreadsheet xIsx Data Interchange Format dif dBase dbf SYLK slk 374 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 formats sdc and vor Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos HTML Document OpenOffice org Calc html and htm Pocket Excel pxl The Java Runtime Environment is required to use the mobile device filters for AportisDoc Palm Pocket Word and Pocket Excel Saving presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp otp fodp and odg Impress 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation Sxi OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation Template sti Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Template pot Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 2010 XML pptx potm Office Open XML Presentation pptx potm ppsx StarDraw Starlmpress sda sdd and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop Impress can also export to MacroMedia Flash swf and any of the graphics formats listed for Draw Saving drawings Draw 3 can only save in the OpenDocument Drawing formats odg and otg the OpenOffice org 1 x formats sxd and std and
258. efault Formatting from the menu bar Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 1 N 5 Using a slide master to add text to all slides Some of the supplied slide masters have text objects in the footer You can add other text objects to the master page for your slides to act as a header or a footer 1 Choose View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar 2 On the Drawing toolbar select the Text icon or press F2 3 Click once and drag in the master page to draw a text object and then type or paste your text into the object or add fields as described below 4 Choose View gt Normal when you are finished To add page slide numbers or date and time to the slide footers in your presentation select Insert gt Page Number or Insert gt Date and Time to open the Header and Footer dialog Figure 162 where you can select and configure these areas on the slide F x Header and Footer slide Notes and Handouts 7 applyto Al Fed CH O Variable Language 12 31 11 English USA a Help Footer O Slide number O Do not show on first slide Figure 162 Mite meses lt the slide footer areas To add a field such as the date or page number slide number into an object or as a separate object select Insert gt Fields and select the required field from the submenu If you want to edit this field in your slide
259. en installed View options The options on the LibreOffice View page affect the way the document window looks and behaves Some of these options are described below Set them to suit your personal preferences User Interface Graphics output Scaling 100 W Use hardware acceleration leon size and style Fi Use Anti Aliasi rig Small Galaxy defau Mouse W Use system font for user interface Mouse positioning No automatic positioning Menu Middle mouse button Icons in menus Automatic scrolling Automatic Tn Selection E Show preview of fonts Transparency 75 G w Show font history Figure 23 Choosing View options for LibreOffice applications User Interface Scaling If the text in the help files or on the menus of the LibreOffice user interface is too small or too large you can change it by specifying a scaling factor Sometimes a change here can have unexpected results depending on the screen fonts available on your system However it does not affect the actual font size of the text in your documents Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 37 User Interface Icon size and style The first box specifies the display size of toolbar icons Automatic Small or Large The Automatic icon size option uses the setting for your operating system The second box specifies the icon style theme here the Automatic option uses an icon set compatible with your operating system and choice of
260. en you can move the object handles to produce the desired effect See for Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes of the Draw Guide for more information on how to distort an object Dynamic transparency gradients You can control transparency gradients in the same manner as color gradients Both types of gradient can be used together With a transparency gradient the direction and degree of object fill color changes from opaque to transparent In a regular gradient the fill changes from one color to another but the degree of transparency remains the same The Transparency and Gradient tools on the Mode toolbar dynamically control transparency and color gradients See Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes of the Draw Guide for more information on how to create transparencies and gradients in an object Duplication Duplication makes copies of an object while applying a set of changes such as color or rotation to the duplicates that are created Click on an object or group of objects and go to Edit gt Duplicate on the main menu bar to open the Duplicate dialog Figure 208 Select the required options chosen from the options available When the options in the dialog are applied to a blue rectangle they produce the result shown in Figure 209 Duplicate ee is a ng X axis 050cm Yaxis 0 50m is Angle degrees S rc Enlargement Width 0 00cm is Height 0 00cm is Colors ____ Start LS End Figure 208 Duplicat
261. ense every four years did not fit into any of these It will be a table of its own license fees What fields fit the fuel purchases area Date purchased odometer reading fuel cost fuel quantity and payment method fit Fuel economy need not be included as it can be calculated using a query What fields fit the maintenance area Date of service odometer reading type of service cost of service and next scheduled service of this type for example for oil changes list when the next oil change should be But it would be nice if there was a way to write notes So a field for notes was added to the list What fields fit the vacations area Date odometer reading fuel including all the fields of the fuel table food including meals and snacks motel total tolls and miscellaneous Since these purchases are made by one of two bank cards or with cash want a field to state which payment type was used for each item What fields fit into the food category Breakfast lunch Supper and snacks seem to fit Do list all the snacks individually or list the total cost for snacks for the day chose to divide snacks into two fields number of snacks and total cost of snacks also need a payment type for each of these breakfast lunch Supper and total cost of snacks What are the fields that are common to more than one area Date appears in all of the areas as does odometer reading and payment type How will use this information about
262. eometric SADC S cgavis seed ecencachearenacedociivadsussirsdeeuahaepiinicsddveweassaedodadiansdecdiidseVincdentatane 193 oil ole 1 g 6 ODO a ee ee nee ene ee ee ee ee ek ee ee ee a ee 195 Moving and adjusting ODJeCt SIZ Cas sasecescseecesecseecascsuenascssaceeeseecteansogensesteseneatneceneaesarecceiemeaseeens 196 Rolain anid Saning ANODO aossen ia 197 E O a E E E AA E 199 FOrnmaUno aea Mhae rin A E N ee re eee 202 Se Bi E e ne ee ee A EE E E E T E E E A EI E TE T 203 eg 1018 61012 OD ECIS ee eee iia ee ee ee ane meee eee 203 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 5 APPIVNO Wem amp E16 5 I eio Gy ieee nt oer re a aa a ie 204 Combining wages 9 6 16 a en ee nee eae eee eee ee a en ee ee ee ere ae nee eee 207 Arranging aligning and distributing OD OCIS ssecindescesecnaescexecopineeadencassnceancestaeedeecnoeveneeneendieeadieass 209 FFT EC and editing Co eerecdeccscesorsseed een doecatade secs aseejcecseautoueebeessetonsn Geese aN EE 209 e EEn ES aa eases pace pe E E AIE E E E ETE E A NA TTE 209 e Ea ROLLET D e E A A EE AE E I E cet eee A A E E E EAT eee 209 insernino commen nA ORIG esses eco sectesen rere caseceencesacts a i AR Dia 210 Chapter 8 Getting Started with BaSe s sssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 211 O sa E E E E A EE 212 S late EEEE fol rc E E E E P AAE IT AII PAA ASE O VE A N A AN E E 213 creating a Now el E scarna aa 214 Creating database TANG Sr onecd ict ti
263. erosion ANARE susan E EE T E OTEA A O A AAEE T 9 C FS NS DOG TO asar E EEA rE EEEa ESEO 10 A EEE E E E E E N A E A E EE E E ene N 10 ROT ER E E S ENA PA TAE IE E A E A AE TERE E S E N 10 What you see irs 81 6 86 o 0c 0 eee ee ne ne ee er eee nee eer eee ee ee i dla using ETC On a AG essien i AAS ERER E d 11 What are all these things ets 8 haere ene ae ee ee ee nee ence en eee oe ere eee eee eee 12 WNO wrote Mio DOOK gente ee eee een ee eee eee een ee ee ee ee eee meee ee ee eT 13 PG AM Scere crs ste ccs cocina tacos iniiae iiid biosi aieri ienen iiaiai 13 FIO STI askoo INS STON isere rrn a ai ae 13 New features gigi old 8 161 6 Ao eeunne eae Ween een ee nee ee eee ene ee eee a eee ai 14 Chapter 1 PEE OCG VCE EC E ai EEEE 17 MUA MT eM er re ewban sere seeeeet becuse kaon den cain eeeedteiansesoneeeee ce 18 The advantages OF LIDEM O ocras risiini a te Seer tn meee tee cee rene 19 MA nel Ga r8 UTEE E p E E E AA E A AAE A E E PNE E A E eee ene A E ee ee 20 How todel ine CoWare ER EAEE EER 20 Howto moale Sowa G kaspa E pee ea ere me er ee 20 E xionsions and add ONG aeesannaaria ee 20 T E iaa a EEEE ene eon E EE 20 Panc ore Main WGA sorire eiir ea 22 NNG a NEN 6016 0 6 12 ae eee eee ee mee aa o ne ne ner nore ae tee ore 26 Opening an existing docume M Means eee one Reem rer ee E en one Ce ee eee eee a eee Zi eyo hid E10 ire 0 9160 do 4 Eeeeeeeeenaee eR nin ee E ern e enn ter enter oeena te tent rent one tren ret era eter 27 Renamin
264. es in the presentation This may be what you want on some occasions however in most cases you want to make sure that the presentation style is consistent and does not become a patchwork of different paragraph styles font types bullet points and so on There are several ways to ensure consistency these methods are explained below Pasting unformatted text It is normally good practice to paste text without formatting and apply the formatting later To paste without formatting either press Control Shift V and then select Unformatted text from the dialog that appears or click on the small black triangle next to the paste symbol in the standard toolbar GS and select Unformatted text The unformatted text will be formatted with the outline style at the cursor position in an AutoLayout text box or with the default graphic style in a normal text box Formatting pasted text If you are pasting the text into an AutoLayout area you need to apply the appropriate outline style to the text to give it the same look and feel as the rest of the presentation 1 Paste the text in the desired position Do not worry if it does not look right it will ina minute 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select Format gt Default formatting from the menu bar 4 Use the four arrow buttons in the Text Formatting toolbar highlighted in Figure 143 to move the text to the appropriate position and give it the appropriate outline level The button with t
265. es mirrored or only right first pages of chapters are often defined to be right page only or only left When you insert a header ona page style set up for mirrored pages or right and left pages you can have the contents of the header be the same on all pages or be different on the right and left pages For example you can put the page number on the left hand edge of the left pages and on the right hand edge of the right pages put the document title on the right hand page only or make other changes Controlling page breaks automatically Writer automatically flows text from one page to the next If you do not like the default settings you can change them For example you can require a paragraph to start on a new page or column and specify the style of the new page A typical use is for chapter titles to always start on a new right hand odd numbered page Compiling an automatic table of contents To compile an automatic table of contents first apply styles to the headings you want to appear in the contents list then use Tools gt Outline Numbering to tell Writer which styles go with which level in the table of contents See Chapter 4 for more information Defining a sequence of styles You can set up one paragraph style so that when you press Enter at the end of that paragraph the following paragraph automatically has the style you wish applied to it For example you could define a Heading 1 paragraph to be followed by a Text Body para
266. es section of the Tasks pane Figure 158 This section has three subsections Used in This Presentation Recently Used and Available for Use Click the sign next to the name ofa subsection to expand it to show thumbnails of the slides or click the sign to collapse the subsection to hide the thumbnails Each of the slide masters shown in the Available for Use list is from a template of the same name If you have created your own templates or added templates from other sources slide masters from those templates will also appear in this list Tasks View X ka Master Pages oo _ a El Used in This Presentation E Recently Used E Available for Use Figure 158 Available master pages slides masters Creating a slide master You can create a new slide master is similar to modifying the default slide master To start enable editing of slide masters by selecting View gt Master gt Slide Master and the Master View toolbar opens You can also right click on the slide master in the Master Pages section of the tasks pane and select Edit Master to open the Master View toolbar On the Master View toolbar click the New Master icon highlighted in Figure 159 ey View Close Master View Figure 159 Master View toolbar A second slide master appears in the Slides pane Modify this slide master to suit your requirements It is also recommended that you rename this new sl
267. estinations Convert document references to PDF targets a Export URLs relative to file system Cross document links Default mode Open with PDF reader application Open with Internet browser Figure 305 Links page of PDF Options dialog 290 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Export bookmarks as named destinations If you have defined Writer bookmarks Impress or Draw slide names or Calc sheet names this option exports them as named destinations to which Web pages and PDF documents can link Convert document references to PDF targets If you have defined links to other documents with OpenDocument extensions such as ODT ODS and ODP this option converts the files names to PDF in the exported PDF document Export URLs relative to file system If you have defined relative links in a document this option exports those links to the PDF Cross document links Defines the behavior of links clicked in PDF files Security page of PDF Options dialog PDF export includes options to encrypt the PDF so it cannot be opened without a password and apply some digital rights management DRM features e With an open password set the PDF can only be opened with the password Once opened there are no restrictions on what the user can do with the document for example print copy or change it e With a permissions password set the PDF can be opened by anyone but its permissions can be restricted See Figure 306
268. etting Started with Base chapter for OpenOffice org 3 3 explains the basics for creating a report that can be used With the report builder extension working selecting the type of report as static gives only a table layout of the report s data similar to Figure 271 on page 253 The area above the data can be contain things like the author the report its date and its name A company logo can be placed there as well The area below the data can also contain text and fields such as page number of page count Note Editing a static report will be discussed in Chapter 4 of the Base Guide Data Output When dynamic is selected as the report type and the report builder extension is working the report can be edited Its layout can be in one of two formats a text document or a spreadsheet Also it can be saved in a variety of formats that are available for Writer and Calc documents My recommendation for those that have the report builder extension working in their version of LibreOffice is that they always select dynamic as the report type You will have more control over the layout of the report than if you had selected static instead Vacations table report To create a new report 1 Click the Reports icon in the Database list in the Automobile LibreOffice Base window Figure 213 2 Inthe Tasks list click Use Wizard to Create Report The Report Wizard opens When the Report Wizard opens the Oracle Report Builder opens in the background
269. ever someone changes something in the document this change breaks the digital signature On Windows operating systems the Windows features of validating a signature are used On Solaris and Linux systems files that are supplied by Thunderbird Mozilla or Firefox are used For a more detailed description of how to get and manage a certificate and signature validation see About Digital Signatures in the LibreOffice Help To sign a document 1 Choose File gt Digital Signatures 2 If you have not saved the document since the last change a message box appears Click Yes to save the file 3 After saving you see the Digital Signatures dialog Click Add to add a public key to the document 4 Inthe Select Certificate dialog select your certificate and click OK 5 You see again the Digital Signatures dialog where you can add more certificates if you want Click OK to add the public key to the saved file A signed document shows an icon in the status bar You can double click the icon to view the certificate Removing personal data You may wish to ensure that personal data versions notes hidden information or recorded changes are removed from files before you send them to other people or create PDFs from them In Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Security gt Options you can set LibreOffice to remind warn you when files contain certain information and remove personal information automatically on Saving To re
270. eview Right Without preview Font Lists Show font history Causes the last five fonts you have assigned to the current document to be displayed at the top of the font list Otherwise fonts are shown in alphabetical order Graphics output Use hardware acceleration Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display Not supported on all operating systems and LibreOffice distributions Graphics output Use anti aliasing Enables and disables anti aliasing which makes the display of most graphical objects look smoother and with fewer artifacts Not Supported on all operating systems and LibreOffice distributions Press Shift Contro R to restore or refresh the view of the current document Mouse positioning Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs 38 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Middle mouse button Defines the function of the middle mouse button e Automatic scrolling dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view e Paste clipboard pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the Selection clipboard at the cursor position The Selection clipboard is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit gt Copy Cut Paste or their respective keyboard shortcuts Clipboard and Selection clipboard can contain different contents at the same time Function Cl
271. eview boxes at the top 3 Modify the Name as required 4 Click the Modify button The newly defined color is now listed in the Color table Alternatively click the Edit button to open the Color Picker dialog shown in Figure 28 Here you can select a color from the window on the left or you can enter values on the right using your choice of RGB CMYK or HSB Hue Saturation and Brightness values The color window on the left is linked directly with the color input fields on the right as you choose a color in the window the numbers change accordingly The color field at the lower left shows the value of the selected color on the left and the currently set value from the color value fields on the right Modify the color components as required and click OK to exit the dialog The newly defined color now appears in the lower of the color preview boxes shown in Figure 27 Type a name for this color in the Name box then click the Add button A small box showing the new color is added to the Color table Another way to define or alter colors is through the Colors page of the Area dialog where you can also save and load palettes a feature that is not possible here In Calc draw a temporary draw object and use the context menu of this object to open the Area dialog If you load a palette in one component of LibreOffice it is only active in that component the other components keep their own palettes Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 41
272. ext Flow Font Font Effects Position Hyphenation 2 B6 Characters at line end Characters at line begin Maximum number of consecutive hyphens Figure 84 Turning on automatic hyphenation Turning on hyphenation for the Default paragraph style affects all other paragraph styles that are based on Default You can individually change other styles so that hyphenation is not active for example you might not want headings to be hyphenated Any styles that are not based on Default are not affected See Chapter 3 Styles and Templates for more about styles based on other styles You can also set hyphenation choices through Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Writing Aids In Options near the bottom of the dialog scroll down to find the hyphenation settings E n Sm Se we es Se Se ee Se Se Se ee Se Se Se E a E E Se Se Se Se 8 Se ee Se E Se Se eS Se ee n Characters before line break 2 Characters after line break 2 E Hyphenate without inquiry iv Hyphenate special regions ay Figure 85 Setting hyphenation options 96 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 To change the minimum number of characters for hyphenation the minimum number of characters before a line break or the minimum number of characters after a line break select the item and then click the Edit button in the Options section Hyphenation options set on the Writing Aids dialog are effective only if hyphenation is turned on through paragraph styles
273. ffice components such as Writer and Calc If the database is registered other components can access it Save the new database with the name Automobile This opens the Automobile LibreOffice Base window Figure 213 shows part of this window Create Table in Design View Description Use Wizard to Create Table f Create View Reports Figure 213 Creating database tables Every time the Automobile database is opened the Automobile LibreOffice Base window opens Changes can then be made to the database The title for this window is always lt database name gt LibreOffice Base As you create a database you should save your work regularly This means more than saving what you have just created You must save the whole database as well For example when you create your first table you must save it before you can close it When the table is first saved it is also made part of the database you write the table in the database file 214 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Creating database tables In a database a table stores information for a group of things we call fields For example a table might hold an address book a stock list a phone book or a price list A database must have at least one table and may have several To work with tables click the Tables icon in the Database list or press A t a The three tasks that you can perform on a table are in the Tasks list See Figure 21
274. files and they are merged together only when you open the document again Linking an image has two advantages and one disadvantage e Advantage Linking can reduce the size of the document when it is saved because the image file itself is not included File size is usually not a problem on a modern computer with a reasonable amount of memory unless the document includes many large graphics files LibreOffice can handle quite large files e Advantage You can modify the image file separately without changing the document because the link to the file remains valid and the modified image will appear when you next open the document This can be a big advantage if you or someone else perhaps a graphic artist is updating images e Disadvantage If you send the document to someone else or move it to a different computer you must also send the image files or the receiver will not be able to see the linked images You need to keep track of the location of the images and make sure the recipient Knows where to put them on another machine so that the document can find them For example you might keep images in a subfolder named Images under the folder containing the document the recipient of the file needs to put the images in a subfolder with the same name and in the same place relative to the document When inserting the same image several times in the document it would appear beneficial to link rather
275. follow hyperlinks 44 custom dictionary 53 Customize dialog 345 customizing keyboard shortcuts 358 menus 352 toolbars 355 cut and paste 86 D dashes 89 data editing Calc themes 138 changing data in a cell 133 viewing 125 removing data from a cell 133 376 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 replacing all data in a cell 133 data entry Calc dates and times 129 fill series 130 Fill tool 129 numbers 127 numbers as text 128 selection lists 131 sharing content 132 speeding up 129 text 128 validating cell contents 132 data source description 212 editing 236 linking 234 registering 234 using in OOo documents 236 viewing 235 data validity 132 database AutoValue 218 creating 214 creating tables 215 field types and formats 216 planning 213 primary key 215 217 registering 235 Report Wizard 250 Table Wizard 215 tables 215 database form activation order 233 background 232 creating in Design View 234 creating using a Wizard 223 entering data 239 modifying 226 tab order 233 database reports creating 249 database table create using wizard 215 joined fields 225 relationships 221 date conversion automatic 129 default file format 48 default template 71 deleting files 29 derivative markup Math 265 Design View Base creating anew table 218 creating forms 234 creating queries 243 dictionaries installing 51 dictionary 90 different first page 76 digital rights management DRM 291 digital signa
276. func before the function and the following text will be recognized as a function Some functions recognized by Math need to be followed by numbers or variables If these are missing Math puts an inverted red question mark in their place which you can only remove by correcting the formula enter a variable or a number or a pair of empty braces as a placeholder You can navigate through errors using F3 and Shift F3 Equations over more than one line xX 3 y 1 Your first reaction would be to simply press the Enter key However if you press the Enter key although the markup goes to a new line the resulting equation does not You must type the newline command explicitly This is illustrated in the table below Suppose you want to make an equation covering more than one line for example Markup Result X 3 Syed VL ee da 3 1 y x 3 newline X y y 264 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Continuing the calculation on a new line without writing a complete new equation is not directly possible because Math expects a term on the left hand side of an equals sign You can substitute e Empty quotes This will automatically cause the line to be left justified e Empty braces The following line will then be centered e Spaces characters or The line will be centered with the spaces The alignment of equals signs under each other is described on page 267 As well spacing between elements
277. g Deleting sheets Sheets can be deleted individually or in groups Single sheet Right click on the tab of the sheet you want to delete and choose Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or chose Edit gt Sheet gt Delete from the menu bar Multiple sheets To delete multiple sheets select them as described earlier then either right click over one of the tabs and select Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or choose Edit gt Sheet gt Delete from the menu bar Renaming sheets The default name for the a new sheet is SheetX where X is a number While this works for a small spreadsheet with only a few sheets it becomes awkward when there are many sheets To give a sheet a more meaningful name you can e Enter the name in the Name box when you create the sheet or e Right click on a sheet tab and choose Rename Sheet from the pop up menu replace the existing name with one of your choosing e Double click on a sheet tab to pop up the Rename Sheet dialog Sheet names must start with either a letter or a number Apart from the first character of the sheet name allowed characters are letters numbers spaces and the underline character Attempting to rename a sheet with an invalid name will produce an error message 124 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Viewing Calc Using zoom Use the zoom function to change the view to show more or fewer cells in the window For more about zoom see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice
278. g CoV gt io ae een eee ee E ESEE eee eee are ot 113 Navigating within SOAS MOONS asc cies Sec se pedeganenseconcenqauceadutenewasceoeseusceedegueadieuaecsiouasaiwededene 115 Selecting items in a sheet or SpreadSNeet c ccccescceseceeeceeeceeeceeeceeecueeceeeceeseeeeeeeseaesseesees 119 Working with columns ANC OWS cccccc cece eecceecceeceeese eee eese esse eeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaueeeueseeeeeeeeeeesaess 121 4 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 MST MT RE E e E crake canton E EIA E E A E S tee a aco E E EE E ETE 122 MI e a E E ceo oes ESE EE 125 Entering data using the keyboard scsisirisicciiisnricssiieusuicaiindsiisiidasn denaeeebesactecenegcnreotaesincediessaeees 127 Speeding Up Oaa ENUY eriein riani 129 Sharing content between sheets nnsnnnanannernsnrnrrrrrnrrrrrnrrnrrrrrrrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrsnrrrrrnrrnrsnrerene 132 UE O a E E ete een nena nese eer enon er 132 Be UN eee E O ATE TEE 132 2 1006001010 9 f Eee eens ee ene mee ese Rei eee eiia ee ee eee eee eee eee ae 134 Autoformatting cells and SOS cadets ca greene scceenedeentanscneleabadineyaceesectulagneeteteeniaendieis t7 Formatting spreadsheets USING thOMEGS cccccseccseecseeceeeceseceeeceeeceeeceeecaeecueeseeeceeeseeeseeeses 138 Heino conditional Torma N ssnin 139 Pm e a a E a a O E E ORO 139 SIRE 16 0 e A A N N A E EA EE AA A A nee N AA me A wece 141 Usmo melden lire and Tane 0 9 aeir E aa 141 A A ect te a E E N EEE N a 142 P E
279. g and deleting fileS 00nnanoannannannanoannnnonnnnnsrnonronrrnrnrrsreorrnnrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrrrrnrrnrrnrrnernernee 29 Using the Open and Save AS ialOQS cccccccscecececeeecueeceeeceeeceeeseeccueeaueceueseueseeeseueseeesaeesaes 29 oS Wee Me UAT AOE ATTE E E E TEET AE AAEE AE EEEE T TE 30 undoing Aand tedong change S araser aiai eee ee 31 E oo ek En as T 1 EERI E ATEA AA ETA EE EAN A ET 32 a L E E E E 32 Chapter 2 SO UCIING UP LISTS OTIC E sssrini a aai 33 Choosing options iar all of LIDeOTCE ssassn arina aa einen 34 Choosing options for loading and SAVING COCUMENNS ccccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeseeeeeeseess 47 Choosmno Mrs ais Urcie oe lt 2 1 ge cee eee eer net ener peer tee ne Ne Oech erier errant ert ent ntrrer Beret aeeerer et errr ns 51 pols ci ile Mendi a6 18 9 Seeman een eee ie i a ree a A 54 Controlling LibreOffice s AUtOCOrrect FUNCTIONS ccccceccseeceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeueeeeeeeeeseeeseeesass 55 Chapter 3 Usma SMEs ANG VEIN DIALCS iirsiaiissianii aa a 57 aT a E E EA E S 58 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 3 i GTS LIers ees Bd hc Jenene ne ee a Ce en eee eee ae ee en oe eee a 58 20016 1016 ee ee ee eee oe an ene Seen ee ene ene ee eee eee eee ee ee eee eae 59 EE eE SEE 2 ene E NE ee eed eee ene nee eee eee eee ee ee ee ree 61 Creating New CUStOM SU NCS sadist cance ahetsncersenennd iaaiiai a a EE 62 CONO ana MOVING y O arada a ee aaan iani
280. g macros in Writer gt amp My Macros Header_graphic gt amp Libreoffice Macros Footer_autopage b 0113G53 Macros_MJF_20110806 odt Action_box v MartinMacros odt FinaliseLetter E Martin cale amp Impress amp Module Writer e E Standard Figure 333 LibreOffice Macro Organizer dialog Writer module selected The buttons in the Macro Organizer dialog differ depending on what is selected in the LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog see Figure 333 and Figure 338 4 Be certain to open the library container named My Macros Find the library named Standard under My Macros Be warned every library container has a library named Standard Select the Standard library and click New Module to create a new module to contain the macro 5 The default module name is Module1 Type a descriptive name and click OK to create the module The LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog is displayed again showing the new module Name OK Recorded Figure 334 Give your module a meaningful name 6 Highlight the newly created module In the upper left corner type the macro name to use such as EnterMyname and then click Save to save the macro If you followed all of the steps the Standard library now contains a module named Recorded which contains the EnterMyName macro as shown in Figure 335 When LibreOffice creates a new module it automatically adds the macro named Ma
281. g tag an HTML_OFF will be created These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export Import Ignore font settings Select this option to have LibreOffice ignore all font settings when importing The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be used Export To optimize the HTML export select a browser or HTML standard from the Export box If LibreOffice Writer is selected specific LibreOffice Writer instructions are exported Export LibreOffice Basic Select this option to include LibreOffice Basic macros Scripts when exporting to HTML format You must activate this option before you create the LibreOffice Basic macro otherwise the script will not be inserted LibreOffice Basic macros must be located in the header of the HTML document Once you have created the macro in the LibreOffice Basic IDE it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header If you want the macro to run automatically when the HTML document is opened choose Tools gt Customize gt Events See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros for more information Export Display warning When the LibreOffice Basic option See above is not selected the Display warning option becomes available If the Display warning option is selected then when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that LibreOffice Basic macros will be lost Export Print layout Select this option to export the print layout of the current document as well The HTML filte
282. ginal table naming each according to the type of music contained in it 1 Click on the Tables icon in the Database pane to see the existing tables 2 Right click on the CD Collection table icon Choose Copy from the pop up menu 3 Move the mouse pointer below this table right click and select Paste The Copy table dialog opens 4 Change the table name to Pop and click Next 5 Click the gt gt button to move all the fields from the left box to the right box and click Next 6 Since all the fields already have the proper Field type no changes should be needed However this is the time and place to make any changes if they are needed See Caution below for the reason why Click Create The new table is created Once tables have been created using the wizard and data has been entered editing them should be very limited Fields can be added or deleted but adding a field requires you to enter the data for that one field for every existing record with an entry for that field Deleting a field deletes all the data once contained in that field Changing the field A type of a field can lead to data being lost either partially or completely When creating a new table it pays to create the fields with the correct names length and format before you add any data Deleting a table removes all of the data contained in every field of the table Unless you are sure do not delete a table Creating tables in Design View Design View
283. gle column or row above Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 121 Working with sheets Like any other Calc element sheets can be inserted copied moved deleted and renamed Inserting new sheets There are several ways to insert a new sheet The fastest method is to click on the Add Sheet button to the right of the sheet tabs If you cannot see this button drag the separator bar next to the tabs towards the right to make space for it This button inserts one new sheet at that point without opening the Insert Sheet dialog Use one of the other methods to insert more than one sheet to rename the sheet at the same time or to insert the sheet somewhere else in the sequence The first step for these methods is to select the sheet that the new sheet will be inserted next to Then use any of the following options e Choose Insert gt Sheet from the menu bar e Right click on a sheet tab and choose Insert Sheet e Clickin an empty space at the end of the line of sheet tabs Click here to insert a new sheet Click here to insert a new sheet without opening the Insert Sheet and open the Insert Sheet dialog Figure 107 Creating a new sheet Each method will open the Insert Sheet dialog Figure 108 Here you can select whether the new sheet is to go before or after the selected sheet and how many sheets you want to insert If you are inserting only one sheet there is the opportunity to give the sheet a name Insert Shee
284. graph A more complex example would be Title followed by Author followed by Abstract followed by Heading 1 followed by Text Body By setting up these sequences you can avoid manually applying styles in most cases Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 77 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer Word Processing with LibreOffice What is Writer Writer is the word processor component of LibreOffice In addition to the usual features of a word processor spelling check thesaurus hyphenation autocorrect find and replace automatic generation of tables of contents and indexes mail merge and others Writer provides these important features Templates and styles see Chapter 3 Page layout methods including frames columns and tables Embedding or linking of graphics spreadsheets and other objects Built in drawing tools Master documents to group a collection of documents into a single document Change tracking during revisions Database integration including a bibliography database Export to PDF including bookmarks see Chapter 10 And many more These features are covered in detail in the Writer Guide The Writer interface The main Writer workspace is shown in Figure 64 The menus and toolbars are described in Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice Some other features of the Writer interface are covered in this chapter File Edit View gInsert Format Table Tools Window Help
285. graph Styles are active the paragraph style will be added to the list If Character Styles are active the character style will be added to the list Calc Drag a cell selection to the Styles and Formatting window to create cell styles Draw Impress Select and drag drawing objects to the Styles and Formatting window to create graphics styles Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 63 Copying and moving styles You can copy or move styles from one template or document into another template or document in two ways e Using the Template Management dialog e Loading styles from a template or document Using the Template Management dialog To copy or move styles using the Template Management dialog 1 Click File gt Templates gt Organize 2 Inthe Template Management dialog Figure 52 set the lists at the bottom to either Templates or Documents as needed The default is Templates on the left and Documents on the right Template Management C E 2 o207wG workingwithstyles_PHi Drawing Untited1 I HB Systems I phb et resentation 1 Presentation Backgrounds i Presentations QI US Sizes lt illi gt Address Book ra Templates nt Documents e emplates E Documents qd lecting Document as source of styles Figure 52 Choosing to copy styles from a document not a template
286. graphic object or press F2 or click on the Text icon when an object is selected you can add text to the graphic object This text then becomes part of the graphic object Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 191 A graphic object is not dynamic and does not behave like a text frame To keep text within the borders of the object you have to use paragraphs line breaks or smaller text size increase the object size or combine all four methods For more information about text see Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Gluepoints and connectors Gluepoints All Draw objects have gluepoints which normally are not displayed Gluepoints become visible when the Connectors icon le on the Drawing toolbar is selected Most objects have four gluepoints Figure 180 You can add more gluepoints and customize gluepoints using the Gluepoints toolbar Figure 181 Go to View gt Toolbars gt Gluepoints to open the toolbar lt a Figure 180 Gluepoints Glue WE H e g l Figure 181 Gluepoints toolbar Gluepoints are not the same as the selection handles of an object The handles are for moving or changing the shape of an object Gluepoints are used to fix or glue a connector to an object so that when the object moves the connector stays fixed to the object For a more detailed description on the use of gluepoints see Chapter 3 Working with Objects and Object Points and Chapter 9
287. gs Register the database for me and Open the database for editing Click Finish Name and save the database in the location of your choice Accessing a spreadsheet as a data source Accessing a spreadsheet is similar to accessing other databases 1 2 3 4 Choose File gt New gt Database Select Connect to an existing database Select Spreadsheet as the Database type Click Browse to locate the spreadsheet you want to access If the spreadsheet is password protected check the Password required box Click Next If the spreadsheet requires a user s name enter it If a password is also required check its box Click Next 234 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Using this method of accessing a spreadsheet you cannot change anything in the spreadsheet You can only view the contents of the spreadsheet run queries and create reports based upon the data already entered into the spreadsheet All changes in a spreadsheet must be made in the spreadsheet itself using Calc After modifying the spreadsheet and saving it you will see the changes in the database If you create and save an additional sheet in your spreadsheet the database will have a new table the next time you access it Registering odb databases Databases created by LibreOffice2 x or later are in the odb OpenDocument Base format Other programs can also produce databases in this format Registered a odb database is simple 1 Choose Tools
288. gt Options gt LibreOffice Base gt Databases 2 Under Registered databases click New 3 Browse to where the database is located 4 Make sure the registered name is correct 5 Click OK Sometimes when updating LibreOffice to a newer version your list of registered database files disappears When that happens you need to use these steps to register your database files with your latest version of LibreOffice Using data sources in LibreOffice Having registered the data source whether a spreadsheet text document external database or other accepted data source you can use it in other LibreOffice components including Writer and Calc Viewing data sources Open a document in Writer or Calc To view the data sources available press F4 or select View gt Data Sources from the pull down menu This brings up a list of registered databases which will include Bibliography and any other database registered such as the Automobile database created earlier in this chapter To view each database click on the to the left of the database s name see Figure 240 This brings up Tables and Queries Click on the next to Tables to view the individual tables created Now click on a table to see all the records held in it v a Automobile gt E Queries gt Tables gt amp Bibliography gt 1 Budget gt Sd Inventory Figure 240 Databases Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 235 Editing data sources Some dat
289. gt Spacing from the menu bar 2 Inthe Spacing dialog Figure 284 click the Category button and select Matrices in the drop down menu 3 Enter 0 for Column spacing and click OK Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 267 Cj Spacing ia Matrix OK Line spacing B Cancel Column spacing pa a Category Y Default Figure 284 Changing spacing in a matrix formula Changing the appearance of formulas Changing the font size This is one of the most common questions people ask about LibreOffice Math The answer is simple but not intuitive 1 Start the formula editor and choose Format gt Font size 2 Select a larger font size under Base size top most entry 3 Font Sizes Base size 12pt K Relative sizes Cancel Text 100 x Indexes 60 r Default me Functions 1 00 Operators i 00 F Limits 160 a Figure 285 Edit Base size top to make a formula bigger The result of this change is illustrated in Figure 286 Before m 3 1459 After mT 3 14159 Figure 286 Result of changing the base font size 268 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 The change in font size applies only to the current formula To change the font size generally click on the Default button and then OK A general change in the font size might for example make your work easier when you are preparing a big presentation and want all the formulas in it to have a base size of 28pt but do not forget to set
290. hance display accuracy in PDF viewers Font embedding may also be required by some printers Initial View page of PDF Options dialog On the Initial View page Figure 303 you can choose how the PDF opens by default in a PDF viewer The selections should be self explanatory If you have Complex Text Layout enabled in Tools gt Options gt Language settings gt Languages an additional selection is available under Continuous facing First page is left normally the first page is on the right when using the Continuous facing option eee e ana BO0 PDF Options General Initial View User Interface Links Security Panes Page layout Page only Default _ Bookmarks and page Single page _ Thumbnails and page Continuous Open on page 1 _ Continuous facing Magnification Default _ Fit in window O Fit width _ Fit visible oom factor 10 Figure 303 Initial View page of PDF Options dialog User Interface page of PDF Options dialog On the User Interface page Figure 304 you can choose more settings to control how a PDF viewer displays the file Some of these choices are particularly useful when you are creating a PDF to be used as a presentation or a kiosk type display Window options section e Resize window to initial page Causes the PDF viewer window to resize to fit the first page of the PDF Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 289 a ee eee ee L280 PDF Option
291. he Enter key Moving from sheet to sheet Each sheet in a spreadsheet is independent of the others though they can be linked with references from one sheet to another There are three ways to navigate between different sheets in a spreadsheet Using the Navigator When the Navigator is open Figure 102 double clicking on any of the listed sheets selects the sheet Using the keyboard Pressing Control Page Down moves one sheet to the right and pressing Control Page Up moves one sheet to the left Using the mouse Clicking on one of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet selects that sheet If you have a lot of sheets then some of the sheet tabs may be hidden behind the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen If this is the case then the four buttons at the left of the sheet tabs can move the tabs into view Figure 105 shows how to do this Move to the first sheet Move left one sheet Move right one sheet Move to the last sheet S j P Sheet tabs s Sheet 3 18 Figure 105 Sheet tab arrows Notice that the sheets here are not numbered in order Sheet numbering is arbitrary you can name a sheet as you wish The sheet tab arrows that appear in Figure 105 only appear if you have some sheet tabs that are hidden by the horizontal scrollbar Otherwise they will appear faded as in Figure 94 118 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5
292. he Options list e If you use a custom dictionary that includes words in all upper case and words with numbers for example AS 400 select Check uppercase words and Check words with numbers e Check special regions includes headers footers frames and tables when checking spelling Here you can also check which user defined custom dictionaries are active by default and add or remove dictionaries by clicking the New or Delete buttons LibreOffice has a spelling and grammar checker called Language Tool You can access the tool from Tools gt Spelling and Grammar Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 53 Choosing Internet options Use the Internet Options pages to define search engines and save proxy settings for use with LibreOffice If you are using a Mozilla browser Such as Firefox on Windows or Linux you can enable the Browser Plug in so you can open LibreOffice files in your browser print them save them and work with them in other ways If you are using a Unix or Linux based operating system including Mac OS X an additional page of E mail options is available where you can specify the e mail program to use when you send the current document as e mail See Figure 45 Under Windows the operating system s default e mail program is always used LibreOffice Load Save Language Settings LibreOffice Writer E mail program usr lib thunderbird thunderbird m LibreOffice Writer Web LibreOffice Base Charts I
293. he arrow pointing left promotes the list entry by one level for example from Outline 3 to Outline 2 the right arrow button demotes the list entry by one level the up and down arrow buttons move the list entry 5 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text to change font attributes tabs and so on If you are pasting text in a text box you can still use styles to quickly format the text Note that one and only one graphic style can be applied to the copied text To do that 1 Paste the text in the desired position 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select the desired graphic style 4 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text Creating bulleted and numbered lists The procedure to create a bulleted or numbered list is quite different depending on the type of text box used although the tools to manage the list and customize the appearance are the same Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 167 In text boxes created automatically by Impress called AutoLayout the outline styles available are by default bulleted lists while for normal text boxes an additional step is required to create a bulleted list Creating lists in AutoLayout text boxes Every text box included in the available layouts is already formatted as a bulleted list therefore to create a bulleted list the only necessary steps are 1 From the Layout pane choose a slide design that contains a text box Those are ea
294. he mail merge Select the document upon which to base the mail merge document 2 Select document type insert adess block Use the current document 4 Create salutation Create a new document Start from existing document Start from a template re ee a Figure 308 Select starting document Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 293 2 On the second page select E mail message and click Next Steps Select a document type 1 Select starting document what type of document do you want to create 2 Select document type Letter 3 Select address list 4 Create salutation E Mail Message Send e mail messages to a group of recipients The e mail messages c e mail messages can be personalized For each recipient Figure 309 Select document type 3 On the third page click the Select Address List button Select the required address list even if only one is shown and then click OK If the address list you need is not shown here you can click Add to find it and add it to the list Steps Insert address block 1 Select starting document 1 Select the address list containing the address data Select Address List vou want to use This data is needed to create the 2 Select document type address block 3 Select address list 4 Create salutation Select Address List Select an address list Click Add to select recipients From a different list IF you do not have an address list y
295. he mouse pointer over an edge of the Gallery window holding down the Control key and double clicking Repeat this procedure to dock the Gallery again The default themes are locked no items can be added to or deleted from these themes The locked themes are easily recognizable by right clicking on them the only available option in the pop up menu is Properties In a default installation only the My themes theme is customizable although new themes can be added as explained in Adding a new theme to the Gallery on page 304 Adding objects to the Gallery You may wish to add to the Gallery any images that you use frequently for example a company logo You can then very easily insert these graphics into a document later 302 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 You can add images only to My Theme or to any other theme that you have created these are indicated by a green icon in the list of themes You cannot add images to the built in themes indicated by an icon of another color Method 1 selecting a file 1 Right click on the desired theme and select Properties from the context menu 2 Inthe theme s Properties dialog go to the Files page and click the Find Files button ao as Backgrounds Bullets imal Homepac Delete Properties of My Theme Rename a General Files Froperties File type lt All Files gt O w eMo Files Figure 317 Gal
296. he position and size rotation and slant and corner radius properties of the drawing object 1 Right click on the drawing object and then choose Position and Size from the pop up menu The Position and Size dialog is displayed 2 Choose any properties as required Resizing a drawing object An object is resized in a similar way to an image Select the object click on one of the eight handles around it and drag it to its new position For a scaled resizing select one of the corner handles and keep the Shift key pressed while dragging the handle to its new position For more sophisticated control of the size of the object choose Format gt Object gt Position and Size from the menu bar Use the Position and Size dialog to set the width and height independently If the Keep ratio option is selected then the two dimensions change so that the proportion is maintained allowing for a scaled resizing Grouping drawing objects To group drawing objects 1 Select one object then hold down the Shift key and select the others you want to include in the group The bounding box expands to include all the selected objects 2 With the objects selected hover the mouse pointer over one of the objects and choose Format gt Group gt Group from the menu bar or right click and choose Group gt Group from the pop up menu Note You cannot include an embedded or linked graphic in a group with drawing objects Using Fontwork With Fontwork
297. header different on right and left pages 77 headers and footers Calc 146 Help Agent 35 Help system 10 Help Tips 35 hidden objects 195 hiding and showing data Calc 139 history of LibreOffice 370 378 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 HTML compatibility 50 HTML export 51 HTML Export Wizard 324 hyperlinks absolute 316 editing 319 inserting 316 relative 316 removing 319 hyphenation manual 97 icon size and style user interface 38 icons in menus 38 IDE 333 ignore font settings when importing HTML 51 image map 305 images adding from file 298 linking 299 scanned 300 importing files 372 importing numbers from an HTML page 50 Impress content boxes 163 font resizing 167 150 151 indents 89 indexes and bibliographies 103 Insert Bookmark dialog 107 Insert Picture dialog 298 installing and setting up 20 International Support 11 Internet options 54 J Java options 46 Java Runtime Environment JRE 212 JRE Java Runtime Environment 20 46 K keyboard shortcuts assigning 358 367 customizing 358 function keys 367 loading from a file 360 resetting to default values 360 saving to a file 360 keyboard shortcuts macros 345 L landscape pages 76 language settings 51 language support 19 layout methods 97 LGPL 14 libraries of macros 339 library containers 339 LibreOffice Basic 330 LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog 332 licensing of LibreOffice 13 371 limits to sum integral 265 Line and Filling t
298. hecker and other tools which are used consistently across the suite For example the drawing tools available in Writer are also found in Calc with similar but enhanced versions in Impress and Draw You do not need to Know which application was used to create a particular file For example you can open a Draw file from Writer Granularity Usually if you change an option it affects all components However LibreOffice options can be set at a component level or even at document level File compatibility In addition to its native OpenDocument formats LibreOffice includes PDF and Flash export capabilities as well as support for opening and saving files in many common formats including Microsoft Office HTML XML WordPerfect and Lotus 1 2 3 formats An extension included provides the ability to import and edit some PDF files No vendor lock in LibreOffice uses OpenDocument an XML eXtensible Markup Language file format developed as an industry standard by OASIS Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards These files can easily be unzipped and read by any text editor and their framework is open and published You have a voice Enhancements software fixes and release dates are community driven You can join the community and affect the course of the product you use You can read more about LibreOffice and The Document Foundation on their websites at http www libreoffice org and http www documentfoun
299. heet having a white tab You can choose colors for the different sheet tabs by right clicking the space choosing Tab Color and choosing a color from the palette Clicking on another sheet tab displays that sheet and its tab turns white You can also select multiple sheet tabs at once by holding down the Control key while you click the names 112 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Tab Color Insert Sheet Delete Sheet Rename Sheet Move Copy Sheet Select All Sheets Sheet Events Tab Col ors Sheet 1 3 E Default Figure 97 Choosing a tab color Status bar At the very bottom of the Calc window is the status bar which provides information about the spreadsheet and convenient ways to quickly change some of its features Most of the fields are similar to those in other components of LibreOffice see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Calc in the Calc Guide Sheet 1 3 Default INSRT SID amp Sheet Page Insert Selection Unsaved number style mode mode changes Figure 98 Left end of Calc status bar Sum 0 gt amp 100 I I Digital Cell or object Zoom Zoom signature information slider percent Figure 99 Right end of Calc status bar Opening and saving CSV files Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice includes instructions on starting new Calc documents opening existing documents and saving documents
300. heets at once Single sheet Click on the sheet tab for the sheet you want to select The active sheet becomes white Multiple contiguous sheets To select multiple contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first desired sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the sheet tab for the last desired sheet 3 Hold down the Shift key and click on the sheet tab All the tabs between these two sheets will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets Multiple non contiguous sheets To select multiple non contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the second sheet tab 3 Hold down the Control key and click on the sheet tab 4 Repeat as necessary The selected tabs will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets All sheets Right click any one of the sheet tabs and choose Select All Sheets from the pop up menu 120 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Working with columns and rows Inserting columns and rows Columns and rows can be inserted individually or in groups When you insert a single new column it is inserted to the eft of the highlighted column When you insert a single new row it is inserted above the highlighted row Cells in the new columns or rows are formatted like the corresponding cells in the column or row before or to the left of which the new column or row is inserted
301. hese functions 208 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Arranging aligning and distributing objects In Draw you can arrange align and distribute selected objects in relation to each other e Arrange the position of an object by moving it either forward or backward in relation to the order of objects e Align objects with respect to each other using Left Centered or Right for horizontal alignment and Top Center or Bottom for vertical alignment e Distribute objects so that the space between each of the objects is the same See Chapter 5 Combining Multiple Objects in the Draw Guide for more information on arranging and aligning objects in relation to each other Inserting and editing pictures Draw contains a number of functions for editing pictures or raster graphics bitmaps for example photos and scanned images This includes the import and export of graphics and the conversion of one graphic format to another graphic format Draw includes a large range of graphic filters so that it can read and display several graphic file formats It also includes several tools for working with raster graphics but does not have the same functionality as specialized graphic programs like Gimp or Adobe Photoshop See Chapter 6 Editing Pictures in the Draw Guide for more information You can add pictures from several sources e Directly from a scanner Insert gt Picture gt Scan e Images created by another program including photog
302. hift F2 Shows tip for a selected item Esc In LibreOffice Help goes up one level Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 365 Managing documents Shortcut Keys Result Ctrl F4 or Alt F4 Closes the current document Closes LibreOffice when the last open document is closed Ctrl O Launches the Open dialog to open a document Ctrl s Saves the current document If you are working on a previously unsaved file the shortcut launches the Save As dialog Ctrl N Creates a new document Shift Ctrl N Opens the Templates and Documents dialog Ctrl P Opens the Print dialog to print the document Ctrl Q Closes the application Del In the Save and Open dialogs deletes the selected files or folders Items can be retrieved from the Recycle Bin Trash In the Save and Open dialogs deletes the selected files or folders Shift Del Items are permanently deleted they can not be retrieved from the Recycle Bin In the Save and Open dialogs shows contents of the current Backspace directory s parent folder Navigating across LibreOffice Shortcut Keys Result F6 Selects next subwindow for example Menu bar Standard toolbar document view and so on Shift F6 Selects previous subwindow F10 Selects the first menu typically the File menu Shift F10 Opens the context menu Editing Shortcut Keys Result Ctrl X Cuts selected items Ctrl C Copies selected items
303. hose changes You can also immediately undo any automatic changes with Ctr Z AutoCorrect changes Automatic correction of typing errors replacement of straight quotation marks by curly custom quotes and starting cell content with an uppercase capital letter are controlled by Tools gt AutoCorrect Options Go to the Custom Quotes Options or Replace tabs to deactivate any of the features that you do not want On the Replace tab you can also delete unwanted word pairs and add new ones as required Autolnput When you are typing in a cell Calc automatically suggests matching input found in the same column To turn the Autolnput on and off set or remove the check mark in front of Tools gt Cell Contents gt Autolnput Automatic date conversion Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates To ensure that an entry that looks like a date is interpreted as text type an apostrophe at the beginning of the entry The apostrophe is not displayed in the cell Speeding up data entry Entering data into a spreadsheet can be very labor intensive but Calc provides several tools for removing some of the drudgery from input The most basic ability is to drag and drop the contents of one cell to another with a mouse Calc also includes several other tools for automating input especially of repetitive material They include the Fill tool selection lists and the ability to input information into multiple sheets of the same document Usi
304. ht have no header or footer while the other pages do With LibreOffice you can define the page style for the first page and specify the style for the following pages to be applied automatically As an example we can use the First Page and Default page styles that come with LibreOffice Figure 62 shows what we want to happen the first page is to be followed by the default page and all the following pages are to be in the Default page style Details are in Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Default Figure 62 Flow of page styles Dividing a document into chapters In a similar way you can divide a document into chapters Each chapter might start with the First Page style with the following pages using the Default page style as above At the end of the chapter insert a manual page break and specify the next page to have the First Page style to start the next chapter as shown in Figure 63 Default Default Figure 63 Dividing a document into chapters using page styles Changing page orientation within a document A Writer document can contain pages in more than one orientation A common scenario is to have a landscape page in the middle of a document whereas the other pages are in a portrait orientation This can also be done with page breaks and page styles 76 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Different headers on right and left pages Page styles can be set up to have the facing left and right pag
305. ial extensions repository http extensions libreoffice org See Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for more information on installing them Starting LibreOffice The most common way to launch any component of LibreOffice is by using the system menu the standard menu from which most applications are started On Windows it is called the Start menu On GNOME it is called the Applications menu On KDE it Is identified by the KDE logo On Mac OS X it is the Applications menu When LibreOffice was installed on your computer in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to your system menu The exact name and location of these menu entries depend on the operating system and graphical user interface Starting from an existing document You can start LibreOffice by double clicking the filename of a ODF OpenDocument Format document in a file manager such as Windows Explorer The appropriate component of LibreOffice will start and the document will be loaded 20 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Note for Windows users If you have associated Microsoft Office file types with LibreOffice then when you double click on a doc Word file it opens in Writer xls Excel files open in Calc and ppt PowerPoint files open in Impress If you did not associate the file types then when you double click on a Microsoft Word document it opens in Microsoft Word if Word is installed on your computer Excel files open in E
306. ic If you choose either of these options the next time you open this dialog you will see some extra choices under Language Settings as shown below These choices Searching in Japanese Asian Layout and Complex Text Layout are not discussed here 52 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 r Options Language Settings LibreOffice Load Save Seth Language Settings Languages Writing Aids searching in Japanese This is where you make settings concerning language Asian Layout with LibreOffice Complex Text Layout Figure 43 Extra pages available when enhanced language support options are selected Choose spelling options To choose the options for checking spelling click Language Settings gt Writing Aids In the Options section of the page Figure 44 choose the settings that are useful for you Writing ards Available language modules pell Spell Checker LanguageTool Libhyphen Hyphenator ee a en ee a E User defined dictionaries Edit standard AII oracle All soffice All X IgnoreAllList AN Options Check grammar as you type Check uppercase words Check words with numbers Check capitalizati a ee ee Figure 44 Choosing languages dictionaries and options for checking spelling Some considerations e f you do not want spelling checked while you type deselect Check spelling as you type and select Do not mark errors To find the second item scroll down in t
307. ice Writer Page Layout Options _ Print to file Create single print jobs for collated output Use only paper tray from printer preferences Figure 296 General print options Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper You can print multiple pages of a document on one sheet of paper To do this 1 Inthe Print dialog select the Page Layout tab Figure 297 eoo Print General LibreOffice Writer Options Layout Pages per sheet 2 297mm A4 G Pagesp Order left to right then down _ Draw a border around each page Brochure Page sides Include Back sides left pages Front sides right pages Print Cancel Figure 297 Printing multiple page per sheet of paper 2 In the Layout section select from the drop down list the number of pages to print per sheet The preview panel on the left of the Print dialog shows how the printed document will look When printing more than 2 pages per sheet you can choose the order in which they are printing across and down the paper LibreOffice Writer Page Layout Options Layout Pogespershet diel go Order F Draw a border aidea seal top to bottom then right 280 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 3 Inthe Page sides section select whether to print all pages or only some pages Click the Print button Selecting pages sheets slides to print In addition to printing a full document you can choose to print individual page
308. icolon Space C Merge delimiters Text delimiter Other options Quoted field as text CI Detect special numbers Fields _StandardStandard Standard Standard __ Standard StandardStandard 1 surname a SA x i gt eber Jean PO Box 640 Airlie Beach QLD 4802 Australia Figure 100 Text Import dialog with Comma selected as the separator and double quotation mark as the text delimiter Saving as a CSV file To save a spreadsheet as a comma separate value CSV file 1 Choose File gt Save As 114 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 2 Inthe File name box type a name for the file 3 Inthe File type list select Text CSV csv and click Save You may see the message box shown below Click Keep Current Format This document may contain Formatting or content that cannot be es saved in the Text CSV file format Do you want to save the document in this format anyway Use the latest ODF file format and be sure all formatting and content is saved correctly q Save in ODF Format Ask when not saving in ODF Format 4 Inthe Export text file dialog select the options you want and then click OK x Export Text File Field options C ok Character set oo peade Lek Textdetimiter OO e Save cell content as shown CO Quote all text cells CO Fixed column width Figure 101 Choosing options when exporting to Text CSV Navigating within spreadsheets Calc provides ma
309. ide a wide range of common commands and functions You can also modify these toolbars as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice In the Formatting toolbar the three boxes on the left are the Apply Style Font Name and Font Size lists They show the current setting for the selected cell or area The Apply Style list may not be visible by default Click the down arrow to the right of each box to open the list a Default Arial aiid a0 yl B f U Al Kk S Figure 95 Apply Style Font Name and Font Size lists Formula bar On the left hand side of the Formula bar is a small text box called the Name Box with a letter and number combination in it such as D7 This combination called the cell reference is the column letter and row number of the selected cell To the right of the Name box are the the Function Wizard Sum and Function buttons Clicking the Function Wizard button opens a dialog from which you can search through a list of available functions This can be very useful because it also shows how the functions are formatted Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 111 Al wl Fe Input line A e E O i Sum button Function button 2 Figure 96 Formula bar In a spreadsheet the term function covers much more than just mathematical functions See Chapter 7 in the Calc Guide for more details Clicking the Sum button inserts a formula into the current cell that totals the numbers in the cells ab
310. ide layout It is however unlikely that the predefined layouts will suit all your needs You may want to remove any elements that are not required or insert objects such as text and graphics Although Impress does not have the functionality to create new layouts it allows you to resize and move the layout elements It is also possible to add slide elements without being limited to the size and position of the layout boxes To resize a contents box click on the outer frame so that the 8 resizing handles are displayed To move it place the mouse cursor on the frame so that the cursor changes shape You can now click the left mouse button and drag the contents box to its new position on the slide To remove any unwanted elements do this 1 Click the element to highlight it The colored resizing handles show it is highlighted 2 Press the Delete key to remove it Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 163 Changes to any of the layouts included in Impress can only be made using View gt Normal which is the default Attempting any changes by modifying a slide master A although possible may result in unpredictable results and requires extra care as well as a certain amount of trial and error Adding text to a slide To add text to a slide that contains a text frame click on Click to add text in the text frame and then type your text The Outline styles are automatically applied to the text as you insert it You can change the outlin
311. ide master right click on the Slide in the Slides pane and select Rename master from the pop up menu When you are done close the Master View toolbar to return to normal slide editing mode Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 173 Applying a slide master In the Tasks Pane make sure the Master Pages section is showing Figure 158 To apply one of the slide masters to all slides in your presentation click on it in the list To apply a different slide master to one or more selected slides 1 Inthe Slide Pane select the slides you want to change 2 Inthe Tasks Pane right click on the slide master you want to apply to the selected slides and click Apply to Selected Slides on the pop up menu Loading additional slide masters Sometimes in the same set of slides you may need to mix multiple slide masters that may belong to different templates For example you may need a completely different layout for the first slide of the presentation or you may want to add to your presentation a slide from a different presentation based on a template available on the hard disk The Slide Design dialog Figure 160 makes this possible Access this dialog either from the menu bar Format gt Slide design or from the pop up menu that appears when right clicking on a slide in the Slides pane x Slide Design Select a slide design A Default W Exchange background page Load C Delete unused backgrounds Figure 160
312. ides Some sophisticated adjustments of the graphics are best done in an image manipulation program and the results brought into LibreOffice rather than using LibreOffice s inbuilt tools Managing the LibreOffice Gallery Graphics in the Gallery are grouped by themes such as Bullets Rulers and Backgrounds You can create other groups or themes and add your own pictures or find extensions containing more graphics The box on the left of the gallery window lists the available themes Click on a theme to see its contents displayed in the Gallery window You can display the Gallery in Icon View Figure 316 or Detailed View and you can hide or show the Gallery by clicking on the Hide button similar to the Hide button for the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window when they are docked New Theme EJE kgrounds confetti Backgrounds ROPERS Bullets i ava E l Homepage alga alge My Theme Trp relieve Rulers era kaline ker ira lig Sounds F Y Ft aOR kyr Control double click here to float Click to hide or show the Gallery Figure 316 Icon view of one theme in the Gallery By default the Gallery is docked above the workspace To expand the Gallery position the pointer over the line that divides it from the top of the workspace When the pointer changes to parallel lines with arrows click and drag downward The workspace resizes in response As with other docked windows you can float the Gallery by moving t
313. ients or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Hatching tab Modify the available hatching patterns or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Bitmaps tab Create simple bitmap patterns and import bitmaps to make them available on the Area tab Area Style Filling boxes Select the type of the fill of the selected object For more detailed settings use the Area icon Positioning options Rotate icon Rotate the selected object manually using the mouse to drag the object To Foreground icon Move the selected object in front of the text To Background icon Move the selected object behind the text Alignment icon Modify the alignment of the selected objects Bring to front icon Move the selected object in front of the others Send to back icon Move the selected object behind the others Change Anchor icon Choose between anchoring options e To Page The object keeps the same position in relation to the page margins It does not move as you add or delete text e To Paragraph The object is associated with a paragraph and moves with the paragraph It may be placed in the margin or another location e To Character The object is associated with a character but is not in the text sequence It moves with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location This method resembles anchoring to a paragraph e As Character The object is placed in the document like any character and moves with the paragraph as yo
314. ies fill color line type and weight anchoring and others of the drawing object using either the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 320 or the choices and dialogs reached by right clicking on the drawing object Set or change properties for drawing objects To set the properties for a drawing object before you draw it 1 On the Drawing toolbar Figure 319 click the Select tool 2 On the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 320 click on the icon for each property and select the value you want for that property 3 For more control or to define new attributes you can click on the Area or Line icons on the toolbar to display detailed dialogs i 0 00em 23 Mick v A kor mes vy Boeke SB 8 910111213 14 15 16 1 Line 5 Line Color 9 To Foreground 13 Alignment 2 Arrow Style 6 Area 10 To Background 14 Change Anchor 3 Line Style 7 Area Style Filling 11 Bring to Front 15 Ungroup 4 Line Width 8 Rotate 12 Send to Back 16 Group Figure 320 Drawing Object Properties toolbar The default you set applies to the current document and session It is not retained when you close the document or close Writer and it does not apply to any other document you open The defaults apply to all the drawing objects except text objects Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 307 To change the properties for an existing drawing object 1 Select the object 2 Continue as described above You can also specify t
315. if you Ctr click the link when the document is open in Writer you are taken directly to the cross referenced item However they also have major differences e The text in a hyperlink does not automatically update if you change the text of the linked item although you can change it manually but changed text does automatically update in a cross reference e When using a hyperlink you do not have a choice of the content of the link for example text or page number but when using a cross reference you have several choices including bookmarks e To hyperlink to an object such as a graphic and have the hyperlink show useful text such as Figure 6 you need to give such an object a useful name instead of a default name like Graphics6 or use the Hyperlink dialog to modify the visible text In contrast cross references to figures with captions automatically show useful text and you have a choice of several variations of the name e If you save a Writer document to HTML hyperlinks remain active but cross references do not Both remain active when the document is exported to PDF Using hyperlinks The easiest way to insert a hyperlink to another part of the same document is by using the Navigator 1 Open the document containing the items you want to cross reference 2 Open the Navigator by clicking its icon choosing View gt Navigator or pressing F5 3 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and choose Insert as Hyperlink 4
316. ile dragging with the cursor The ellipse or circle uses the Start point where you first clicked the mouse button as the center If you first press and hold down the Ctrl key and then click on one of the icons for Line Rectangle Ellipse or Text a standard sized object is drawn automatically in the work area the size shape and color are all standard values These attributes can be changed later if desired See the Draw Guide for more information Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 189 Drawing curves or polygons To draw a Curve or polygon click the Curve icon 2 on the Drawing toolbar Click on the triangle or arrow to the right of the icon to open the tools that are available Figure 178 and Table 5 Hovering the mouse pointer over this icon gives a tooltip of Curve If you open the floating toolbar the title is Lines as shown in Figure 178 Holding down the Shift key when drawing lines with the Curve or Polygon tools will restrict the angles between the lines to 45 or 90 degrees Lines x XbA tuhe Figure 178 Curves Lines toolbar Table 5 Curve and polygon tools Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Polygon Polygon 45 Freeform line Cuvefiled led filled filled ra Curve 7 Polygon GO Polygon 45 TEA Freeform line If you move the mouse cursor over one of the icons a tooltip pops up with a description of the function Curves Click
317. iliar with them you may think that master documents are unreliable or difficult to use See Chapter 13 Working with Master Documents in the Writer Guide Creating fill in forms A standard text document displays information a letter report or brochure for example Typically the reader may either edit everything or nothing in any way A form has sections that are not to be edited and other sections that are designed for the reader to make changes For example a questionnaire has an introduction and questions which do not change and spaces for the reader to enter answers Forms are used in three ways e To create a simple document for the recipient to complete such as a questionnaire sent out to a group of people who fill it in and return it e To link into a database or data source and allow the user to enter information Someone taking orders might enter the information for each order into a database using a form e To view information held in a database or data source A librarian might call up information about books Writer offers several ways to fill information into a form including check boxes option buttons text boxes pull down lists and spinners See Chapter 15 Using Forms in Writer in the Writer Guide Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 107 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc Using Spreadsheets in LibreOffice What is Calc Calc is the spreadsheet component
318. ill also appear Inserting a formula into a Writer document To insert a formula into a Writer document open the document and then choose Insert gt Object gt Formula from the menu bar The formula editor opens at the bottom of the Writer window and the floating Elements window appears You will also see a small box with a gray border in your document where the formula will be displayed as shown in Figure 273 Untitled 1 LibreOffice Writer File Edit View Format Tools Window Help ia ee paar RE i 10 11 i 12 13 a4 15 16 5 yes asb ded Pix gt a doe Ag a 48 Fa a b a b axb a b aab a b a b avb Figure 273 Equation Editor Elements window and location of resulting equation in Writer Tip If the Elements window is missing show it with View gt Elements When you are done entering the formula you can close the editor by pressing the Esc key or by clicking an area outside the formula in the main document A double click will open the editor again so you can edit the formula Formulas are inserted as OLE objects In a Writer document the formula is anchored as a character so it is embedded in the continuous text You can as with any other OLE object change the anchor and make the formula floating In Calc Impress and Draw documents formulas are embedded as floating OLE objects 256 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 If you frequently need to insert formulas it is advisable to add th
319. ill overwrite the last saved state of the file Password protection To protect a document from being viewable without a password use the option on the Save As dialog to enter a password Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 27 1 On the Save As dialog select the Save with password option and then click Save You will receive a prompt Figure 12 2 Type the same password in both fields and then click OK If the passwords match the document is saved password protected If the passwords do not match you receive an error message Close the message box to return to the Set Password dialog and enter the password again LibreOffice uses a very strong encryption mechanism that makes it almost A impossible to recover the contents of a document in case you lose the password 5 Set Password File encryption password Enter password to open Confirm password Note After a password has been set the document will only open with the password Should you lose the password there will be no way to recover the document Please also note that this password is case sensitive More Options OF Cancel Figure 12 Entering a password for a document Writer and Calc provide a second level of protection which allows a file to be viewed but not changed without a password that is the file opens in read only mode To protect a document from being changed 1 Choose More Options from the Set Password dialog 2 Enter th
320. in 332 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Running the macro Use Tools gt Macros gt Run Macro to open the Macro Selector dialog Select the newly created macro and click Run Macro Selector Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name gt amp My Macros 5 EnterMyName Run b LibreOffice Macros Main v MartinMacros odt b E Martin i Standard gt E Recorded Help Figure 335 Select a macro and click Run There are other methods to run a macro For example use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to open the LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog which contains a Run button as well Viewing and editing the macro You can view and edit the macro that was just created Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to open the LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog See Figure 333 Select the new macro and click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Integrated Development Environment Listing 4 Generated EnterMyname macro REM k k k k k kk BASIC k k k k k kk Sub Main End Sub sub EnterMyName rem 2 2 enn nnn ene ene eee ee ee eee eee rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem 2 2 ene nee nee eee eee ee rem get access to the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame dispatcher
321. in a book For this example use the macro in Listing 1 Listing 1 Simple macro that says hello Sub HelloMacro Print Hello End Sub 330 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 You must create a library and module to contain your macro this is covered in Macro organization on page 339 Use these steps to create a library to contain your macro 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to open the Macro dialog see Figure 333 and Figure 338 2 Click Organizer to open the Basic Macro Organizer dialog See Figure 339 3 Select the Libraries tab 4 Set the Location to My Macros amp Dialogs which is the default 5 Click New to open the New Library dialog Enter a library name such as TestLibrary and click OK 6 Select the Modules tab 7 Inthe Module list expand My Macros and select TestLibrary A module named Module1 already exists and can contain your macro You can click New to create another module in TestLibrary 8 Select the Module1 or the new module that you created and click Edit to open the Integrated Debugging Environment IDE 9 The IDE is a text editor for macros that allows you to edit and create macros Copy the macro into the IDE When a new module is created it contains a comment and an empty macro named Main that does nothing Listing 2 Contents of Module1 after it is created REM 2K OK OK OK K BASIC 2K OK OK OK X Sub Main End Sub Add the new macr
322. in formulas are not set by space characters in the code You need to use special markup to add spaces grave for a small space for a large space Another solution would be to add space characters between quotes to be considered as text Space markup at the end of a formula are ignored by default How do add limits to my sum integral The sum and int commands see complete list in appendix of Math Guide can optionally take the parameters from and to These are used for lower and upper limits respectively These parameters can be used singly or together Markup Result Ms sum from k 1 to n a_k ay gt II 1 int from to x f t dt or int_0 x f t dt f t dt or ff f t at o x int from Re f 3 h ee sum to infinity 24 n ye How do I write a derivative Writing derivatives essentially comes down to one trick Tell LibreOffice it s a fraction In other words you have to use the over command Combine this with either the letter d for a total derivative or the partial command for a partial derivative to achieve the effect of a derivative Note Notice that we have to use braces squiggly brackets to make the derivative Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 265 Markup Result df df d df over dx ay l l of partial f over partial y ay o f partial 2 f over partial t 2 a To write function names with primes as is usual in school no
323. ing items that are not consecutive To select nonconsecutive items as shown in Figure 72 using the mouse 1 Select the first piece of text 2 Hold down the Ctrl key and use the mouse to select the next piece of text 3 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text copy it delete it change the style or whatever Macintosh users substitute the Command key when instructions in this chapter say to use the Ctrl key Around the World in 80 Days Jules Verne Passepartout opened wide his eyes raised his aman held up his hands and seemed about to collapse so overcome was he with stupefied astonishment Iin ree days responded M But the trunks a Passer unconsdionsiy s oe his head from dal to left Figure 72 Selecting items that are not next to each other To select nonconsecutive items using the keyboard 1 Select the first piece of text For more information about keyboard selection of text see the topic Navigating and selecting with the keyboard in the Help 2 Press Shift F8 This puts Writer in Add mode The word ADD appears on the status bar replacing STD 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the start of the next piece of text to be selected Hold down the Shift key and select the next piece of text 4 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text Press Esc to exit from this mode Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 85
324. ion of the Shift key is reversed that is slanting will be restricted to 15 of movement unless the Shift key is pressed 198 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Figure 194 Shearing an object Editing objects To edit an object or change its attributes such as color or border width and so on the Line and Filling toolbar the Text Formatting toolbar or the context menu can be used More information on editing objects and changing attributes can be found in Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes in the Draw Guide Line and Filling toolbar If the Line and Filling toolbar is not displayed go to View gt Toolbars gt Line and Filling to open the toolbar Figure 195 The most common object attributes can be edited using this toolbar You can also open the Line dialog by clicking on the Line icon h and the Area dialog by clicking on the Area icon A for access to more formatting options Available tools on the Line and Filling toolbar are shown from left to right in Figure 196 Line and Filling Xx a OS Celo 0 00cm S E Gray 6 A Color e N c a g Figure 195 Line and Filling toolbar Styles and Formatting Line Arrow Style Line Style Line Width 0 Line Color Area Area Style Filling E Shadow E ImageMap Figure 196 Available tools on Line and Filling toolbar Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 199 Text Formatting toolbar When you select
325. ipboard Selection clipboard Copy content Edit gt Copy Contro C Select text table or object Paste content Edit gt Paste Contro V pastes Clicking the middle mouse button at the cursor position pastes at the mouse pointer position Pasting into another No effect on the clipboard The last marked selection is the document contents content of the selection clipboard Selection Transparency Determines the appearance of selected text or graphics which appear on a shaded background To make the shaded background more or less dark increase or decrease the Transparency setting If you prefer selected material to appear in reversed color typically white text on a black background deselect this option Print options On the LibreOffice Print page set the print options to suit your default printer and your most common printing method Reduce print data Settings for Printer Print to file Printer Reduce transparency Reduce gradients Reduce bitmaps L Convert colors to grayscale Printer warnings W Paper size V Transparency v Paper orientation Figure 25 Choosing general printing options to apply to all LibreOffice components Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 39 In the Printer warnings section near the bottom of the page you can choose whether to be warned if the paper size or orientation specified in your document does not match the paper size or orientation available for your p
326. is a more advanced method for creating a new table in which you directly enter information about each field in the table We will use this method for the tables of our database While the Field type and formatting are different in Design View the concepts are the same as in the Wizard The first table to be created is Fuel Its fields are FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType 1 Click Create Table in Design View 2 FuellD field Type FuellD as the first Field Name Press the Tab key to move to the Field Type column Select Integer INTEGER as the Field Type from the drop down list The default setting is Text VARCHAR A shortcut for selecting from the Field Type drop down list press the key for the first letter of the choice You can cycle through the choices for a given letter by repeatedly pressing that key a Change the Field Properties in the bottom section Change AutoValue from No to Yes 218 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 b Set FuellD as the Primary key Right click on the green triangle to the left of Fuel D Figure 216 and choose Primary Key from the menu This places a key icon in front of Fuel D _ Field Name Field Type Description og FuellD Integer INTEGER ES Cut Copy Delete Insert Rows Primary Key Field Properties AutoValue Yes m Auto increment state IDENTITY Length 10 Format example o rn Figure 216 Defining the prim
327. is adds the extra cells to the print range The page break lines no longer display on the screen The additional print range will print as a separate page even if both ranges are on the same sheet Removing a print range It may become necessary to remove a defined print range for example if the whole sheet needs to be printed later Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Remove This removes all defined print ranges on the sheet After the print range is removed the default page break lines will appear on the screen Editing a print range At any time you can directly edit the print range for example to remove or resize part of the print range Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Edit Selecting the page order details and scale To select the page order details and scale to be printed 1 Choose Format gt Page from the main menu 2 On the Page Style dialog Figure 133 select the Sheet tab 3 Make your selections and then click OK Page Order When a sheet will print on more than one page you can set the order in which pages print This is especially useful in a large document for example controlling the print order can save time if you have to collate the document a certain way The two available options are shown below Top to bottom then right Left to right then down Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 143 Page Style Default x D a Organizer Page Borders Background Header Foo
328. isting style first select that style and then right click and select New If you link styles then when you change the base style for example by changing the font from Times to Helvetica all the linked styles will change as well Sometimes this is exactly what you want other times you do not want the changes to apply to all the linked styles It pays to plan ahead The dialogs and choices are the same for defining new styles and for modifying existing styles See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Creating a new style from a selection You can create a new style by copying an existing manual format This new style applies only to this document it will not be saved in the template 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and choose the type of style you want to create 2 Inthe document select the item you want to save as a style 3 Inthe Styles and Formatting window click on the New Style from Selection icon 4 Inthe Create Style dialog type a name for the new style The list shows the names of existing custom styles of the selected type Click OK to save the new style Create Style Style name NewStyle OK oe My Style Figure 51 Naming a new style created from a selection Dragging and dropping to create a style You can drag and drop a text selection into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new style Writer Select some text and drag it to the Styles and Formatting window If Para
329. ity Effects Export sounds when slide advances 6 If Create title page was chosen in step 4 supply the information for it on the next page The title contains an author name e mail address and home page along with any additional information you want to include This page of the Wizard does not display if Create title page was not chosen Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 325 Information for the tite page Author Peter Hillier Brook E mail address Your homepage Additional information _ Link to a copy of the original presentation tee J cancel sse J next gt gt J create 7 Choose the navigation button style to use to move from one page to another If you do not choose any LibreOffice will create a text navigator HTML Export x min he bes ar select button style El Text only L E E E al l F r WWMWWOOMOO COQO00000 8 Select the color scheme for the web pages Available schemes include the document s existing scheme one based upon browser colors and a completely user defined scheme You can save a new scheme so that it will appear on the first page of the HTML export wizard 326 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 HTML Export Select color scheme Apply color scheme from document Use browser colors Use custom color scheme Hyperlink Hyperlink
330. ity The Document Foundation s mission Is to facilitate the evolution of the OpenOffice org Community into a new open independent and meritocratic organizational structure within the next few months An independent Foundation is a better match to the values of our contributors users and supporters and will enable a more effective efficient transparent and inclusive Community We will protect past investments by building on the solid achievements of our first decade encourage wide participation in the Community and co ordinate activity across the Community Some of our corporate supporters include Canonical The GNOME Foundation Google Novell and Red Hat Additonally over 450 000 people from nearly every part of the globe have joined this project with the idea of creating the best possible office suite that all can use This is the essence of an open source community With its open source software licence LibreOffice is key in the drive to provide an office suite that is available to anyone anywhere for commercial or personal use The software has been translated into many languages and runs on all major operating systems New functionality can be added in the form of extensions The LibreOffice community invites contributors in all areas including translators software developers graphic artists technical writers editors donors and end user support Whatever you do best you can make a difference in LibreOffice The C
331. ject has been placed in a frame for example with an associated caption it is not saved and does not appear in the HTML document instead the name of the frame appears Relative and absolute hyperlinks Hyperlinks stored within a file can be either relative or absolute A relative hyperlink says Here is how to get there starting from where you are now meaning from the folder in which your current document is saved while an absolute hyperlink says Here is how to get there no matter where you start from An absolute link will stop working if the target is moved A relative link will stop working if the start and target locations change relative to each other For instance if you have two spreadsheets in the same folder linked to each other and you move the entire folder to a new location an absolute hyperlink will break but a relative one will not To change the way that LibreOffice stores the hyperlinks in your file select Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt General and choose if you want URLs saved relatively when referencing the File System or the nternet or both Calc will always display an absolute hyperlink Don t be alarmed when it does this even when you have saved a relative hyperlink this absolute target address will be updated if you move the file Make sure that the folder structure on your computer is the same as the file structure on your web server if you save your links as relative to the file system and
332. king with individual slides Use this view to format and design and to add text graphics and animation effects To place a slide in the slide design area Normal view Figure 138 click the slide thumbnail in the Slides pane or double click it in the Navigator page 154 Outline view Outline view contains all the slides of the presentation in their numbered sequence It shows topic titles bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide in outline format Only the text contained in the default text boxes in each slide is shown so if your slide includes other text boxes or drawing objects the text in these objects is not displayed Slide names are also not included Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter EPresentation Template LibreOffice Design Team Version 2011 09 18 Production ai Default Slide Example Here is space for your content x Some hints Use the master pages being the basis for the default slides x It would be useful to add your presentation title to the footer Add it Figure 142 Outline view Use Outline view for the following purposes 1 Making changes in the text of a slide e Add and delete the text in a slide just as in the Normal view Move the paragraphs of text in the selected slide up or down by using the up and down arrow buttons Move Up or Move Down on the Text Formatting toolbar highlighted in Figure 143 Change the outline level for any of the paragra
333. l not to accidentally right click and thus undo actions you want to keep Using the Apply Style list After you have used a style at least once in a document the style name appears on the Apply Style list at the left hand end of the Formatting toolbar next to the Styles and Formatting icon You can open this list and click once on the style you want or you can use the up and down arrow keys to move through the list and then press Enter to apply the highlighted style Tp Select More at the bottom of the Apply Style list to open the Styles and Formatting window 60 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Untitled 1 LibreOffice Writer File Edit View Insert Format le agel ER Default Clear formatting Default Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 Text body More Figure 49 The Apply Style list on the Formatting toolbar Using keyboard shortcuts Some keyboard shortcuts for applying styles are predefined For example in Writer Control 0 applies the Text body style Control 1 applies the Heading 1 style and Control 2 applies the Heading 2 style You can modify these shortcuts and create your own see Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for instructions Manual formatting also called direct formatting overrides styles and you cannot get rid of the manual formatting by applying a style to it A To remove manual formatting select the text right click and choose Clear Direct Formatting from th
334. larious and highly embarrassing mistakes A mistake with Replace All might require a manual word by word search to fix Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 87 Find amp Replace Search for and Find All Replace with Replace or Replace All Match case Whole words only Current selection only Attributes Backwards Format Regular expressions Similarity search p No Format E Search for Styles Notes Figure 76 Expanded Find amp Replace dialog Inserting special characters A special character is one not found on a standard English keyboard For example g are all special characters To insert a special character 1 Place the cursor where you want the character to appear 2 Choose Insert gt Special Character to open the Special Characters dialog 3 Select the characters from any font or mixture of fonts you wish to insert in order then click OK The selected characters are shown in the lower left of the dialog As you select a character it is shown on the lower right along with its numerical code Different fonts include different special characters If you do not find a particular special character try changing the Font selection 88 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Special Characters Font Times New Roman vw Subset Basic Greek wt H IBM A Bere K BC ANONA A N ji js Ea 3 CG r Figure 77 The Special
335. lected menu click on the Menu or Modify buttons You can also add commands to a menu by clicking on the Add button These actions are described in the following sections Use the up and down arrows next to the Entries list to move the selected menu item to a different position 6 When you have finished making all your changes click OK not shown in illustration to save them Creating a new menu In the Menus page of the Customize dialog click New to display the New Menu dialog shown in Figure 348 1 Type a name for your new menu in the Menu name box 2 Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the new menu into the required position on the menu bar 3 Click OK to save The new menu now appears on the list of menus in the Customize dialog It will appear on the menu bar itself after you save your customizations After creating anew menu you need to add some commands to it as described in Adding a command to a menu on page 354 Menu Menu name New Menu 1 Menu position File Edit View Insert Format ak t Tools Window Help New Menu 1 Figure 348 Adding a new menu Modifying existing menus To modify an existing menu either user made or inbuilt select it in the Menu list and click the Menu button to drop down a list of modifications Move Rename Delete Not all of these modifications can be applied to all the entries in the Menu list For example Rename and Delete are not avail
336. lery Properties dialog 3 The Select path dialog not shown opens You can enter the path for the file s directory in the Path text box or you can navigate to locate the file s directory 4 Click the Select button to start the search A list of graphic files is then displayed in the Properties dialog You can use the File type drop down list to limit the files displayed 5 To add all of the files shown in the list click Add All Otherwise select the files to add and then click Add Hold down either the Shift key or the Control key while you click on the files Method 2 drag and drop You can drag and drop an image into the Gallery from a document 1 Open the document containing an image you want to add to the Gallery and display the Gallery theme to which you want to add tt 2 Position the mouse pointer above the image without clicking 3 Ifthe mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol the image refers to a hyperlink In this case press the Alt key while you click the image to select it without activating the link If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol you can simply click the image to select it Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 303 4 Once the image is selected evident from the colored selection handles around it release the mouse button Click again on the image keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds Without releasing the mouse button drag the image into the Galler
337. lication help for more information Main menu bar Standard toolbar Line and filling toolbar File Edit Yiew nsert Format Tools Modify Window Helpa x B0 p8 3E 2228 0 a amp s co joo l cry 2 A color wall i Pages a a eile eet EELLEE ae ene Lekha Wlcicl naair rian i racea Be vsinesssdfissseses p rrna asses fies 0 ERs 1 Workspace area Page pane BB reeTA 2 4 4 6 e B k Y OGe oO e eB T gia ada IG x 000 Side 1 1 Default To ar D she Status bar Drawing toolbar Figure 164 LibreOffice Draw workspace 182 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Draw workspace The main components of the Draw workspace are shown in Figure 164 The large area in the center of the window is where you make the drawings You can surround the drawing area with toolbars and information areas The number and position of the visible tools vary with the task in hand and user preferences Therefore your setup may look different For example many users put the main Drawing toolbar on the left hand side of the workspace and not at the bottom as shown in Figure 164 You can split drawings in Draw over several pages Multi page drawings are used mainly for presentations The Pages pane on the left side of the Draw window in Figure 164 gives an overview of the pages that you create If the Pages pane is not visible on your setup you can enable it from the View menu View gt Page Pane To make changes to the p
338. links to move from slide to slide e Standard HTML with frames one page with a navigation bar on the left hand side uses slide title as navigation links Click on links to display pages in right hand side e Automatic one page for each slide with each page set with the Refresh meta tag so a browser automatically cycles from one page to the next e WebCast generates an ASP or Perl application to display the slides Unfortunately LibreOffice has no direct support for PHP yet 324 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 ol r fe Standard HIML format Standard HTML with frames Automatic WebCast 5 Decide how the images will be saved PNG GIF or JPG and what resolution to use When choosing a resolution consider what the majority of your viewers might be using If you specify a high resolution then a viewer with a medium resolution monitor will have to scroll sideways to see the entire slide which isprobably not desirable pei EAR Save graphics ag __ Monitor resolution PNG Low resolution 640x480 pixels O GIF Medium resolution 800x600 pixels IPG High resolution 1024x768 pixels 75 Qual
339. ll under FuellD in the query table 2 Click the Run Query icon in the Query Design toolbar Wo E G Figure 253 Query Design toolbar Figure 254 contains the Fuel table with my entries and the query results based upon the Fuel table the query results are in Figure 255 Friday May 25 2007 16 00 14 690 Friday May 25 2007 7 00 6 430 Saturday May 26 2007 20 00 19 570 Saturday May 26 2007 16 00 15 150 Saturday May 26 2007 16 00 15 144 lt AutoFielc Figure 254 Fuel table FuellD Odometer FuekKuantity 1 TT8 7 6 430 2 1032 3 19 570 3 1239 4 15 150 4 lt AutoFie Figure 255 Query of Fuel table Step 5 Save and close the query Since this query contains the final odometer reading for our calculations name it End Reading when saving it Then close the query Step 6 Create the query to calculate the fuel economy 1 Click Create Query in Design View to open a new query 2 Add the Fuel table to the query just as you did in step 2 Add tables But do not close the Add Tables window Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 245 3 Add the End Reading query to this query a Click Queries to get the list of queries in the database Figure 256 b Click End Reading c Click Add and then click Close Add Table or Query Tables Queries Add E Fuel Economy Close E Query_CD Collection E Vacation Fuel Purchases Help Figure 256 Selecting queries to add to another query Step
340. ls gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Colors See Chapter 2 for more information You can also use the Background tab of the Format Cells dialog See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for details Autoformatting cells and sheets You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly apply a set of cell formats to a sheet or a selected cell range 1 Select the cells including the column and row headers that you want to format 2 Choose Format gt AutoFormat The AutoFormat feature can only be applied if the selected set of cells contains at least 3 columns and 3 rows and also includes the column and row headers 3 To select which properties number format font alignment borders pattern autofit width and height to include in an AutoFormat click More Select or deselect the required options 4 Click OK If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents choose View gt Value Highlighting from the menu bar Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 137 AutoFormat X Format 3D Black 1 Black 2 Blue Brown Currency Currency 3D Currency Gray Currency Lavender Formatting Number format Font Alignment Pe rs Cancel Help Delete More 2 Rename z te Borders Pattern AutoFit width and height Figure 130 Choosing an AutoFormat Defining a new AutoFormat You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all spreadsheets 1 2
341. lt frames for slide titles and content Before working on the slide master make sure that the Styles and Formatting dialog is open To select the slide master for modification 1 Select View gt Master gt Slide Master from the menu bar This unlocks the properties of the slide master so you can edit it 2 Click Master Pages in the Tasks pane This gives you access to the slide masters 3 Click on the slide master you want to modify among the ones available 4 Make changes as required then click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar For details see Chapter 2 Using Slide Masters Styles and Templates of the Impress Guide 5 Save the file before continuing Any changes made to one slide when in Master View mode will appear on all slides using this slide master Always make sure you close Master View and return to Normal view before working on any of the presentation slides Select View gt Normal A from the menu bar or clicking Close Master View in the Master View toolbar to return to the normal slide view The changes made to one of the slides in Normal view for example changes to the bullet point style the color of the title area and so on will not be overridden by subsequent changes to the slide master There are cases however where it is desirable to revert a manually modified element of the slide to the style defined in the slide master to do that select that element and choose Format gt D
342. lts that you are looking for Refer to Chapter 7 in the Calc Guide for more information Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 141 Analyzing data Calc includes several tools to help you analyze the information in your spreadsheets ranging from features for copying and reusing data to creating subtotals automatically to varying information to help you find the answers you need These tools are divided between the Tools and Data menus One of the most useful of these tools is the PivotTable called DataPilot in Calc 3 3 This is a tool for combining comparing and analyzing large amounts of data easily Using the PivotTable you can view different summaries of the source data display the details of areas of interest and create reports whether you are a beginner an intermediate or advanced user Refer to Chapter 8 in the Calc Guide for more information Other analysis options include Consolidation Data gt Consolidate provides a way to combine data from two or more ranges of cells into a new range while running one of several functions Such as Sum or Average on the data Subtotals Use Data gt Subtotals to calculate subtotals for up to three columns Scenarios Tools gt Scenarios opens a dialog for testing what if questions such as different interest rates on a loan Goal seek Use Tools gt Goal Seek if you know the result you want but need to discover what values will produce this result Solver Tools gt
343. ly You can choose whatever fonts you like but if you are exchanging documents with someone else you should choose fonts that are present on your colleague s computer Changing the color Use the command color to change the color of a subset of a formula color red ABC gives ABC_ Choose from 8 colors white black cyan magenta red blue green yellow You may give a color to a subset of a formula if it is gathered between or other parentheses For instance A B color green C D Egives ABCDE If several colors are used the one the more inside the formula is applied as with this example color blue A B color yellow C D gives ABCD It is not possible to select a background color it is always transparent in Math The background color of the whole formula is then the same as the background of the document or frame in a text document for instance In Writer you can use object properties right click gt Object to choose a background color for the whole formula see Background borders and size on page 273 270 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Formulas in Writer documents Numbering equations Equation numbering is one of Writer s best hidden features The steps are simple but obscure 1 Start a new line 2 Type fn and then press F3 The fn is replaced by a numbered formula E mc 2 Now you can double click on the formula to edit it You can reference an equation as shown in Equation 2
344. make other enhancements you need to use functions in the Task pane See the Impress Guide for details on how to use all of these features Adding and formatting text Many of your slides are likely to contain some text This section gives you some guidelines on how to add text and how to change its appearance Text in slides is contained in text boxes For more information on adding and formatting text see Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Text in the Impress Guide There are two types of text boxes that you can add to a slide e Choose a predefined layout from the Layouts section of the Tasks pane and do not select any special contents type These text boxes are called AutoLayout text boxes e Create a text box using the text tool T in the Drawing toolbar or the Text toolbar Using AutoLayout text boxes Make sure Normal view is selected 1 Click in the text box that reads Click to add text 2 Type or paste your text in the text box Using text boxes created from the text tool Make sure Normal view is selected 1 Click on the Text icon T on the Drawing toolbar or press F2 If the Drawing toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Drawing 2 Click and drag to draw a box for the text on the slide Do not worry about the vertical size and position as the text box will expand if needed as you type 3 Release the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is now in edit mode
345. mat or has been saved to other formats including PDF Click the Options button to open a separate dialog with specific choices Figure 31 Macro security Click the Macro Security button to open the Macro Security dialog not shown here where you can adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted sources Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 43 Security options and warnings The following options are on the Security options and warnings dialog Figure 31 Remove personal information on saving Select this option to always remove user data from the file properties when saving the file To manually remove personal information from specific documents deselect this option and then use the Delete button under File gt Properties gt General Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks The default behavior in LibreOffice is to Ctrl click on a hyperlink to open the linked document Many people find creation and editing of documents easier when accidental clicks on links do not activate the links To set LibreOffice to activate hyperlinks using an ordinary click deselect this option The other options on this dialog should be self explanatory Secunty options and wamings Security warnings Warn if document contains recorded changes versions hidden information or notes When saving or sending When signing T L When printing When creating PDF files Security options Remove personal information on
346. mbers of the group If you click on one member of the group the whole group is selected You can edit an individual member of a group without ungrouping or breaking the group Select the group and go to Modify gt Enter Group or right click and select Enter Group from the context menu or double click on the group When you have finished editing an individual member of a group go to Modify gt Exit Group or right click and select Exit Group from the context menu Ungrouping To ungroup or break apart a group of objects select the group then go to Modify gt Ungroup on the main menu bar or right click and select Ungroup from the context menu or use the keyboard shortcut Ctr Alt Shift G Combining objects Combining objects is a permanent merging of objects that creates a new object The original objects are no longer available as individual entities and cannot be edited as individual objects Any editing of a combined object affects all the objects that were used when combination was carried out Select several objects then go to Modify gt Combine on the main menu bar or right click on the objects and select Combine from the context menu or use the keyboard shortcut Ctr Shift K After you have selected your objects the Merge Subtract and Intersect functions also become available so that you can create a new object from your selected objects See Chapter 5 Combining Multiple Objects in the Draw Guide for more information on t
347. me drop down list select Collection D 4 Check Auto value if it is not already checked 5 Click Next A primary key uniquely identifies an item or record in the table For example you might know two people called Randy Herring or three people living at the same address and the database needs to distinguish between them The simplest method is to assign a unique number to each one number the first person 1 the second 2 and so on Each entry has one number and every number is different so it is easy to say record ID 172 This is the option chosen here Collection D is just a number assigned automatically by Base to each record of this table Step 4 Create the table 1 If desired rename the table at this point If you rename it make the name meaningful to you For this example make no changes 2 Leave the option nsert data immediately checked 3 Click Finish to complete the table wizard Close the window created by the table wizard You are now back to the main window of the database with the listing of the tables queries forms and reports Notice that a table named CD Collection is now listed in the Tables portion of the window Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 217 Creating a table by copying an existing table If you have a large collection of music you might want to create a table for each type of music you have Rather than creating each table from the wizard you can make copies of the ori
348. ment You can however set a custom template to be the default You can reset the default later if you choose You may know that Microsoft Word employs a normal docm file for its default template and how to regenerate it LibreOffice does not have a similar default template file the factory defaults are embedded within the software Setting a custom template as the default You can set any template to be the default as long as it is in one of the folders displayed in the Template Management dialog To set a custom template as the default 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Organize The Template Management dialog opens 2 Inthe box on the left select the folder containing the template that you want to set as the default then select the template 3 Click the Commands button and choose Set As Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from this template Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 71 80 0 Template Management G My Templates 0103G 34 StylesAndTemplate Glise LO_3_4 chapter template O210WG34 WorkingWithTemp test Commands Presentation Backgrounds Delete Presentations Edit Import Template Export Template Printer Settings Update Set As Default Template Address Book Templates Documents File Figure 60 Setting a default te
349. ment From Template 4 Open Save Commands Save AS Document as E mail av Edit File Export Directly as PDF Print File Directly a gt Pe et Save In LibreO FFice Writer IAI ASO SOD Description Loads a document specified by an entered URL You can type a new URL or select one from the list LibreOffice automatically converts file paths into URL notation Figure 343 LibreOffice Customize dialog Event In LibreOffice when something happens we say that an event occurred For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved LibreOffice allows events to cause a macro to be called the macro is then called an event handler Full coverage of event handlers is well beyond the scope of this document but a little knowledge can accomplish much Be careful when you configure an event handler For example assume that you write an event handler that is called every time that a key is pressed but you make a mistake so the event is not properly handled One possible result is that your event handler will consume all key presses forcing you to forcibly terminate LibreOffice A Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Events tab see Figure 344 The events in the Customize dialog are related to the entire application and specific documents Use the Save In box to choose LibreOffice or a specific document 346
350. move personal and some other data from a file go to File gt Properties On the General tab uncheck Apply user data and then click the Reset button This removes any names in the created and modified fields deletes the modification and printing dates and resets the editing time to zero the creation date to the current date and time and the version number to 1 To remove version information either a go to File gt Versions select the versions from the list and click Delete or b use File gt Save As and save the file with a different name 296 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork Introduction You can add graphic and image files including photos drawings scanned images and others to LibreOffice documents LibreOffice can import various vector line drawing and raster bitmap file formats The most commonly used graphic formats are GIF JPG PNG and BMP See Appendix B for a full list of the graphic formats LibreOffice can import Graphics in LibreOffice are of three basic types e Image files such as photos drawings and scanned images e Diagrams created using LibreOffice s drawing tools e Charts created using LibreOffice s Chart component This chapter covers images and diagrams More detailed descriptions on working with drawing tools can be found in the Draw Guide and Impress Guide Instructions on how to create char
351. mplate using the Template Management dialog Although many important settings can be changed in the Options dialog See Chapter 2 for example default fonts and page size more advanced settings Such as page margins can only be changed by replacing the default template with a new one Resetting the default template To re enable LibreOffice s default template for a document type as the default 1 Inthe Template Management dialog click any folder in the box on the left 2 Click the Commands button and choose Reset Default Template from the drop down menu This command does not appear unless a custom template has previously been set as the default as described in the previous section The next time that you create a document by choosing File gt New the document will be created from the default template for the document type Associating a document with a different template At times you might want to associate a document with a different template or perhaps you are working with a document that did not start from a template One of the major advantages of using templates is the ease of updating styles in more than one document as described on page 69 If you update styles by loading a new set of styles from a different template as described on page 65 the document has no association with the template from which the styles were loaded so you cannot use this method What you need to do is associate the document with the different
352. mponent 3 Choose the shortcut keys you want to assign a style to In this example we have chosen Ctrl 9 This enables the Modify button 4 Inthe Functions section at the bottom of the dialog scroll down in the Category list to Styles Click the expansion symbol usually a sign or triangle to expand the list of styles 5 Choose the category of style This example uses a paragraph style but you can also choose character styles and others The Function list will display the names of the available styles for the selected category The example shows some of LibreOffice s predefined styles 6 To assign Ctr 9 to be the shortcut key combination for the List 1 style select List 1 in the Function list and then click Modify Ctr 9 now appears in the Keys list on the right and List 1 appears next to Ctr 9 in the Shortcut keys box at the top 7 Make any other required changes and then click OK to save these settings and close the dialog Saving changes to a file Changes to the shortcut key assignments can be saved in a keyboard configuration file for use ata later time thus permitting you to create and apply different configurations as the need arises To save keyboard shortcuts to a file 1 After making your keyboard shortcut assignments click the Save button at the right of the Customize dialog Figure 354 2 Inthe Save Keyboard Configuration dialog select All files from the Save as Type list 3 Next enter a name for th
353. n Examples of style use on page 76 LibreOffice supports the following types of styles e Page styles include margins headers and footers borders and backgrounds In Calc page styles also include the sequence for printing sheets e Paragraph styles control all aspects of a paragraph s appearance such as text alignment tab stops line spacing and borders and can include character formatting e Character styles affect selected text within a paragraph such as the font and size of text or bold and italic formats e Frame styles are used to format graphic and text frames including wrapping type borders backgrounds and columns e Numbering styles apply similar alignment numbering or bullet characters and fonts to numbered or bulleted lists e Cell styles include fonts alignment borders background number formats for example currency date number and cell protection 58 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 e Graphics styles in drawings and presentations include line area shadowing transparency font connectors dimensioning and other attributes e Presentation styles include attributes for font indents spacing alignment and tabs Different styles are available in the various components of LibreOffice as listed in Table 2 LibreOffice comes with many predefined styles You can use the styles as provided modify them or create new styles as described in this chapter Table 2 Styles available in Lib
354. n and file name of the PDF to be created and click Save to export the file General page of PDF Options dialog On the General page you can choose which pages to include in the PDF the type of compression to use for images which affects the quality of images in the PDF and other options Range section e All Exports the entire document to PDF e Pages To export a range of pages use the format 3 6 pages 3 to 6 To export single pages use the format 7 9 11 pages 7 9 and 11 You can also export a combination of page ranges and single pages by using a format like 3 6 8 10 12 e Selection Exports all the selected material Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 287 BOO PDF Options Initial View User Interface Links Security Range General es All Embed OpenDocument file a Makes this PDF easily editable in LibreOffice C Selection PDF A la images Tagged PDF i Lossless compression Create PDF form JPEG compression Submit format FDI Quality 90 Allow duplicate field names Reduce image resolution 300 DPI w Export bookmarks Export comments _ Export automatically inserted blank pages Embed standard fonts Export Cancel Help Figure 302 General page of PDF Options dialog Images section e Lossless compression Images are stored without any loss of quality Tends to make large files when used with photographs R
355. n of the wizard you can specify the name and location for saving the template The default location is your user templates directory but you can choose a different location if you prefer 4 Finally you have the option of creating a new document from your template immediately or manually changing the template For future documents you can re use the template created by the wizard just as you would use any other template Editing a template You can edit a template s styles and content and then if you wish you can reapply the template s styles to documents that were created from that template Note that you can only reapply styles You cannot reapply content To edit a template 1 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Edit A standard file browser window opens 2 Select and open the template that you want to edit 3 Edit the template just as you would any other document To save your changes choose File gt Save from the main menu Updating a document from a changed template The next time you open a document that was created from the changed template the following message appears _ The template chapter template on which this document ts based has been modified Do you want to update style based formattings according te the modified template Update Styles Keep Old Styles Help Figure 58 Update styles message Click Update Styles to apply the template s changed styles to the
356. n the Calc Guide for more information Editing data Editing data is done in much the same way as entering data The first step is to select the cell containing the data to be edited 132 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Removing data from a cell Data can be removed deleted from a cell in several ways Removing data only The data alone can be removed from a cell without removing any of the formatting of the cell Click in the cell to select it and then press the Delete key Removing data and formatting The data and the formatting can be removed from a cell at the same time Press the Backspace key or right click and choose Delete Contents or use Edit gt Delete Contents to open the Delete Contents dialog From this dialog the different aspects of the cell can be deleted To delete everything in a cell contents and format check Delete all Delete Contents selection O a TEx Cancel Numbers Date amp time Formulas Notes E Formats EO Objects Figure 123 Delete Contents dialog Replacing all the data in a cell To remove data and insert new data simply type over the old data The new data will retain the original formatting Changing part of the data in a cell Sometimes it is necessary to change the contents of cell without removing all of the contents for example if the phrase Sales in Qtr 2 is in a cell and it needs to be changed to Sales rose in Qtr 2 It is often useful to do
357. n the new icon where you want it Click OK and then click Close Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 357 Options LibreOffice Writer Print 4 LibreOffice t Load Save Language Settings LibreOffice Writer General View Formatting Aids Grid Basic Fonts Western Changes Compatibility AutoCaption Mail Merge E mail 4 LibreOfice Writer Web i LibreOffice Base Charts Internet Contents Pictures and objects Form controls Page background _ Print text in black _ Hidden text Text placeholder Pages Right Other _ Print automatically inserted blank pages a Paper tray from printer settings Fax Fax Figure 352 Setting up LibreOffice for sending faxes Left pages Brochure Comments None O Comments only C End of document gt End of page pages Your toolbar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax Category Commands Application Templates View Edit Options BASIC Insert Documents Format Navigate Controls Table Drawing Graphic ieee Print Print File Directly FH Printer Settings El Properties iS Reload I save save AS illl Recheck Document G LT Figure 353 Adding a Send Fax command to a toolbar Assigning shortcut keys In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in Appendix A you can define you
358. nctionality with extensions An extension is a package that can be installed into LibreOffice to add new functionality Several popular extensions are shipped bundled with LibreOffice and are installed with the program Others can be downloaded from various websites The official extension repository is located at hittp extensions libreoffice org These extensions are free of charge Some extensions from other sources are free of charge others are available for a fee Check the descriptions to see what licenses and fees apply to the ones that interest you Installing extensions To install an extension follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Download an extension and save it anywhere on your computer In LibreOffice select Tools gt Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog Figure 355 click Add A file browser window opens Find and select the extension you want to install and click Open The extension begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement When the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog Manager and click the Get more extensions online link To install a shared extension you will need write access to the LibreOffice installation directory Extension Manager English spelling dictionaries hyphenation rules thesaurus and gram 2011 12 05 t French spelling dictionary hyphenation rules and thes
359. nd select the file from the nsert Picture dialog that opens To see a preview of the picture check Preview at the bottom of the Insert Picture dialog e Move the picture to the desired location The picture will resize itself to fill the area of the contents box Follow the directions in the Caution note below when manually resizing a graphic When resizing a graphic right click the picture Select Position and Size from the context menu and make sure that Keep ratio is selected Then adjust the height or width to the size you need As you adjust one dimension both dimensions will change Failure to do so will cause the picture to become distorted Remember also that resizing a bitmap image will reduce its quality it is better to create an image of the desired size outside of Impress A Adding tables For displaying tabular data you can insert basic tables directly into your slides by choosing the Table contents type It is also possible to add a table outside a contents box in a number of ways e Go to Insert gt Table on the main menu bar e Click on the Table icon HA on the main toolbar or table toolbar e After inserting a new slide click the Insert Table icon Figure 153 e Select a style option from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane e Alternatively click on the Table Design icon on the table toolbar to open the Table Design section of the Tasks pane and then select a style The first three me
360. ner style E styl Rounded a AN N Figure 201 Line properties dialog Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 201 Arrows arrowheads and line endings Arrows arrowheads and other line endings are usually referred to as arrows and can be treated the same as lines when editing and changing attributes Select a line and click on the Arrow Style icon from the Line and Filling toolbar to open the Arrowheads menu Figure 202 Several types of arrowheads are available Each end of a line can have a different arrowhead or no arrowhead Arrowheads are only applicable to lines and they have no effect on the border of an object TAAT ee Tian soWVert Tav f a Figure 202 Arrowheads menu Formatting area fill The term area fill refers to the inside of an object which can be a uniform color gradient hatching pattern or bitmap Figure 203 An area fill can be made partly or wholly transparent In most cases you will choose one of the standard fill options which are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar You can also define your own area fills For more information on formatting area fill see Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes in the Draw Guide Figure 203 Different types of area fill 202 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Using styles Suppose that you want to apply the same area fill line thickness and border to a set of objects This repetitive process can be greatly simplified by the
361. ng Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies of the Writer Guide describes in detail all the customizations you can choose Creating indexes and bibliographies Indexes and bibliographies work in a similar way to tables of contents Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies in the Writer Guide describes the process in detail In addition to alphabetical indexes other types of indexes supplied with Writer include those for illustrations tables and objects and you can even create a user defined index For example you might want an index containing only the scientific names of species mentioned in the text anda separate index containing only the common names of species Before creating some types of indexes you first need to create index entries embedded in your Writer document Working with graphics Graphics in Writer are of three basic types e Image files including photos drawings scanned images and others e Diagrams created using LibreOffice s drawing tools e Charts created using LibreOffice s Chart component See Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork in this book and Chapter 8 Working with Graphics in the Writer Guide Printing See Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing in this book and Chapter 5 Printing Exporting Faxing and E mailing in the Writer Guide for details on previewing pages before printing selecting print options printing in black and white on a color p
362. ng automatic wrapping To set text to wrap at the end of the cell right click on the cell and select Format Cells or choose Format gt Cells from the menu bar or press Ctr 1 On the Alignment tab Figure 124 under Properties select Wrap text automatically and click OK The results are shown in Figure 125 Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Text alignment Horizontal Indent Vertical lt Default ive Opt Default el it Text orientation Degrees _ Vertically stacked 5 i er gt ES ijas 0 i w ABCD c y Reference edge 1 oe mee Properties Figure 124 Format Cells gt Alignment dialog This cell is not set to wrap text automatically So they text will just keep going and goir This cell is set ta wrap text automatically The cell will fit more text without getting wider Figure 125 Automatic text wrap 134 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Using manual line breaks To insert a manual line break while typing in a cell press Ctrl Enter This method does not work with the cursor in the input line When editing text first double click the cell then single click at the position where you want the line break When a manual line break is entered the cell width does not change Figure 126 shows the results of using two manual line breaks after the first line of text
363. ng the Fill tool on cells At its simplest the Fill tool is a way to duplicate existing content Start by selecting the cell to copy then drag the mouse in any direction or hold down the Shift key and click in the last cell you want to fill and then choose Edit gt Fill and the direction in which you want to copy Up Down Left or Right Choices that are not available are grayed out but you can still choose the opposite direction from what you intend which could cause you to overwrite cells accidentally A shortcut way to fill cells is to grab the handle in the lower right hand corner of the cell and drag it in the direction you want to fill If the cell contains a number the number will fill in series If the cell contains text the same text will fill in the direction you chose Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 129 Figure 117 Using the Fill tool A Ciriginal A Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Using a fill series A more complex use of the Fill tool is to use a fill series The A default lists are for the full and abbreviated days of the week 1 January and the months of the year but you can create your own lists 2 February as well 3 March To add a fill series to a spreadsheet select the cells to fill Apn choose Edit gt Fill gt Series In the Fill Series dialog Figure 2 may 119 select AutoFill as the
364. ng zero will be 5 Format Cells Category Format Lanquage All 1234 Default English UK User defined 01234 Options Decimal places 0 EA F Negative numbers red Thousands separator Format code 00000 User defined Figure 116 Adjusting leading zeros Entering text Click in the cell and type the text Text is left aligned by default Entering numbers as text A number can be entered as text to preserve a leading zero by entering an apostrophe before the number like this 01481 The data is now regarded as text by Calc and displayed exactly as entered Typically formulas will treat the entry as a zero and functions will ignore it Take care that the cell containing the number is not used in a formula If smart quotes are used for apostrophes the apostrophe remains visible in the cell To choose the type of apostrophe use Tools gt AutoCorrect gt Custom Quotes The selection of the apostrophe type affects both Calc and Writer 128 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Entering dates and times Select the cell and type the date or time You can separate the date elements with a slant ora hyphen or use text such as 15 Oct 10 Calc recognizes a variety of date formats You can separate time elements with colons such as 10 43 45 Deactivating automatic changes Calc automatically applies many changes during data input unless you deactivate t
365. ns the template you want to delete 2 Click the template that you want to delete 3 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Importing a template If the template that you want to use is in a different location you must import it into an LibreOffice template folder To import a template into a template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog select the folder into which you want to import the template 2 Click the Commands button and choose Import Template from the drop down menu A standard file browser window opens 3 Find and select the template that you want to import and click Open The file browser window closes and the template appears in the selected folder 4 If you want type a new name for the template and then press Enter 74 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Exporting a template To export a template from a template folder to another location 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to export A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to export 3 Click the Commands button and choose Export Template from the drop down menu The Save As window opens 4 Find the folder into which you want to export the template and click Save Printing a list of styles defined
366. nsition is Automatic after x seconds let the slide show run by itself If the slide transition is On mouse click do one of the following to move from one slide to the next e Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to go to the next slide or to go back to the previous one e Click the mouse to move to the next slide e Press the spacebar on the keyboard to advance to the next slide Right click anywhere on the screen to open a menu from which you can navigate the slides and set other options To exit the slide show at any time including at the end press the Esc key Controlling a slide show using the Presenter Console LibreOffice Impress come with the Presenter Console extension built in The Presenter Console provides extra control over slide shows through different views on the presenter s computer screen and on the projection that the audience sees The view the presenter sees includes the current slide the upcoming slide the slide notes and a presentation timer For details about using the Presenter Console see Chapter 9 Slide Shows in the Impress Guide The Presenter Console works only on operating systems that support two displays and only when two displays are connected one may be the laptop display Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 179 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter Getting Started with Draw Vector Drawing in LibreOffice What is Draw Draw is a vector graphics drawing program al
367. nt templates and images Although individual extensions can be found in different places there is currently an extension repository at http extensions libreoffice org and some documentation at http ibreplanet org wiki Group OpenOfficeExtensions List For more about obtaining and installing extensions see Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice Writing macros without the recorder The examples covered in this chapter are created using the macro recorder and the dispatcher You can also write macros that directly access the objects that comprise LibreOffice In other words you can directly manipulate a document Directly manipulating LibreOffice s internal objects is an advanced topic that is beyond the scope of this chapter A simple example however demonstrates how this works Listing 7 Append the text Hello to the current document Sub AppendHello Dim oDoc Dim sTextService Dim oCurs 348 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 REM ThisComponent refers to the currently active document oDoc ThisComponent REM Verify that this is a text document sTextService com sun star text TextDocument If NOT oDoc supportsService sTextService Then MsgBox This macro only works with a text document Exit Sub End If REM Get the view cursor from the current controller oCurs oDoc currentController getViewCursor REM Move the cursor to the end of the document oCurs gotoEnd False REM Insert text Hello at the end
368. nter data on all the selected sheets This might not be what you want Impress and Draw You can choose individual slides ranges of slides or selections of slides for printing Range and copies All slides Number of copies 1 Slides 15 Paa i b ia Ss O Selection _ be Print Document Slides W Slides per page Default Printing an individual slide 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 Select the slide to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Slides option b Enter the number of the slide to print 3 Click the Print button Printing a range of pages 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 Select the slides to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Slides option b Enter the number of the slides to print for example 1 4 or 1 3 7 11 3 Click the Print button Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 283 Printing a selection of a slide or a selection from multiple slides 1 Inthe document select the section of the slide to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 Select the Selection option in the Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog 4 Click the Print button Printing handouts notes or outlines in Impress Handouts prints the slides in reduced size on the page from one to nine slides per page The slides can be printed horizontally landscape orientation or vertically portrait orient
369. nternet Sending documents as e mail attachments qvvvvvvv daaoseeecseeseeseeeeesese Seosceceseedeosnsscsceed Browser Plug in MediaWiki Figure 45 Internet options showing E mail page available to Linux users Windows and Linux installations also have a Wiki Publisher extension included by default Select MediaWiki in the Internet options then click the Add button to open the dialog shown in Figure 46 Here you can specify the address URL and login information for a wiki You can add several wikis to the list Mediawiki MediaWiki Server URL Account Username Password Save password Figure 46 Specifying a MediaWiki server account 54 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Controlling LibreOffice s AutoCorrect functions Some people find some or all of the items in LibreOffice s AutoCorrect function annoying because they change what you type when you do not want it changed Many people find some of the AutoCorrect functions quite helpful if you do then select the relevant options But if you find unexplained changes appearing in your document this is a good place to look to find the cause To open the AutoCorrect dialog click Tools gt AutoCorrect Options You need to have a document open for this menu item to appear In Writer this dialog has five tabs as shown in Figure 47 In other components of LibreOffice the dialog has only four tabs More details are given in the component guides Aut
370. ntialiasing 38 security 27 security options 43 selecting nonconsecutive items 85 vertical block of text 86 selection clipboard 39 selection lists Calc 131 selection in Calc cells 119 columns 119 rows 119 sheets 120 send document as e mail 292 sequence of styles automatic 77 setup options 34 shared extension 361 sheet tabs Calc 112 sheets in Calc inserting 122 renaming 124 selecting 120 shortcut keys 364 size optimization 49 Slide Design dialog 174 slide master 164 172 apply 174 author information 176 creat 173 slide show automatically advance 178 transitions 178 150 slides 162 164 172 Snap function 203 Snap to grid 203 sort order database fields 242 sorting records Calc 141 special characters 88 92 spelling checker 90 spelling options 53 spreadsheet using as data source 234 spreadsheets cell reference 115 definition 110 navigate 115 opening 373 saving 374 saving as CSV 115 starting a new document 26 starting LibreOffice 20 status bar 25 Calc 113 Writer 81 Style dialog 61 63 styles 203 Apply Style list 60 assigning to shortcut keys 359 AutoUpdate 62 Index 381 changing using Style dialog 61 creating by dragging and dropping 63 creating from selection 63 creating new 62 creating using Style dialog 63 custom 62 defining asequence 77 deleting 66 description 58 Fill Format 60 linking 63 loading from template or document 65 modifying 61 types supported 58
371. ny ways to navigate within a spreadsheet from cell to cell and sheet to sheet You can generally use the method you prefer Going to a particular cell Using the mouse Place the mouse pointer over the cell and click Using a cell reference Click on the little inverted black triangle just to the right of the Name Box Figure 96 The existing cell reference will be highlighted Type the cell reference of the cell you want to go to and press Enter Or just click into the Name box backspace over the existing cell reference and type in the cell reference you want and press Enter Using the Navigator To open the Navigator click its icon w on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose View gt Navigator on the Menu bar or double click on the Sheet Sequence Number Sheet1 3 in Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 115 the Status Bar Type the cell reference into the top two fields labeled Column and Row and press Enter In Figure 102 the Navigator would select cell A7 You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main Calc window or leave it floating To dock or float the Navigator hold down the Control key and double click in an empty area near the icons in the Navigator dialog Navigator Erat Column A Row 7 E Sheets Sheetl Sheet Sheet3 Ee Range names gt 3 Database Ranges P Linked areas gt gy Graphics Graphics 1 ib OLE objects Comments sample gy Drawing objects Untitled active
372. o compare the name we entered with the names of the artist in our database and decide whether to include a particular artist in our query or not e IS equal to the same as e is not equal to not the same as e is smaller than comes before e is greater than comes after e is equal or less than the same as or comes before e is equal or greater than the same as or comes after e like similar to in some way Note These conditions apply to numbers letters using alphabetical order and dates 1 Since we are only searching for one thing we will use the default setting of Match all of the following 2 We are looking for a particular artist so select CD Collection Artist in the Fields list and is equal to as the Condition 3 Type the name of the artist in the Value box Click Next Step 4 Select type of query We want simple information so the default setting Detailed query is what we want Click Next at the bottom of the window Step 7 Assign aliases if desired Since we have a simple query the Grouping and Grouping conditions are not needed Steps 5 and 6 of the wizard are skipped in our query We want the default settings Click Next Step 8 Overview Name the query suggestion Query_Artists To the right of this are two choices Select Display Query Click Finish Using the Design View to create a query Creating a query using Design View is not as difficult as it may first seem It may take multiple
373. o either before Sub Main or after End Sub In Listing 3 the new macro has been added before Sub Main Listing 3 Module1 after adding the new macro REM 2K OK OK OK K BASIC 2K OK OK OK K Sub HelloMacro Print Hello End Sub Sub Main End Sub Click the Run Basic button J in the toolbar or press F5 to run the first macro in the module Use the Macro dialog opened using the Select macro button amp or Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to select and run any macro in the module Creating a simple macro Imagine repeatedly entering simple information Although you can store the information in the clipboard if you use the clipboard for something else the contents are changed Storing the contents as a macro is a simple solution In some simple cases including the example used here a better solution is to use AutoText Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 331 1 Use Tools gt Macros gt Record Macro to start recording a macro Record ita A small window is displayed so you know that LibreOffice is recording 2 Type the desired information or perform an appropriate series of operations In this case typed the name Andrew Pitonyak 3 Click the Stop Recording button to stop recording save the macro and display the LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog Stop Recording k FRY EF VLA y wT YS ICRA INT OW Libreoffice Basic Macr Macro name Header_graphic Save macroin Existin
374. o entries are otherwise identical one with an upper case letter is placed before one witha lower case letter in the same position Range contains column labels Does not include the column heading in the sort Include formats A cell s formatting is moved with its contents If formatting is used to distinguish different types of cells then use this option Copy sort results to Sets a spreadsheet address to which to copy the sort results If a range is specified that does not have the necessary number of cells then cells are added If a range contains cells that already have content then the sort fails Custom sort order Select the box then choose one of the sort orders defined in Tools gt Options gt Spreadsheet gt Sort Lists from the drop down list Direction Sets whether rows or columns are sorted The default is to sort by columns unless the selected cells are in a single column Using formulas and functions You may need more than numbers and text on your spreadsheet Often the contents of one cell depend on the contents of other cells Formulas are equations using numbers and variables to get a result The variables are cell locations that hold the data you need for the equation A function is a predefined calculation entered in a cell to help you analyze or manipulate data All you have to do Is add the arguments and the calculation is automatically made for you Functions help you create the formulas needed to get the resu
375. oCorrect as E i IIE i m m pom m pen p a m m m Ex Cc Replacements and EXCEPTIONS Tor language English LUSA n a meee oa I ae a ea ee eer oe Figure 47 The top portion of the AutoCorrect dialog in Writer Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 55 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates What is a template A template is a model that you use to create other documents For example you can create a template for business reports that has your company s logo on the first page New documents created from this template will all have your company s logo on the first page Templates can contain anything that regular documents can contain such as text graphics a set of styles and user specific setup information such as measurement units language the default printer and toolbar and menu customization All documents in LibreOffice are based on templates You can create a specific template for any document type text soreadsheet drawing presentation If you do not specify a template when you start a new document then the document is based on the default template for that type of document If you have not specified a default template LibreOffice uses the blank template for that type of document that is installed with LibreOffice See Setting a default template on page 71 for more information What
376. oO ni V Table boundaries _ Automatic Font color _ Automatic Unvisited links Atomai ee ee ee ee Mi Figure 32 Showing or hiding text object and table boundaries Accessibility options Accessibility options include whether to allow animated graphics or text how long help tips remain visible some options for high contrast display and a way to change the font for the user interface of the LibreOffice program Accessibility support relies on Sun Microsystems Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools See Java options below The Support assistive technology tools option is not shown on all LibreOffice installations See Assistive Tools in LibreOffice in the Help for other requirements and information Select or deselect the options as required Miscellaneous options C Support assistive technology tools program restart required Use text selection cursor in read only text documents Allow animated graphics Y Allow animated text Help tips disappear after A gt seconds Options for high contrast appearance Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system C Use automatic font color for screen display Use system colors for page previews Figure 33 Choosing accessibility options Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 45 Java options If you install or update a Java Runtime Environment JRE after you install LibreOffice or if you have mo
377. ocation In this example there is only one value and it is numbered zero Pulling the macro together The following details are very complete it is not important to understand all of the details The first line defines the start of the macro sub EnterMyName Declare two variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object 334 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 ThisComponent refers to the current document The CurrentController property of a document refers to a service that controls the document For example when you type it is the current controller that notices The current controller then dispatches the changes to the document s frame The Frame property of a controller returns a main frame for a document Therefore the variable named document refers to a document s frame which receives dispatched commands document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame Most tasks in LibreOffice are accomplished by dispatching a command LibreOffice includes a dispatch helper service which does most of the work to use dispatches in macros The method CreateUnoService accepts the name of a service and it tries to create an instance of that service On completion the dispatcher variable contains a reference to a DispatchHelper dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper Declare an array of properties Each property has a name and a value In other words itis a name value pair The created a
378. odify the label for the PaymentType field as well as change the field to a list Dox First we must decide what we want to change The discussion will follow this ten step outline of our planned changes e Provide a drop down capability for the Date field in the main form and lengthen the field to show the day of the week month day and year e Shorten the length of the payment fields all fields containing the word Payment e Move the controls into groups food fuel subform and miscellaneous e Change the wording of some of the labels Some single words should be two words Some abbreviations should be used if possible Misc for miscellaneous e Change the lengths of several fields and labels Only Lunch Supper Motel and Tolls have acceptable lengths But for a better appearance changes will be made to these as well e Lengthen the Note field vertically add a scroll bar and move tt e Make changes in the Date and PaymentType columns of the subform to match the changes in the main form e Add headings for each group in the main form e Change the background to a picture then modify some of the labels so that they can be read clearly against this background Change the font color of the headings 226 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Here are some methods that we will be using in these steps The controls in the main form consists of a label and its field Sometimes we want to work with the entire control sometime
379. of LibreOffice You can enter data usually numerical in a spreadsheet and then manipulate this data to produce certain results Alternatively you can enter data and then use Calc in a What if manner by changing some of the data and observing the results without having to retype the entire spreadsheet Other features provided by Calc include e Functions which can be used to create formulas to perform complex calculations on data e Database functions to arrange store and filter data e Dynamic charts a wide range of 2D and 3D charts e Macros for recording and executing repetitive tasks e Ability to open edit and save Microsoft Excel spreadsheets e Import and export of spreadsheets in multiple formats including HTML CSV PDF and PostScript If you want to use macros written in Microsoft Excel using the VBA macro code in LibreOffice you must first edit the code in the LibreOffice Basic IDE editor See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros in this book and Chapter 12 in the Calc Guide Spreadsheets sheets and cells Calc works with documents called spreadsheets Spreadsheets consist of a number of individual sheets each sheet containing cells arranged in rows and columns A particular cell is identified by its row number and column letter Cells hold the individual elements text numbers formulas and so on that make up the data to display and manipulate Each spreadsheet can have many sheets and each shee
380. of the document oCurs Text insertString oCurs Hello False End Sub Finding more information Numerous resources are available that provide help with writing macros Use Help gt LibreOffice Help to open the LibreOffice help pages The upper left corner of the LibreOffice help system contains a drop down list that determines which help set is displayed To view the help for Basic choose LibreOffice Basic from this list Included material Many excellent macros are included with LibreOffice Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to open the Macro dialog Expand the Tools library in the LibreOffice library container Inspect the Debug module some good examples include WritedbgInfo document and printdbgInfo sheety Online resources The following links and references contain information regarding macro programming http user services openoffice org OOo forums well Supported volunteers answer questions about LibreOffice as well http api openoffice org docs common ref com sun star module ix html official IDL reference here you ll find almost every command with a description http wiki documentfoundation org Documentation Publications Other_ Documentation _and_ Reso urces BASIC Programming Guide and Developers Guide the latter contains a detailed explanation http www pitonyak org oo php Andrew Pitonyak s macro page http www pitonyak org AndrewMacro odt numerous examples of working m
381. oftware programs to freely use the same file formats HTML XML and ODF are examples of open standards for documents An open standard meets the following requirements e It is well documented with the complete specification publically available either free or ata nominal charge e It can be freely copied distributed and used The intellectual property of the standard is made irrevocably available on a royalty free basis e It is standardized and maintained in an independent open forum also called standards organization using an open process What is OpenDocument OpenDocument ODF is an XML based file format for office documents text documents spreadsheets drawings presentations and more developed at OASIS http www oasis open org who an independent international standards group Unlike other file formats ODF is an open standard It is publicly available royalty free and without legal or other restrictions therefore ODF files are not tied to a specific office suite and anybody can build a program that interprets these files For this reason ODF Is quickly becoming the preferred file format for government agencies schools and other companies who prefer not to be too dependent on any one software supplier Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 371 Since version 2 0 OpenOffice org has supported the open standard OASIS OpenDocument as its default file format LibreOffice saves documents in OpenDo
382. og you can scroll through the available icons select one and click OK to assign it to the command Change Icon Icons Va al w Z Bl TEE Note The size of an icon should be 165x16 pixel to achieve best quality Different sized icons will be scaled automatically Figure 351 Change Icon dialog To use a custom icon create it in a graphics program and import it into LibreOffice by clicking the Import button on the Change Icon dialog Custom icons should be 16 x 16 pixels in size to achive the best quality and should not contain more than 256 colors Example Adding a Fax icon to a toolbar You can customize LibreOffice so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax 1 2 3 4 5 6 Be sure the fax driver is installed Consult the documentation for your fax modem for more information Choose Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Writer gt Print The dialog shown in Figure 352 opens Select the fax driver from the Fax list and click OK Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard toolbar In the drop down menu choose Customize Toolbar The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog appears Figure 350 Click Add On the Add Commands dialog Figure 349 select Documents in the Category list then select Send Default Fax in the Commands list Click Add Now you can see the new icon in the Commands list In the Commands list click the up or down arrow button to positio
383. ol two properties of the Form Design toolbar should be selected Snap to Grid and Guides when Moving Your controls will line up better and an outline of what you are moving moves as the cursor moves You should also have both rulers active View gt Ruler Step 1 Change the Date field 1 Control click the Date field to select it 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right side It should change toa double headed arrow Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 227 3 Hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor to the right until the length is 6 cm The vertical dashed line is lined up with the 6 Release the mouse button 4 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar If it is not visible choose View gt Toolbars gt Form Controls The Properties Date Field window opens Each line contains a property of the field Figure 231 Form Controls toolbar e Scroll down to the Date format property This is a drop down list with Standard short as the default setting Click it to open the list Select the Standard long entry Scroll down to the Drop down property Its default setting is No It is also a drop down list Click to open the list Select Yes To see what the Date field will look like click the Form Mode On Off icon the second icon from the left in Figure 231 You can do this any time you want to see the form with the changes you have made Step 2 Shorten th
384. ommunity operates internationally in all time zones and in many languages linked through the internet at www libreoffice org and www documentfoundation org 370 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 How is LibreOffice licensed LibreOffice is distributed under the Open Source Initiative OSI approved Lesser General Public License LGPL The LGPL license is available from the LibreOffice website http www libreoffice org download license What is open source The four essential rights of open source software are embodied within the Free Software Foundation s General Public License GPL e The right to use the software for any purpose e Freedom to redistribute the software for free or for a fee e Access to the complete source code of the program that is the blueprints e The right to modify any part of the source or use portions of it in other programs The basic idea behind open source is very simple When programmers can read redistribute and modify the source code for a piece of software the software evolves People improve it people adapt it people fix bugs For more information on Free and Open Source software visit these websites Open Source Initiative OSI http www opensource org Free Software Foundation FSF http www gnu org What are open standards An open standard provides a means of doing something that is independent of manufacturer or vendor thus enabling competing s
385. on the ruler are used for indenting paragraphs They are often in the same place as the page margins so you need to be careful to move the margin marker not the arrows Place the mouse pointer between the arrows and when the pointer turns into a double headed arrow you can move the margin the indent arrows will move with it To change margins using the Page Style dialog 1 Right click anywhere on the page and select Page from the pop up menu 2 On the Page tab of the dialog type the required distances in the Margins boxes Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 101 Adding comments to a document Authors and reviewers often use comments formerly called notes to exchange ideas ask for suggestions or mark items needing attention To insert a comment in the text place the cursor in the place the comment refers to and choose Insert gt Comment or press Ctr A t C The anchor point of the comment is connected by a dotted line to a box on the right hand side of the page where you can type the text of the comment Writer automatically adds at the bottom of the comment the author s name and a time stamp indicating when the comment was created Figure 90 shows an example of text with comments from two different authors Note sample riter document has been vastly improved in OOo notes are now displayed at the side of 1 the text the note refers to and select he anchor point of the note is connected by _ Cello Suite 1
386. onent specific items Page 16 23 PageStyle English USA INSRT SID L Page Page Language Insert Selection Unsaved number style mode mode changes Figure 9 Left end of status bar in Writer Bullets 1 Level 1 B GOG EG 6 we 100 Digital Object view Zoom Zoom signature information layout slider percent Figure 10 Right end of status bar in Writer Common status bar items are described below Page sheet or slide number Shows the current page sheet or slide number and the total number of pages sheets or slides in the document Double click on this field to open the Navigator Other uses of this field depend on the component Page style or slide design Shows the current page style or slide design To edit the current page style or slide design double click on this field Unsaved changes An icon appears here if changes to the document have not been saved Digital signature If the document has been digitally signed an icon shows here You can double click the icon to view the certificate Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 25 Object information Displays information relevant to the cursor s position or the selected element of the document Double clicking in this area usually opens a relevant dialog Zoom slider and percent To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from whi
387. oolbar 185 linking object from gallery 301 Linux Quickstarter 22 system requirements 20 load Basic code to edit 49 load save options 47 loading styles 65 locale settings 52 M Mac OS X system requirements 20 Macro Organizer dialog 332 342 macro security options 43 Macro Selector dialog 344 Macromedia Flash 324 macros 330 assigning to events 360 Calc 339 comments 334 creating 335 DIM 334 dispatch framework 338 dispatch helper 335 downloading 343 editing 333 event handling 346 example 335 functions 339 IDE 333 338 library container 332 library containers 339 menu items 345 module 332 modules 339 organization 339 recording 331 REM 334 resources 349 running 333 344 storage 342 subroutines 334 339 variables 334 viewing 333 writing 348 mail merge 104 Mail Merge Wizard e mailing Writer document 293 Mantovani Paolo 339 margins Writer 101 Master Pages 173 mathematical and chemical equations 255 Index 379 mathematical markup 260 mathematical symbols 257 matrix markup Math 263 measurement unit 90 memory options 36 menu bar 22 menus adding commands 354 creating 353 customizing 352 modifying 353 modifying entries 355 Microsoft Office file conversion 49 Microsoft Windows file associations 21 Quickstarter 21 system requirements 20 middle mouse button function 39 mouse positioning 38 MySQL 212 N navigation cell to cell in Calc 116 sheet to sheet in Calc 118 Navigation icons 83
388. option Controlling printing If you prefer to use the standard Mac Print dialogs deselect the Print dialogs Use LibreOffice dialogs option in LibreOffice gt Preferences gt General This book uses the LibreOffice Print dialogs in illustrations For more control over printing use the Print dialog File gt Print or Ctrl P 8 O 6 Print LOMMA M LibreOffice Writer _ Page Layout Options Printer 3 LibreOffice Canon LBP5050 The Deturent Foundation Lexmark E2 32 Gening Stated Gude Details E Chapter 10 Range and copies a Printing Exporting and age E mailing All pages Number of copies 1 Pages 1 23 j E eee i Ee REA A Collate p p selection _ Print in reverse page order Print Comments None document only l Cancel I Help E a Figure 294 The Print dialog 278 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 The Print dialog has four tabs from which you can choose a range of options as described in the following sections The options selected on the Print dialog apply to this printing of this document only To specify default printing settings for LibreOffice go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Print and Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Writer Print See Chapter 2 Setting Up LibreOffice for more details The different components of LibreOffice have different available print settings as summarized in Table 7 Table 7 Print o
389. opying sheets between different spreadsheets be sure that both documents are open Follow these steps 1 In the current document right click on the sheet tab you wish to move or copy 2 Select Move Copy Sheet from the context menu 3 On the Move Copy Sheet dialog Figure 110 e Select the action Move or Copy To document select the document in which you want to place the sheet By default the field will show the current document If you have another spreadsheet open its name will appear in the drop down list along with new document e Insert before select the position within the target document e New name you can rename the sheet you are moving or assign a different name to the copied sheet If you do not enter a name for a copied sheet Calc creates a name 4 When you are done click OK If you choose new document as the location a new spreadsheet will be created This may cause conflicts with formulas linked to other sheets in the previous location If you accidentally move a sheet you can fix it by moving or A copying the sheet back to the original location This caution also apply for moving sheets to other existing documents Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 123 Move Copy Sheet Location To document Untitled current document Insert before Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 move to end position Name New name Sheet Help Figure 110 Move Copy Sheet dialo
390. or symbols used in drawing flowcharts The creation of flowcharts organization charts and similar planning tools are further described in Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Flowchart Xx E 2 UEA FSE dV Swu eaPoePeascav ape aug Figure 187 Flowcharts toolbar 194 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Callouts Click on the triangle or arrow to the right of the Callouts icon L to open the Callouts toolbar for drawing callouts Epp e amp a Ee Figure 188 Callouts toolbar Stars and banners Click on the triangle or arrow to the right of the Stars icon w to open the Stars and Banners toolbar for drawing stars and banners Stars and Banners a wvyweMe Sk Ee ae Figure 189 Stars and Banners toolbar You can add text to all these geometric shapes See Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide for details Selecting objects Direct selection The easiest way to select an object is to click directly on it For objects that are not filled click on the object outline to select it One click selects a second click deselects To select or deselect more than one object hold the shift button down while clicking Selection by framing You can also select several objects at once by dragging the mouse cursor around the objects This cursor dragging draws a rectangle around the objects and only objects that lie entirely within the rect
391. ore information Font sizes Use these fields to define the respective font sizes for the HTML lt font size 1 gt to lt font size 7 gt tags if they are used in the HTML pages Many pages no longer use these tags Import Use English USA locale for numbers When importing numbers from an HTML page the decimal and thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page The clipboard however contains no information about the locale If this option is not selected numbers will be interpreted according to the Language Locale setting in Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages see page 52 If this option is selected numbers will be interpreted as for the English USA locale Font sizes Import Size 1 7 E Use English USA locale for numbers Size 2 10 Import unknown HTML tags as fields Ignore font settings Size 3 1 Export Size 4 14 Netscape Navigator Size 5 18 LibreOffice Basic Size 6 24 n i W Display warning a Print layout Copy local graphics to Internet Character set Western Europe Windows 14 gt Figure 40 Choosing HTML compatibility options 50 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Import Import unknown HTML tags as fields Select this option if you want tags that are not recognized by LibreOffice to be imported as fields For an opening tag an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name For a closin
392. ors which it corrects automatically For example hte will be changed to the AutoCorrect is turned on when Writer is installed To turn it off uncheck Format gt AutoCorrect gt While Typing Choose Tools gt AutoCorrect Options to open the AutoCorrect dialog There you can define which strings of text are corrected and how In most cases the defaults are fine Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 91 To stop Writer replacing a specific spelling go to the Replace tab highlight the word pair and click Delete To add a new spelling to the list type it into the Replace and With boxes on the Replace tab and click New See the different tabs of the dialog for the wide variety of other options available to fine tune AutoCorrect AutoCorrect can be used as a quick way to insert special characters For example c will be autocorrected to You can add your own special characters Using word completion If Word Completion is enabled Writer tries to guess which word you are typing and offers to complete the word for you To accept the suggestion press Enter Otherwise continue typing To turn off Word Completion select Tools gt AutoCorrect Options gt Word Completion and deselect Enable word completion You can customize word completion from the Word Completion page of the AutoCorrect dialog e Add append a space automatically after an accepted word e Show the suggested word as a tip hovering over
393. ose Click another row and then click this icon again The data in the sentence changes to this selected row of data Save the document if you want to use it as an example later Sopa tne gy Oeon ee a aa Friday June 26 530 50 00 11 00 Dan Saturday June 2778 48 00 4 00 13 00 Dan Figure 243 Selected row in data source window Adding data in table format is a little easier and takes perhaps fewer steps Some of the steps will be quite similar 1 Navigate to the place you want to place the table and click the location 2 Control Click the gray box to the left of each row of the data source that you want to be a row in your table if the rows are not consecutive To select consecutive rows click the gray box to the left of the top desired row and Shift click the bottom desired row 3 Click the Data to text icon to open the Insert Database Columns dialog Figure 244 The Data to text icon is to the left of the Data to Fields icon in Figure 243 4 Move the fields you want in your table from the Database Columns list to the Table column s list e To place the fields in the order you select click the field and use the single arrow to move the fields in the order you desire You can also limit the fields you use to less than all of the fields available Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 237 e If you want to use all of the fields use the double arrow pointing to the right to move all of
394. ost paid by and our supper cost paid by 3 To replace date click the field name Date in the data source window and drag it to the right of the word On The result On lt Date gt If you have Field shadings turned on View gt Field shading lt Date gt has a gray background Otherwise it does not 4 To replace first amount click the Breakfast field name and drag it to the right of our breakfast cost Make sure you have the proper spacing between the field names and the words before and after them Result breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt 5 To replace the first name click the Bpayment field name and drag it to the right of paid by Result paid by lt Bpayment gt 6 Inthe same way fill in the rest of the fields in the sentence Use lt Lunch gt and lt LPayment gt for the second set of amount and name in the sentence Use lt Supper gt and lt SPayment gt for the third set of amount and name in the sentence 7 Final result On lt Date gt our breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt paid by lt BPayment gt our lunch cost lt Lunch gt paid by lt LPayment gt and our supper cost lt Supper gt paid by lt SPayment gt 8 Add data to the fields of the sentence Click the gray box to the left of the row of data you want to add That row should be highlighted like the second row of Figure 243 s Click the Data to Fields icon circled This should fill the fields with the data from the row you ch
395. ou can create one by clicking Create 6 Edit document 7 Personalize document Your recipients are currently selected From 8 Save print or send Name See eee Table TEA EEEE TRIER OREM Addresses Create ddresses Filter Edit Figure 310 Selecting an address list 294 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 4 Back on the Select address list page click Next On the Create salutation page deselect This document should contain a salutation Mail Merge Wizard Steps Fy 5 Select starting documen should contain a salutation Select document type Select address list Dear Mrs Last Name Create salutation Dear Mr lt Last Name Edit document I Hender Fersonalize document Save print or send Figure 311 Deselecting a salutation 5 In the left hand list click 8 Save print or send LibreOffice displays a Creating documents message and then displays the Save print or send page of the Wizard 6 Select Send merged document as E Mail The lower part of the page changes to show e mail settings choices Mail Merge Wizard Steps Save print or send the document 1 Select starting document Select one of the options below 2 Select document type O Save starting document 3 Select address list Save merged document Print merged document 4 Create salutation E Mail settings 6 Edit document 7 Personalize documen
396. ove the current cell If there are no numbers above the current cell then the cells to the left are placed in the Sum formula Clicking the Function button inserts an equals sign into the selected cell and the Input line enabling the cell to accept a formula When you enter new data into a cell the Sum and Equals buttons change to Cancel and Accept buttons X v The contents of the current cell data formula or function are displayed in the Input line which forms the remainder of the Formula Bar You can edit the contents of the current cell on the Input line or in the cell itself To edit on the Input line click in the line then type your changes To edit within the current cell just double click the cell Individual cells The main section of the screen displays the cells in the form of a grid with each cell being at the intersection of a column and a row At the top of the columns and at the left end of the rows are a series of gray boxes containing letters and numbers These are the column and row headers The columns start at A and go on to the right and the rows start at 1 and go down These column and row headers form the cell references that appear in the Name Box on the Formula Bar Figure 96 You can turn these headers off by selecting View gt Column amp Row Headers Sheet tabs At the bottom of the grid of cells are the sheet tabs These tabs enable access to each individual sheet with the visible active s
397. p of the document Calc also allows the insertion of links directly into the spreadsheet using the Hyperlink dialog Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 323 Saving Impress presentations as web pages You can export presentations as Macromedia Flash files choose File gt Export and select Macromedia Flash for the file type You can also convert presentations into a series of web pages as described below Note Saving as web pages HTML format does not retain animation and slide transitions 1 To begin choose File gt Export and select HTML Document as the file type 2 Create a folder for the files supply a name for the resulting HTML file and click Save The HTML Export Wizard opens Depending on the size of your presentation and the number of graphics it contains the HTML export function may create many HTML JPG and GIF files If you simply save to your desktop not in a specific folder these separate HTML and graphics files will be all over your desktop So be sure to create a folder to hold all the files 3 Choose the design for all of the pages either from an existing design or by creating a new one If you have not previously saved a design the Existing Design choice is not available Assign design New design Existing Design ampie L Select an existing design or create a new one 4 Click Next to select the type of web pages to create e Standard HTML one page for each slide with navigation
398. paragraphs You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 80 shows the Formatting toolbar as a floating toolbar customized to show only the icons for paragraph formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt View Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 93 Formatting 2 Default po 4 1 Open Styles and Formatting Window 2 Apply Style 3 Align Left 4 Centered lt mi 3 4 5 6 5 Align Right 6 Justified 7 Line Spacing 1 8 Line Spacing 1 5 9 Line Spacing 2 a _ i x i i al J 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 0 Numbering On Off 11 Bullets On Off 12 Decrease Indent 13 Increase Indent 14 Paragraph format dialog Figure 80 Formatting toolbar showing icons for paragraph formatting Formatting characters You can apply many formats to characters using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 81 shows the Formatting toolbar customized to include only the icon for character formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt View E en Lu Timesnewronan ee e BY uea Ya AL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 12 13 44 45 1 Open Styles and Formatting 6 Italic 12 Font Color Window 7 Underline 13 Highlighting 2 Apply Style 8 Superscript
399. peated selecting one cell in each row works Page breaks While defining a print range can be a powerful tool it may sometimes be necessary to manually adjust Calc s printout To do this you can use a manual break A manual break helps to ensure that your data prints properly You can insert a horizontal page break above or a vertical page break to the left of the active cell Inserting a page break To insert a page break 1 Navigate to the cell where the page break will begin 2 Select Insert gt Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now set Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 145 Row break Selecting Row Break creates a page break above the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between rows 14 and 15 Column break Selecting Column Break creates a page break to the left of the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between columns G and H To see page break lines more easily on screen you can change their color Choose Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Appearance and scroll down to the Spreadsheet section Deleting a page break To remove a page break 1 Navigate to a cell that is next to the break you want to remove 2 Select Edit gt Delete Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now removed Multiple manual row and
400. perlink You can also point to an anchor ina document to do this write the address in this format file lt path gt document_name anchor_name e Text type the text that you want to be displayed when the mouse pointer is moved over the hotspot e Frame where the target of the hyperlink will open pick among _ blank opens in a new browser window _ self opens in the active browser window top or parent The value _ self for the target frame will usually work just fine It is therefore not recommended to use the other choices unless absolutely necessary Using LibreOffice s drawing tools You can use LibreOffice s drawing tools to create graphics such as simple diagrams using rectangles circles lines text and other predefined shapes You can also group several drawing objects to make sure they maintain their relative position and proportion You can place the drawing objects directly on a page in your document or you can insert them into a frame You can also use the drawing tools to annotate photographs screen captures or other illustrations produced by other programs but this is not recommended because e You cannot include images in a group with drawing objects so they may get out of alignment in your document e If you convert a document to another format such as HTML the drawing objects and the graphics will not remain associated they are saved separately In general if you need to create complex drawing
401. phic you want to use have done these steps selecting pebble light i Browse through the choices li Right click your choice ii Insert gt Background gt Page c Click the Gallery tool to close the gallery window d The form should look like Figure 237 232 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 pate OT FO Fa iee Tollso7 PAIMAN OR aymfent gt Mise Cy FS Mee Payment P Date Z Jye j ae y 5i 2 5 LJ Dt r hy r p A 7 I va Puff n m an gt v Mf j d j aol a AE P a AS d d As 1 CM A N D s n m a d r Af ye L PATTES LPAI AD POTIONS OA OP OTTERS AL YP HOTT AYT A Py Mise Notes _ ros ny yo Meals oe aG aU Ar T e anle G 7 A Pa Weed 7 iJ E Pai x DI j T P z T r Pa T y r PAT oy j P y Py J y CPAT HDI rK DPI rD Par Drar HI Par HI Yra y U d J Lg i d r d F F i j Breakfast I Payment Shack N snack Gost Rayment 2 yy Ce J yy x ry DE y r EY Al Y DE AT y k Pr A i a A AT y A A 7 a j 7 gt Ee aS j ry 7 d ah ad d nd i i d J Z e ad kr es SA TX L Cp 3 Oos i i c Oo lt i l NY J f TP RFI N E a bench i i gt nat Payments x JIJ gt 5 HILY WAY Jit ji WA Jit rA Jij Ji i x 2 J y b 7 Hy J Ta L Lj Oa d LIS L Ta L 4 4 am ky ft DEN P e Supper PALLY Payment 1 4 E LP Ne AIDE LUN aI BE ONG gt BE IS AIS J a DAD gt ry rs E p Aan ho y AS A T 7y DEN A Py Ta LI i d i l mS 7 an l ad n pa S x j HROM J A
402. phics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Writer gt Print 2 Under Contents select the Print text in black option Click OK to save the change 3 Open the Print dialog File gt Print 4 Click the Print button to print the document Previewing pages sheets before printing You can use the previewing options in Writer and Calc to view the document as it will be printed Different viewing options are available Writer The normal page view in Writer shows you what each page will look like when printed and you can edit the pages in that view If you are designing a document to be printed double sided you may want to see what facing pages look like Writer provides two ways to do this e View Layout editable view use the Facing Pages Book Preview button on the status bar e Page Preview read only view To use Page Preview 1 Choose File gt Page Preview or click the Page Preview button S on the Standard toolbar Writer now displays the Page Preview toolbar instead of the Formatting toolbar GBH BA B a 50 kl g GL Close Preview Figure 300 Page Preview toolbar Writer 2 Select the required preview icon Two Pages GG Multiple Pages 45 or Book Preview 286 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 3 To print the document from this view click the Print document icon 25 to open the Print dialog Choose the print options and click the Print button Calc To preview the
403. phs in a slide using the left and right arrow buttons Promote or Demote on the Text Formatting toolbar Both move a paragraph and change its outline level using a combination of these four arrow buttons 2 Compare slides with your outline if you have prepared one in advance If you notice from your outline that another slide is needed you can create it directly in the Outline view or you can return to the Normal view to create it Figure 143 Text Formatting toolbar Liberation Sans Nimbus Notes view Use the Notes view Figure 144 to add notes to a slide These notes are not seen when the presentation is shown Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 155 Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter A Y Yy L LibreOffice i A Presentation Template Libre Ofice Design Team Version 2011 05 18 Production Gurnee Click to add notes Figure 144 Notes view 1 Click the Notes tab in the Workspace 2 Select the slide to which you want to add notes Click the slide in the Slides pane or Double click the slide s name in the Navigator 3 Inthe text box below the slide click on the words Click to add notes and begin typing You can resize the Notes text box using the colored resizing handles which appear when you click on the edge of the box You can also move the box by placing the pointer on the border then clicking and dragging To make changes in the text
404. plate s properties To preview the template click the Preview icon A preview of the template appears in the box on the right e To view the template s properties click the Document Properties icon The template s properties appear in the box on the right 5 Click Open The Templates and Documents dialog closes and a new document based on the selected template opens in LibreOffice You can then edit and save the new document just as you would any other document 66 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 C Templates and Documents My Templates sample test autotext Samples Get more templates online Figure 55 Templates and Documents dialog Creating a template Ele Title LO 3 4 chapter template By John Dlugosz Date 06 02 2011 01 47 59 Modified by Jean Hollis Weber Modified on 09 08 2011 12 07 25 Description wees A irere IA Loren eet You can create your own templates in two ways from a document or using a wizard Creating a template from a document To create a template from a document 1 Open anew or existing document of the type you want to make into a template text document spreadsheet drawing presentation 2 Add the content and styles that you want 3 From the main menu choose File gt Templates gt Save The Templates dialog opens Templates Mew template Templates Cancel Categories Templates Help E Presen
405. pose that e We want to enter the above formula the value of pi rounded to 5 decimal places e We know the name of the Greek character pi e But we do not know the markup associated with the symbol Step 1 Type followed by the text pi This displays the Greek character x Step 2 Open the Elements window View gt Elements Step 3 The symbol is a relation so we click on the Relations button If you hover the mouse over this button you see the tooltip Relations Figure 280 Figure 281 shows the Elements window after clicking the Relations button The symbol we want is circled Cj Elements Ed Elements Malo ack fis a 5 i reiaton 22 4 8 4 4 azb asb alb afb a b a b axb a b aab a b fa b Ib alb a b ine asb a b awb azb a b asb aob azb asb a b Figure 280 Tooltip indicates the b deb a b Relations button Figure 281 After selecting Relations Step 4 Click on the a b symbol The equation editor now shows the markup pi lt gt simeq lt gt Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 261 Step 5 Delete the lt gt text press F4 key and type 3 14159 at the end of the equation We end up with the markup pi simeq 3 14159 The result is shown in Figure 282 pr 3 14155 Figure 282 Final result Changing a formula You can change a formula at any time To switch into edit mode double click on the formula To get to the appropriate section in the markup cod
406. press presentations Draw vector graphics Math equation editor Base database It also covers features common to all components including styles templates a gallery of graphics macros and printing Who wrote this book This book was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community Profits from the sale of this book will be used to benefit the community A PDF version of this book can be downloaded free from http www libreoffice org get help documentation Get LibreOffice You can download LibreOffice free from http www libreoffice org
407. print preview Calc 287 Writer 286 print ranges Calc 142 printer settings 48 printing black and white on color printer 285 booklet 284 brochure 284 Calc 142 282 envelopes labels business cards 285 general options 279 grayscale on color printer 286 handouts 284 380 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 headers and footers Calc 146 Impress and Draw 283 multiple pages per sheet 280 notes Impress 284 page break Calc 145 page order details scale in Calc 143 page orientation 279 rows or columns on every page 145 selecting what to print 281 Writer 281 Q queries database aliases 248 creating using a Wizard 241 creating using Design View 243 joined fields 225 search conditions 243 Query Wizard database 241 Quickstarter 21 enabling 37 quotation marks 129 R raster graphics 209 rectangle drawing 189 redlines 104 redo change 32 regular expressions 87 relationships database 221 REM 334 remove personal information on saving 44 removing personal data 296 renaming files 29 replacement table font 43 Report Wizard database 250 revision marks 104 RGB 186 right to left RTL layout 19 right click context menus 24 rows in Calc deleting 121 freezing 125 inserting 121 selecting 119 rulers 183 S save as web page 320 save AutoRecovery information 48 save original Basic code 49 save relative URLs 48 saving files 27 scaling factor user interface 37 scanner 300 screen font a
408. ptions in LibreOffice components Feature Writer Calc Impress Draw Select pages sheets slides to print Yes Yes Yes Yes nage multiple pages sheets slides on one ves ves Ves Ves Print a brochure Yes No Yes Yes Print envelopes Yes No No No Print labels or business cards Yes No No No Preview pages sheets before printing Yes Yes No No Selecting general printing options On the General tab of the Print dialog you can choose e The printer from the printers available e Which pages to print the number of copies to print and whether to collate multiple copies Range and copies section e Whether to print any comments that are in the document and where to print the comments Some selections may not be available all the time For example if the document contains no comments the Print Comments drop down list does not work Print Comments None document only Comments only Place at end of document Place at end of page Cancel Figure 295 Choosing whether and where to print comments Select the Properties button to display a dialog where you can choose portrait or landscape orientation which paper tray to use and the paper size to print on On the Options tab of the Print dialog Figure 296 the last item Use only paper tray from printer preference is not available in Calc Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 279 General LibreOff
409. r Supports CSS2 Cascading Style Sheets Level 2 for printing documents These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated Export Copy local graphics to Internet Select this option to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP Export Character set Select the appropriate character set for the export Choosing language settings There are several options to customize the language setting in LibreOffice e Install the required dictionaries e Change some locale and language settings e Choose spelling options Install the required dictionaries LibreOffice automatically installs several dictionaries with the program To add other dictionaries be sure you are connected to the Internet and then use Tools gt Language gt More Dictionaries Online LibreOffice will open your default web browser to a page containing links to additional dictionaries that you can install Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 51 When you download the dictionary or dictionaries that you want they will be in the OpenDocument extension format oxt To install these extensions use Tools gt Extension Manager Click on Add located at the bottom of the Extension Manager dialog navigate to the location of your dictionary in oxt format select the oxt dictionary and click Open Change locale and language settings You can change some details of the locale and language settings that Li
410. r own You can assign shortcuts to standard LibreOffice functions or your own macros and save them for use with the entire LibreOffice suite A To adapt shortcut keys to your needs use the Customize dialog as described below computer Be careful when reassigning your operating system s or LibreOffice s predefined shortcut keys Many key assignments are universally understood shortcuts such as F1 for Help and are always expected to provide certain results Although you can easily reset the shortcut key assignments to the LibreOffice defaults changing some common shortcut keys can cause confusion especially if other users share your 358 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 1 Select Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard The Customize dialog opens 2 To have the shortcut key assignment available in all components of LibreOffice select the LibreOffice radio button 3 Next select the required function from the Category and Function lists 4 Now select the desired shortcut keys in the Shortcut keys list and click the Modify button at the upper right 5 Click OK to accept the change Now the chosen shortcut keys will execute the function chosen in step 3 above whenever they are pressed All existing shortcut keys for the currently selected Function are listed in the Keys selection box If the Keys list is empty it indicates that the chosen key combination is free for use If it were not and you wanted to reassign
411. raphs from a digital camera Insert gt Picture gt From File e The Draw Gallery see Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork in this guide for more information Working with 3D objects Although Draw does not match the functionality of the leading drawing or picture editing programs it is capable of producing and editing very good 3D drawings Draw offers two types of 3D objects 3D bodies and 3D shapes Depending on which type you choose there are different methods of editing of a 3D object rotation illumination perspective and so on with 3D shapes being simpler to set up and edit than 3D bodies However 3D bodies currently allow for more customization See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw Guide for more information Exporting graphics Draw saves graphics and images in the open source format odg To save a graphic or the entire file in another format use File gt Export and select a format from the list displayed The graphic formats that Draw can export and save to are listed in Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument in this guide You can also export Draw files to HTML XHTML PDF or Flash PDF export for modules of LibreOffice a and is described in Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing of this guide Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 209 HTML export uses a conversion wizard that creates as many web pages as there are pages in your Draw document You can optionally choos
412. rawing tools Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Icon Tool name Icon Tool name rE Line ends R Select Fa Line Koa m Rectangle Ellipse T Text j Vertical text A Curve Lines and Basic Symbol le Eonar gt arrows shapes 2 shapes me Block arrows in Flowcharts Las Callouts sy Stars When you draw a basic shape or select one for editing the nfo field at the left side in the status bar changes to reflect the present action for example Line created Text frame xxyy selected and so on Drawing a straight line Click on the Line icon f and place the mouse pointer at the point where you want to start the line Figure 175 Drag the mouse while keeping the mouse button pressed Release the mouse button at the point where you want to end the line A selection handle appears at each end of the line showing that this object is the currently selected object The selection handle at the starting point of the line is slightly larger than the other selection handle Starting point B Figure 175 Drawing a straight line Keeping the Shift key pressed while you draw a line restricts the drawing angle of the line to a multiple of 45 degrees 0 45 90 135 and so on This is the default behavior of the Shift key However if the option When creating or moving objects in the Snap position section of Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Draw gt Grid has been selected the action of the Shift ke
413. re than one JRE installed on your computer you can use the LibreOffice Java options page to choose the JRE for LibreOffice to use If you are a system administrator programmer or other person who customizes JRE installations you can use the Parameters and Class Path pages reached from the Java page to specify this information If you do not see anything listed in the middle of the page wait a few minutes while LibreOffice searches for JREs on the hard disk If LibreOffice finds one or more JREs it will display them there You can then select the Use a Java runtime environment option and if necessary choose one of the JREs listed Java options Use a Java runtime environment Java runtime environments JRE already installed Vendor Version Features Add ee sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 71 SSS Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 18 Parameters Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 07 a Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 0oem Class Path 4 ls T H Location C Program Files Java jre6 Figure 34 Choosing a Java runtime environment Online update options On the LibreOffice Online Update page Figure 35 you can choose whether and how often to have the program check the LibreOffice website for program updates If the Check for updates automatically option is selected an icon appears at the right hand end of the menu bar when an update is available Click this icon to open a dialog where you can choose to download the
414. reOffice To close LibreOffice completely choose File gt Exit or close the last open document as described in Closing a document above If all the documents have been saved LibreOffice closes immediately If any documents have been modified but not saved a warning message appears Follow the procedure in Closing a document to save or discard your changes 32 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice Choosing options to suit the way you work Choosing options for all of LibreOffice This section covers some of the settings that apply to all the components of LibreOffice For information on settings not discussed here see the online help Click Tools gt Options The list in the left hand box of the Options LibreOffice dialog varies depending on which component of LibreOffice is open The illustrations in this chapter show the list as it appears when a Writer document is open Click the marker or triangle by LibreOffice on the left hand side A list of pages drops down Selecting an item in the list causes the right hand side of the dialog to display the relevant page Options LibreOffice User Data General Memory View Print Paths Colors Fonts Security Appearance Accessibility Java Online Update Figure 19 LibreOffice options The Back button not shown in the illustration located in the lower right of the full
415. reOffice components Style Type Writer Calc Draw Impress Page X X Paragraph Character X Frame X Numbering X Cell xX Presentation Graphics included in X X Frame styles Applying styles LibreOffice provides several ways for you to select styles to apply Using the Styles and Formatting window 1 Click the Styles and Formatting icon E located at the left hand end of the formatting toolbar or click Format gt Styles and Formatting or press F11 The Styles and Formatting window shows the types of styles available for the LibreOffice component you are using Figure 48 shows the window for Writer with Page Styles visible You can move this window to a convenient position on the screen or dock it to an edge hold down the Ctrl key and drag it by the title bar to where you want it docked 2 Click on one of the icons at the top left of the Styles and Formatting window to display a list of styles in a particular category 3 To apply an existing style except for character styles position the insertion point in the paragraph frame or page and then double click on the name of the style in one of these lists To apply a character style select the characters first At the bottom of the Styles and Formatting window is a drop down list In Figure 48 the window shows Automatic meaning the list includes only styles applied automatically by LibreOffice You can choose to show all styles or other groups
416. referenced in its current location but you cannot edit the library If Insert as reference is not checked however the library is copied to the user s macro directory Macros can be stored in libraries inside LibreOffice documents Select a document rather than a directory on disk as shown in Figure 340 to import libraries contained in a document Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 343 Downloading macros to import Macros are available for download Some macros are contained in documents some as regular files that you must select and import and some as macro text that should be copied and pasted into the Basic IDE use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to open the LibreOffice Macros dialog choose the macro to edit and then click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Some macros are available as free downloads on the Internet See Table 8 Adding an existing macro on page 330 describes how to add these macros to your macros library Table 8 Places to find macro examples Location Description http www ooomacros org Collection of packaged macros now somewhat dated http www pitonyak org oo php Reference materials regarding macros http www pitonyak org database Reference materials regarding database macros http development openoffice org Lots of links to everything http www oooforum org A forum with many examples and help http user servi
417. rinter Having these warnings turned on can be quite helpful particularly if you work with documents produced by people in other countries where the standard paper size is different from yours If your printouts are incorrectly placed on the page or chopped off at the top bottom or sides or the printer is refusing to print the most likely cause is page size incompatibility Path options On the LibreOffice Paths page you can change the location of files associated with or used by LibreOffice to suit your working situation In a Windows system for example you might want to store documents by default somewhere other than My Documents To make changes select an item in the list shown in Figure 26 and click Edit On the Select Path dialog not shown may also be titled Edit Paths add or delete folders as required and then click OK to return to the Options dialog Note that some items can have at least two paths listed one to a shared folder which might be on a network and one to a user specific folder normally on the user s personal computer You can use the entries on the LibreOffice Paths page to compile a list of files such as those containing AutoText that you need to back up or copy to another computer Paths used by LibreOffice Type Path AutoCorrect C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOtfice 3 user aut Auto Text C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice 3 u
418. rinter printing brochures and other printing features Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 103 Using mail merge Writer provides very useful features to create and print e Multiple copies of a document to send to a list of different recipients form letters e Mailing labels e Envelopes All these facilities use a registered data source a spreadsheet or database containing the name and address records and other information Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide describes the process Tracking changes to a document You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document 1 Make your changes to a copy of the document stored in a different folder or under a different name or both then use Writer to combine the two files and show the differences Choose Edit gt Compare Document This technique is particularly useful if you are the only person working on the document as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other methods 2 Save versions that are stored as part of the original file However this method can cause problems with documents of non trivial size or complexity especially if you save a lot of versions Avoid this method if you can 3 Use Writer s change marks often called redlines or revision marks to show where you have added or deleted material or changed formatting Choose Edit gt Changes gt Record Later you or another person can re
419. rking with Objects and Object Points in the Draw Guide Rotating an object To rotate an object or a group of objects select the object then go to rotation mode using one of the following methods e Click on the object again Do not double click as this will cancel object selection e Click on the Rotate icon E on the Drawing toolbar e Go to View gt Toolbars gt Mode and select the Rotate icon eS The selection handles will change shape and color Figure 193 Also a center of rotation point will appear in the center of the object As you move the mouse cursor over the handles the cursor changes shape The corner handles are for rotating an object and the top bottom and side handles are to shear or slant an object Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 197 hte PE Figure 193 Rotating an object Move the mouse cursor to one of the corner handles and it normally changes to an arc with an arrow at each end Click and hold the mouse button then start to move the cursor to rotate the object A dotted outline of the object being rotated appears and the current angle of rotation is shown in the status bar Rotation works differently for 3D objects because rotation occurs in global axes and not in a single axis See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects for more information The rotation point is normally located at the center of an object To change the position of the rotation point click on the object with the mouse cursor and
420. rmine your choices see Table 9 Table 9 Methods for starting a macro Type LibreOffice Document Type Document Toolbar No Yes Yes Menu No Yes Yes Shortcut Yes Yes No Event Yes No Yes To add a menu item keyboard shortcut or toolbar icon that calls a macro use the Customize dialog See Figure 343 Open this dialog in either of these ways e Choose Tools gt Customize from the main menu bar e Each toolbar has an icon that opens a menu choose the Customize Toolbar option Complete coverage of the Customize dialog is beyond the scope of this document Click the Help button to access the help pages included with LibreOffice The Customize dialog contains tabs to configure menus keyboard bindings toolbars and events Toolbar Macros can be added to toolbars For more about modifying toolbars see Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice Menu item Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Menus tab You can modify an existing menu or create new menus that call macros For more about modifying menus see Chapter 14 Keyboard shortcuts Use Tools gt Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Keyboard tab Assigning keyboard shortcuts is discussed in Chapter 14 Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 345 Customize Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events LibreOffice Writer Toolbars Toolbar Standa rd Toolbar Content zi J New J New Docu
421. ro Library hierarchy Use Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to open the LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog see Figure 338 All available library containers are shown in the Macro from list Every document is a library container capable of containing multiple libraries The application itself acts as two library containers one container for macros distributed with LibreOffice called LibreOffice Macros and one container for personal macros called My Macros As shown in Figure 338 only two documents are currently open 340 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 LibreOffice Basic Macros a Macro name Macro from Existing macros in Recorded gt LibreOffice Macros p 0113GS3 Macros MJF_20110806 odt p LibO_GS Macros_Examples odg Organizer L ae i t t L oon Help Figure 338 Library containers are shown on the left The LibreOffice Macros are stored with the application runtime code which may not be editable to you unless you are an administrator This is just as well since these macros should not be changed and you should not store your own macros in the LibreOffice container Unless your macros are applicable to a single document and only to a single document your macros will probably be stored in the My Macros container The My Macros container is stored in your user area or home directory If a macro is contained in a document then a recorded macro will attempt to work on that document
422. rogramming language snippets that you do not want to check for spelling Specifying the language in character and paragraph styles is the preferred method because styles allow a greater level of control and make changing the language much faster On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can specify that certain paragraphs be checked in a language that is different from the language of the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for information on how to manage the language settings of a style You can also set the language for the whole document for individual paragraphs or even for individual words and characters from Tools gt Language on the menu bar Another way to change the language of a whole document is to use Tools gt Options gt Language Settings gt Languages In the Default languages for documents section you can choose a different language for all the text that is not explicitly marked as a different language i The spelling checker works only for those languages in the list that have the symbol next to them If you do not see the symbol next to your preferred language you can install the additional dictionary using Tools gt Languages gt More dictionaries online The language used for checking spelling is also shown in the status bar next to the page style in use Using AutoCorrect Writer s AutoCorrect function has a long list of common misspellings and typing err
423. rray has one property at index zero dim argsi 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue Give the property the name Text and the value Andrew Pitonyak which is the text that is inserted when the macro is run args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Value Andrew Pitonyak This is where the magic happens The dispatch helper sends a dispatch to the document s frame stored in the variable named document with the command uno InsertText The next two arguments frame name and search flags are beyond the scope of this document The last argument is the array of property values to be used while executing the command InsertText dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args1 Finally the end of the subroutine end sub Creating a macro When creating a macro it is important to ask two questions before recording 1 Can the task be written as a simple set of commands 2 Can the steps be arranged such that the last command leaves the cursor ready for the next command A complicated example frequently copy rows and columns of data from a web site and format them as a table in a text document First copy the table from the web site to the clipboard To avoid strange formatting and fonts paste the text into a Writer document as unformatted text reformat the text with tabs between columns so that can use Table gt Convert gt Text to Table to convert to a table inspect the text to s
424. rtical scroll bar for additional text space if desired x Properties Text Box General Data Events Background color J oxoopppppp a a Border s22aa ese 3D look Border color Default Text ype ni Multi line Text lines end with LF Unix SEPOUBATS anini None Password cnaracter j Horizontal Hide selection 00 Additional information Help text c ccccccssssccssses PROT IRR cccectteccesuseeeceees A k Figure 234 Scroll bar selections in the Properties window 1 Control click the Misc Notes field The green handles should surround the field but not its label 2 Click the Control icon to open the Properties window Figure 234 3 Scroll down to the Text type property with single line as the default value Change it to Multi line 4 Scroll down to the Scrollbars setting Change the selection from None to Vertical in this list 5 Close the Properties window Esc key 6 Lengthen the Misc Notes field by moving the cursor over the middle green handle at the bottom of the field and dragging down until the length is 6 cm 2 4 inches 230 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Step 7 Change labels and fields in the subform The subform is located at the bottom of the form We want to widen the Date column and change the label for the PaymentType column to two words e To widen the Date column move the mouse pointer over the dividing line between the Date
425. rting a Microsoft Word or Excel file containing VBA code you can select the option Executable code Whereas normally the code is preserved but rendered inactive if you inspect it with the StarBasic IDE you will notice that it is all commented with this option the code is ready to be executed Microsoft Office Load Save options On the Load Save Microsoft Office page you can choose what to do when importing and exporting Microsoft Office OLE objects linked or embedded objects or documents such as spreadsheets or equations Select the L options to convert Microsoft OLE objects into the corresponding LibreOffice OLE objects when a Microsoft document is loaded into LibreOffice mnemonic L for load Select the S options to convert LibreOffice OLE objects into the corresponding Microsoft OLE objects when a document is saved in a Microsoft format mnemonic S for save Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 49 E Ed WinWord to LibreOffice Writer or reverse Ei Ei Excel to LibreOffice Calc or reverse FJ W PowerPoint to LibreOffice Impress or reverse L Load and conwert the object Convert and sawe the object Figure 39 Choosing Load Save Microsoft Office options HTML compatibility Load Save options Choices made on the Load Save HTML Compatibility page affect HTML pages imported into LibreOffice and those exported from LibreOffice See HTML documents importing exporting in the Help for m
426. ry information every Choose whether to enable AutoRecovery and how often to save the information used by the AutoRecovery process AutoRecovery in LibreOffice overwrites the original file If you also choose Always create backup copy the original file then overwrites the backup copy If you have this set recovering your document after a system crash will be easier but recovering an earlier version of the document may be harder Save URLs relative to file system internet Relative addressing to a file system is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located It is recommended to save relatively if you want to create a directory structure on an Internet server Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version LibreOffice by default saves documents in OpenDocument Format ODF version 1 2 Extended While this allows for improved functionality there may be backwards compatibility issues When a file saved in ODF 1 2 Extended is opened in an editor that uses earlier versions of ODF 1 0 1 1 some of the advanced features may be lost Two notable examples are cross references to headings and the formatting of numbered lists If you plan to share documents with people who use editors which use older versions of ODF save the document using ODF version 1 0 1 1 48 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5
427. s General Initial View User ntertace Links Security Window options User interface options _ Resize window to initial page Hide menubar Center window on screen _ Hide toolbar Open in full screen mode _ Hide window controls al Display document title Transitions Bookmarks v Use transition effects All bookmark levels C Visible bookmark levels 1 Figure 304 User Interface page of PDF Options dialog e Center window on screen Causes the PDF viewer window to be centered on the computer screen e Openin full screen mode Causes the PDF viewer to open full screen instead of in a smaller window e Display document title Causes the PDF viewer to display the document s title in the title bar User interface options section e Hide menubar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the menu bar e Hide toolbar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the toolbar e Hide window controls Causes the PDF viewer to hide other window controls Transitions In Impress displays slide transition effects as their respective PDF effects Bookmarks Select how many heading levels are displayed as bookmarks if Export bookmarks is selected on the General page Links page of PDF Options dialog On the Links page you can choose how links are exported to PDF General Initial View User Interface ks Security Export bookmarks as named d
428. s Presentations in LibreOffice What is Impress Impress is the presentation slide show program included in LibreOffice You can create slides that contain many different elements including text bulleted and numbered lists tables charts anda wide range of graphic objects such as clipart drawings and photographs Impress also includes a spelling checker a thesaurus text styles and background styles This chapter includes instructions screenshots and hints to guide you through the Impress environment while designing your presentations Although more difficult designs are mentioned throughout this chapter explanations for creating them are in the Impress Guide If you have a working knowledge of how to create slide shows we recommend you use the Impress Guide for your source of information To use Impress for more than very simple slide shows requires some knowledge of the elements which the slides contain Slides containing text use styles to determine the appearance of that text Creating drawings in Impress is similar to the Draw program included in LibreOffice For this reason we recommend that you also see Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates and Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw in this book You may also wish to consult the Draw Guide for more details on how to use the drawing tools Starting Impress You can start Impress in several ways e From the LibreOffice Start Center if no component is open click on the Presen
429. s When you select a Fontwork object eight colored squares known as handles appear around the edge of the object as shown below You can drag these handles to resize the object A yellow dot also appears on the object This dot may be m E E along an edge of the object or it may be somewhere else see figure to right for an example If you hover the pointer over this yellow dot the pointer turns into a hand symbol You can drag the dot in different directions to distort the object Hovering the pointer over other parts of the object turns the pointer into the usual symbol for dragging the object to another part of the page For precise control of the location and size of the object use the Position and Size dialog Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 313 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages Saving Documents as HTML Files Introduction This chapter describes how to do the following in Writer Calc Draw and Impress e Create hyperlinks within a document and to other documents such as web pages PDFs and other files e Save documents as web pages HTML documents When creating a document that you plan to deliver as a web page you need to consider the following e In an HTML document hyperlinks are active clickable but other cross references inserted by LibreOffice are not active links e An object such as a image is saved as a separate file However if that ob
430. s it is recommended to use LibreOffice Draw which includes many more features such as layers styles and so on Creating drawing objects To begin using the drawing tools display the Drawing toolbar Figure 319 by clicking View gt Toolbars gt Drawing If you are planning to use the drawing tools repeatedly you can tear off this toolbar and move it to a convenient place on the window 306 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 TIILI IILL Lilie 1 23 45 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 Select 5 Freeform Line 9 Symbol Shapes 13 Stars 2 Line 6 Text 10 Block arrows 14 Points 3 Rectangle 7 Callouts 11 Flowcharts 15 Fontwork Gallery 4 Ellipse 8 Basic Shapes 12 Graphic Callouts 16 From File 17 Extrusion On Off Figure 319 The Drawing toolbar To use a drawing tool 1 Click in the document where you want the drawing to be anchored You can change the anchor later if necessary 2 Choose the tool from the Drawing toolbar Figure 319 The mouse pointer changes toa drawing functions pointer o 3 Move the cross hair pointer to the place in the document where you want the graphic to appear and then click and drag to create the drawing object Release the mouse button The selected drawing function remains active so that you can draw another object of the same type 4 To cancel the selected drawing function press the Esc key or click on the Select icon the arrow on the Drawing toolbar 5 You can now change the propert
431. s Guide If you selected From template on step 1 of the Wizard the Next button will be active on step 3 and other pages will be available These pages are not described here Remember to save frequently while working on the presentation to prevent any loss of information should something unexpected occur You might also want to activate the AutoRecovery function Tools gt Options gt Load Save General Make sure A Save AutoRecovery information every is selected and that you have entered a recovery frequency Formatting a presentation A new presentation contains only one empty slide In this section we will start adding new slides and preparing them for the intended contents Inserting slides This can be done in a variety of ways take your pick e Insert gt Slide e Right click on the present slide and select Slide gt New Slide from the pop up menu e Click the Slide icon In the Presentation toolbar Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 161 Sometimes rather than starting from a new slide you want to duplicate a slide you have already inserted To duplicate a slide select the slide you want from the Slides pane and then choose Insert gt Duplicate Slide Selecting a layout In the Tasks pane select the Layout drawer to display the available layouts Figure 152 The Layouts differ in the number of elements a slide will contain from a blank slide to a slide with six contents boxes and a title T
432. s icon on the Relation Design window 2 On the Add Tables dialog use either of these ways to add a table to the Relation Design window Double click the name of the table In our case do this for both Vacations and Fuel Or click the name of the table and then click Add for each table 3 Click Close to close the Add Tables dialog when you have added the tables you want Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 221 4 You can define the relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables in two ways e Click and drag the Date field in the Fuel table to the Date field in the Vacations table When you release the mouse button a connecting line forms between the two date fields Figure 220 Or click the New Relation icon This opens the Relations window Figure 221 Our two tables are listed in the Tables involved section a In the Fields involved section click the drop down list under the Fuel label b Select Date from the Fuel table list c Click in the cell to the right of this drop down list This opens a drop down list for the Vacations table d Select Date from the Vacations table list It should now look like Figure 221 e Click OK Vacations Fuel FuellD i FuelGost 0 FuelQuanity fella master Date Odometer Breakfast Lun Figure 220 Designation for a 1 n relationship Tables involved Fuel T Vacations T Fields involved Vacations Date Date
433. s not available in Math you can add it to the catalog yourself The following example shows the procedure for symbols that are used in marking school work 1 Go to Tools gt Catalog or click on the catalog button to open the Symbols catalog Figure 279 2 Click the Edit button The Edit symbols window Figure 290 opens 3 The symbols are arranged in so called symbol sets In the lower part of the window choose an available set for your new symbol from the Symbol set list for example the Special set Or you can type the name of a new symbol set directly into the box 4 From the Font list choose a font that contains the desired symbol Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 273 When you have selected a font its characters appear in the font summary window You can scroll through it using the scrollbar at the side or use the Subset list to go straight to the place you need To follow this example choose the font DejaVu Sans and the subset General punctuation 5 Click on the desired symbol here Ux2032 It appears enlarged in the right hand preview box see Figure 291 Make sure that the symbol set is set to Special 6 Inthe Symbol field enter a name for the symbol for example prime 7 Ifthe name is not already in use the Add button becomes active Click on it 8 You can immediately add more symbols In the example the U 2033 symbol named dblprime and the U 2034 symbol named triprime are added see Fig
434. s sheets slides ranges of pages sheets slides or a selection of a document The details vary slightly in Writer Calc Draw and Impress as described in this section In Writer to print two pages per sheet in facing pages book layout style print from Print Preview instead See page 286 Writer Printing an individual page 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog select the page to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the General page select the Pages option b Enter the sequence number of the page you want to print This may differ from the page number if you have restarted page numbering within the document The preview box changes to show the selected page 3 Click the Print button Printing a range of pages 1 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog select the range of pages to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the General page select the Pages option b Enter the sequence numbers of the pages to print for example 1 4 or 1 3 7 11 3 Click the Print button Printing a selection of text 1 Inthe document select the material text and graphics to print 2 Choose File gt Print from the menu bar 3 The Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog now includes a Selection option and the preview box shows the selected material See Figure 298 4 Click the Print button Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 281
435. s that make up the group can always be manipulated separately The objects within a group also retain their own individual properties Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 207 Combining objects is a permanent merging of objects that creates a new object The original objects are no longer available as individual entities and cannot be edited as individual objects Any editing of a combined object affects all the objects that were used when combination was carried out Grouping Temporary grouping A temporary grouping is when several objects are selected using the Select icon R on the Drawing toolbar or using the mouse to drag a rectangle around the objects also known as a marquee Any changes to object parameters you carry out are applied to all of the objects within the temporary group For example you can rotate a temporary group of objects in its entirety To cancel a temporary grouping of objects simply click outside of the selection handles displayed around the objects Permanent grouping A permanent grouping of objects is created after you have selected your objects and then going to Modify gt Group on the main menu bar or right clicking on the selection and select Group from the context menu or using the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Shift G When you deselect your selection the objects remain grouped together When objects are permanently grouped any editing operations carried out on that group are applied to all me
436. s with only the label or the field and there are times when we want to work with a group of controls e Clicking a label or field selects the entire control A border appears around the control with eight green handles You can then drag and drop it where you want oO O oO Date y Figure 228 A selected control e Control click a label or field selects only the label or the field You can press the Tab key to change the selection from the field to the label or the label to the field Date Figure 229 Selecting a field of a control e Moving a group of controls is almost as easy as moving one of them 1 Click the field of the top left control to be moved to select it 2 Move the cursor to just above and to the left of the selected control 3 Drag the cursor to the bottom right of the group of controls and release the mouse button As you drag the cursor a dashed box appears showing what is contained in your selection Make sure it is big enough to include the entire length of all the controls When you release the mouse button a border with its green handles appears around the controls you selected Oo Oo Breakfast Payment Figure 230 Selecting multiple controls Move the cursor over one of the fields It changes to a drag icon Drag the group of controls to where you want them e Click the Tolls control to select it Then drag it to the right close to the Lunch control When either changing size or moving a contr
437. saving Recommend password protection on saving W Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks OK Cancel Help Figure 31 Security options and warnings dialog Appearance options Writing editing and especially page layout are often easier when you can see the page margins text boundaries the boundaries of tables and sections in Writer documents page breaks in Calc grid lines in Draw or Writer and other features In addition you might prefer to use colors that are different from LibreOffice s defaults for such items as note indicators or field shadings On the LibreOffice Appearance page Figure 32 you can specify which items are visible and the colors used to display various items e To show or hide items such as text boundaries select or deselect the options next to the names of the items e To change the default colors for items click the down arrow in the Color Setting column by the name of the item and select a color from the pop up box e To save your color changes as a color scheme click Save type a name in the Scheme box then click OK 44 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Color scheme Scheme Libre ffice Save Custom colors On User interface elements Color setting Preview General a roa i m m Document background Automatic M V Text boundaries O Aiiamahe E Application background E Automatic V Object boundaries
438. security number for each name If you are acquainted with mathematical sets a relational database can easily be explained in terms of sets elements subsets unions and intersections The fields of a database are the elements The tables are subsets Relationships are defined in terms of unions and intersections of the subsets tables To explain how a database works and how to to use it we will create one for automobile expenses 212 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Planning a database The first step in creating a database is to ask yourself many questions Write them down and leave some space between the questions to write the answers later At least some of the answers should seem obvious after you take some time to think You may have to go through this process a few times before everything becomes clear in your mind and on paper Using a text document for these questions and answers makes it easier to move the questions around add additional questions or change the answers Here are some of the questions and answers developed before created a database for automobile expenses had an idea of what wanted before started but as began asking questions and listing the answers discovered that needed additional tables and fields What are the fields going to be My expenses divided into three broad areas fuel purchases maintenance and vacations The annual cost for the car s license plate and driver s lic
439. ser aut Backups C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice 3 user bac Gallery C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice s user gal Graphics C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice 3 user gal My Documents C Users Ron s Laptop Documents Templates C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice 3 useriten Temporary files C Users RON SL L AppData Local Temp 4 P ieee e Default Edit Figure 26 Viewing the paths of files used by LibreOffice 40 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Color options On the LibreOffice Colors page you can specify colors to use in LibreOffice documents You can select a color from a color table edit an existing color and define new colors These colors are stored in your color palette and are then available in all components of LibreOffice Properties Name Blue amp Add Color ewes Ls eo E Color table Edit TITTIILLLEE ee eee ED ET Ree x Baeten BERADA m jTiiii iit EET Se Tt cd oe fo Sa TPE mEn D__CRRRE T 1 oe 204 rg I G Figure 27 Defining colors to use in color palettes in LibreOffice To modify a color 1 Select the color to modify from the list or the color table 2 Enter the new values that define the color You can choose the RGB Red Green Blue or the CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black system to specify your color The changed color appears in the lower of the two color pr
440. sily recognizable from the thumbnail 2 Click in the text box that reads Click to add an outline 3 Type the text then press Enter to start a new bulleted line The methods for switching between bulleted and numbered lists are explained in Changing the appearance of the list on page 169 Press Shift Enter to start a new line without creating a new bullet or number The new line will have the same indentation of the previous line To switch off bullets altogether click the bullets button on the text formatting toolbar If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it selecting View gt Toolbar gt Text Formatting Figure 143 in the menu bar Creating lists in other text boxes To create a list in a text box follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the text box 2 Click the Bullets On Off button on the text formatting toolbar 3 Type the text and press Enter to start a new bulleted line 4 The default list type is a bulleted list Methods for changing the appearance of the list are explained on page 169 Creating a new outline level 1 If necessary press Enter to begin a new line 2 Press Tab or click the indentation arrows in the text formatting toolbar Each time you press Tab or click the right arrow the line indents to the next outline level Pressing Enter creates a new line at the same level as the previous one To return to the previous level press Shift Tab or click the left arrow In the
441. sks if you want to embed the graphic instead Choose Keep Link if you want the link or Embed Graphic if you do not To prevent this message from appearing again deselect the box by Ask when linking a graphic at the bottom of the message 298 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Insert picture Users jean Pictures SouthAustralia2011 FlindersRanges Call fe El Title Type Size Date modified i P1030884 JPE Graphics jpq 5 05 MB 05 06 2011 16 07 34 EI P1030885 JPG Graphics jpq 3 21 MB 05 06 2011 16 10 44 P1030886 PG Graphics jpq 3 42 MB 05 06 2011 16 11 00 P1O3 0887 JPG Graphics jpq 5 08 MB 05 06 2011 16 11 46 P1030888 PG Graphics jpq 5 02 MB 05 06 2011 16 33 54 P1030889 JPG Graphics jpg 4 96 MB 05 06 2011 16 34 02 Graphics jpg 4 59 MB 05 06 2011 16 34 06 Graphics jpg 4 80 MB 05 06 2011 16 34 12 isi P1030892 1PG Graphics ipa 4 91 MB 05 06 2011 16 34 18 File name P1030890 JPG Style Graphics File type Link 4 Preview Figure 313 Insert picture dialog Linking an image file If the Link option in the Insert picture dialog is selected LibreOffice creates a link to the file containing the image instead of saving a copy of the image in the document The result is that the image is displayed in the document but when the document is saved it contains only a reference to the image file not the image itself The document and the image remain as two separate
442. slide transition the new slide is previewed in the Slide Design area including its transition effect Automatic slides advance You can set the presentation to automatically advance to the next slide after a set amount of time from the Slide Transition section in the Task pane Go to Advance slide and select Automatically after then choose the required amount of time in seconds that each slide will be displayed Click on the Apply to All Slides button to apply the same display time to all slides To apply a different display time to each slide in your presentation choose Slide Show gt Rehearse Timings Start the slide show and a small timer is displayed in the bottom left corner When you are ready to advance to the next slide mouse click on the display background or press the right arrow on your keyboard Impress will memorize the timings for each slide and advance to the slide automatically after each timing ends when you run the slide show To automatically restart a slide show after the last slide has been displayed go to Slide Show gt Slide Show Settings on the menu bar Select Auto and the timing of the pause between slide shows Click OK when you have finished 178 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Running a slide show To run a slide show do one of the following e Click Slide Show gt Slide Show on the menu bar e Click the Slide Show icon on the Presentation toolbar e Press F5 on the keyboard If the slide tra
443. st of the changes that can be reapplied To modify the number of changes LibreOffice remembers choose Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Memory and in the Undo section change Number of steps Be aware that asking LibreOffice to remember more changes consumes more computer memory Closing a document To close a document choose File gt Close You can also close a document by clicking on the Close icon on the document window This button looks like the X shown in Figure 18 It may be in a different location on your operating system Figure 18 Close icons If more than one LibreOffice window is open each window looks like the sample shown on the left in Figure 18 Closing this window leaves the other LibreOffice windows open If only one LibreOffice window is open it looks like the sample shown on the right in Figure 18 Notice the small x below the large X Clicking the small x closes the document but leaves LibreOffice open Clicking the large X closes LibreOffice completely If the document has not been saved since the last change a message box is displayed Choose whether to save or discard your changes e Save The document is saved and then closed e Discard The document is closed and all modifications since the last save are lost e Cancel Nothing happens and you return to the document Not saving your document could result in the loss of recently made changes or worse still your entire file Closing Lib
444. t Position Before current sheet 0 After current sheet Cancel Sheet Help New sheet Mo of sheets 1 Name Sheet From file Figure 108 Insert Sheet dialog 122 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Moving and copying sheets You can move or copy sheets within the same spreadsheet by using either the mouse drag and drop or a dialog Drag and drop does not work if you wish to move or copy a sheet to a different spreadsheet instead you need to use the dialog Using the mouse To move a sheet to a different position within the same spreadsheet click on the sheet tab and drag it left or right Two little triangles indicate where the sheet will be dropped see Figure 109 The mouse pointer not shown in the illustration may change to include an indicator the indicator symbol varies with your operating system 32 33 atj illa llel Sheet1 sree aens ar Sheet 1 3 Default Figure 109 Dragging a sheet to move it To copy a sheet within the same spreadsheet hold down the Control key Option key on Mac while you click on the sheet tab and drag it The mouse pointer may change to include a plus sign or other indicator the symbol varies with your operating system Using a dialog The Move Copy dialog provides the opportunity to specify exactly where you want the sheet to go in the same or a different document and what its name will be at the same time as moving or copying occurs When moving or c
445. t To E mail 4ddress Copy to Subject 6 Save print or send Send as HTML Message best email message odt Send all documents J From l 5 Send documents Figure 312 Sending a document as an email message 7 Type a subject for your email and click Send documents LibreOffice sends the e mails Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 295 Digital signing of documents To sign a document digitally you need a personal key also Known as a certificate A personal key is stored on your computer as a combination of a private key which must be kept secret anda public key which you add to your documents when you sign them You can get a certificate from a certification authority which may be a private company or a governmental institution When you apply a digital signature to a document a kind of checksum is computed from the document s content plus your personal key The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of LibreOffice the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum If both are the same the program will signal that you see the original unchanged document In addition the program can show you the public key information from the certificate You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority When
446. t Draw or Impress you can also change the Internet link character style or define and apply new styles to selected links You can also insert hyperlinks using the Navigator and the Hyperlink dialog and you can modify all hyperlinks using the Hyperlink dialog as described in this section Using the Navigator The easiest way to insert a hyperlink to another part of the same document is by using the Navigator 1 Open the documents containing the items you want to cross reference 2 Open the Navigator by clicking its icon 2 by choosing View gt Navigator or by pressing F5 3 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and choose Insert as Hyperlink See Figure 328 4 Inthe list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference 5 Inthe Navigator list select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink 6 Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink BE H HaHa Insert as Hyperlink Insert as Link Insert as Copy v Headings Copyright Introduction Relative and absolute hyperli Creating hyperlinks Saving Calc spreadsheets as Saving Impress presentation l gt 0112GS3 CreatingWebPages JS Jv Figure 328 Inserting a hyperlink using the Navigator When using the Navigator to hyperlink to an object such as a graphic to have the
447. t can have many individual cells In Calc 3 3 each sheet can have a maximum of 1 048 576 rows and 1024 columns Parts of the main Calc window When Calc is started the main window looks similar to Figure 94 Title bar The Title bar located at the top shows the name of the current spreadsheet When the spreadsheet is newly created its name is Untitled X where X is anumber When you save a spreadsheet for the first time you are prompted to enter a name of your choice Menu bar Under the Title bar is the Menu bar When you choose one of the menus a submenu appears with other options You can modify the Menu bar as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 110 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Untitled 2 LibreOffice Calc title bar z x Title bar I File Edit View Insert Format Tools Datag Wi dow Menu bar Title bar Standard toolbar u bar OM EEN BBR VE KEES Si by Aaea o oe ra WN Bs U ESI ee o B A Pi A baz SEE eS a EE ee ee aaa ae Formatting Active cell Active cell toolbar reference Column Headers Name box uw Sheet tabs Status bar lt 1 Sheet 1 3 Default STD Sum 0 O 100 DOON Sheet1 Sheet Z Sheet 7 Figure 94 Parts of the Calc window Toolbars Three toolbars are located under the Menu bar by default the Standard to toolbar the Formatting toolbar and the Formula Bar The icons buttons on these toolbars prov
448. t is added as a reference In a workgroup you may have access to a shared Gallery where you cannot change the contents unless authorized to do so and a user Gallery where you can add change or delete objects The location of the user Gallery is specified in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Paths You can change this location and you can copy your gallery files sdv to other computers Gallery contents provided with LibreOffice are stored in a different location You cannot change this location 304 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Creating an image map An image map defines areas of an image called hotspots with hyperlinks to web addresses other files on the computer or parts of the same document Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks described in Chapter 12 Clicking on a hotspot causes LibreOffice to open the linked page in the appropriate program for example the default browser for an HTML page LibreOffice Calc for a ODS file a PDF viewer for a PDF file You can create hotspots of various shapes and include several hotspots in the same image To use the image map editor 1 In your LibreOffice document select the picture where you want to define the hotspots 2 Choose Edit gt ImageMap from the menu bar The ImageMap Editor Figure 318 opens 3 Use the tools and fields in the dialog described below to define the hotspots and links necessary 4 Click the Apply icon S to appl
449. t using File gt Templates gt Save To define this template as your default template select File gt Templates gt Organize and double click on My Templates Right click on the template you just created and choose Set As Default Template If you wish to return to the default template given at installation use the command Reset Default Template New text documents will be based on this template 1 Font files for STIX are available from http www stixfonts org 2 Font files for DejaVu Sans are available from http Awww dejavu fonts org 3 Lucida Sans belongs to the JRE package which is probably already on your computer Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 275 Application to chemical formulas Math was designed to build mathematical formulas but it can also be used to write chemical formulas In chemistry formulas look like H20 names are usually non italic uppercase To write chemical formulas with Math you may begin with setting non italic for variables see Changing the font on page 269 Here some examples of chemical formulas Construction Example Entry Molecules H SO H_2 SO_4 please note the space Isotopes SU U lsub 92 lsup 238 lons SO SO_44 2 or SO_44 2 Notes lsub or Lsup are abreviations for left subscript and left superscript Empty braces after 2 are necessary to avoid errors as there is no right member after the minus sign For reversible reactions there
450. tation you must first add the signs to the catalog Using single and double quotes is typographically ugly See Customizing the catalog on page 273 Markup characters as regular characters Characters that are used for controlling markup cannot be entered directly as normal characters The characters concerned are amp _ and So for example you cannot write 2 0 02 or 1 2 56cm Two methods are available to overcome this limitation e Use double quotes to mark the character as text for example 2 0 02 Obviously this is not possible for the double quote character itself e Add the character to the catalog See the section Customizing the catalog on page 273 In some cases you can use commands e Ibrace and rbrace give you literal braces e mline gives you the vertical line for example 2 mline 3 for 2 3 Conversion into a character entity as in HTML or the use of an escape character is not possible in Math Text in a formula To include text in a formula enclose it in straight double quotes abs x left lbrace matrix x for x gt 0 x for x lt O right none x for x 0 X x x for x lt 0 All characters except double quotes are permissible in text Unfortunately the Special characters dialog is not available If necessary you can write the text in a text document and copy it into the equation editor via the clipboard In this way smart quotes can be inserted as shown
451. tation Backgrounds Edit Presentations Organizer Figure 56 Saving a new template 4 Inthe New template field type a name for the new template Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 67 5 In the Categories list click the category to which you want to assign the template The category you choose has no effect on the template itself it is simply the folder in which you save the template Choosing an appropriate category makes it easier to find the template when you want to use it For example you might save Impress templates under the Presentations category To learn more about template folders see Organizing templates on page 73 6 Click OK to save the new template Any settings that can be added to or modified in a document can be saved in a template For example below are some of the settings although not a full list that can be included in a Writer document and then saved as a template for later use e Printer settings which printer single sided or double sided printing paper size and so on e Styles to be used including character page frame numbering and paragraph styles e Format and settings regarding indexes tables bibliographies table of contents Templates can also contain predefined text saving you from having to type it every time you create a new document For example a letter template may contain your name address and salutation You can also save menu and
452. tation icon e From the system menu the standard menu from which most applications are started On Windows it is called the Start menu On Gnome it is called the Applications menu On KDE it is identified by the KDE logo On Mac OS X it is the Applications menu Details vary with your operating system see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice e On Windows use the Presentation selection in the LibreOffice Quickstarter Similar functions exist for Mac and Linux see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice e From any open component of LibreOffice Click the triangle to the right of the New icon on the main toolbar and select Presentation from the drop down menu or choose File gt New gt Presentation from the menu bar When LibreOffice was installed on your computer in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to your system menu The exact name and location of these menu entries depend on the operating system and graphical user interface When you start Impress for the first time the Presentation Wizard is shown Here you can choose from the following options e Empty presentation which gives you a blank document e From template which is a presentation designed with a template of your choice e Open existing presentation e Click Create to open the main Impress window For detailed instructions about how to use the Presentation Wizard see Creating a new presentation on page 159 If you prefer not to use the Present
453. tch document uno InsertObject 0 Array It is not possible to specify what kind of object to create or insert If an object is inserted from a file you cannot specify which file to insert recorded a macro and used Tools gt Options to open and modify configuration items The generated macro does not record any configuration changes in fact the generated code is commented so it will not even be run rem dispatcher executeDispatch document uno OptionsTreeDialog 0 Array If a dialog is opened the command to open the dialog is likely to be generated Any work done inside the dialog is not usually recorded Examples include macro organization dialogs inserting special characters and similar types of dialogs Other possible problems using the macro recorder include things such as inserting a formula setting user data setting filters in Calc actions in database forms and exporting a document to an encrypted PDF file You never Know for certain what will work unless you try it however The actions from the search dialog are properly captured for example Other options When the macro recorder is not able to solve a specific problem the usual solution is to write code using the LibreOffice objects Unfortunately there is a steep learning curve for the objects It is usually best to start with simple examples and then branch out slowly as you learn more Learning to read generated macros is a good place to start
454. tcuts This appendix lists some of the most common built in keyboard shortcuts that apply to all components of LibreOffice For shortcuts specific to Writer Calc Impress Draw or Base read the relevant component guide or search the application Help Some of the shortcuts listed here may not work if your operating system uses the same shortcuts for other tasks To resolve any conflicts assign different keys to these shortcuts by reconfiguring either LibreOffice see Chapter 14 or your operating system see system documentation Tip for Macintosh users Some keystrokes are different on a Mac from those used in Windows and Linux The following table gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this chapter For a more detailed list see the application Help Windows or Linux Mac equivalent Effect Right click Control click Opens a context menu Ctrl Control d Command Used with other keys F5 Shift d F5 Opens the Navigator F11 T Opens the Styles and Formatting window 364 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 General keyboard shortcuts Opening menus and menu items Shortcut Keys Result Opens a menu where lt gt is the underlined character of the menu Alt lt gt you want to open For example A t T opens the menu Tools Opens a menu item where lt gt is the underlined character of the Alt lt gt lt gt menu you want to open and lt gt is the item within that menu
455. te a report based upon the query We will create two reports one listing the expenses each day other than fuel and the second listing fuel statistics The fields we need for the first report from the Vacations table are Date Motel Toll Breakfast Lunch Supper SnackCost and Miscellaneous This report only requires the Vacation table Had the report listed the total expenses for each of these fields we would have to create a query to provide us with these totals The second report involves the Fuel table Since this table includes fuel purchases at times other than during the vacation we need to create a query that contains only the fuel purchased during the vacation Static vs dynamic reports When creating a report using the Report Wizard you have a choice of two types of reports in the last page of the wizard static or dynamic What you should select depends more upon whether you have a working Report Builder extension or not If this extension works in your version of LibreOffice you should select dynamic every time Otherwise your selection should depend upon whether you want to update the report later In this case select dynamic If you choose static the report will always contain the data for the original report date LibreOffice has always included the Report Builder extension For some reason it does not work in some versions For these creating a report is done the same way as is done using OpenOffice org 3 3 and the G
456. te the entries and add group separators To begin select the menu or submenu to be modified from the Menu list near the top of the Customize page then select the entry in the Entries list under Menu Content Click the Modify button and choose the required action from the drop down list of actions Most of the actions should be self explanatory Begin a group adds a separator line after the highlighted entry Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice and adding or deleting icons commands in the list of those available on a toolbar You can also create new toolbars This section describes how to create new toolbars and add or delete icons on existing ones To get to the toolbar customization dialog do any of the following e On the toolbar click the arrow at the end of the toolbar and choose Customize Toolbar e Choose View gt Toolbars gt Customize from the menu bar e Choose Tools gt Customize from the menu bar and go to the Toolbars page aye Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events LibreOffice Writer Toolbars Toolbar Standard Lvl le Toolbar Toolbar Content Commands E Load URL ir F New F A New Document From Templat GB open I Save F I ave AS E Document as E mail WN a bee a Tel aa Feit File e lj lt r ii DL
457. te to delete the lower case s and then press S to add an upper case S 6 Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the start of the number 7 Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to select and move the cursor before the sign 8 Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard 9 Press End to move the cursor to the end of the line 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces 11 Press Home to move the cursor to the start of the line 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the line 13 Pasting the value also pasted an extra space so press Backspace to remove the extra space 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name 15 Press Home to move to the start of the line 16 Press down arrow to move to the next line 17 Stop recording the macro and save the macro It takes much longer to read and write the steps than to record the macro Work slowly and think about the steps as you do them With practice this becomes second nature The generated macro has been modified to contain the step number in the comments to match the code to the step above 336 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Listing 5 Copy the numeric value to the start of the column sub CopyNumToCol1 rem 2 2 enn nr rr ne eee ee eee eee rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem e ee eee eee ee eee eee rem get access to
458. template You can do this in two ways In both cases for best results the names of styles should be the same in the existing document and the new template If they are not you will need to use Edit gt Find amp Replace to replace old styles with new ones See Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer for more about replacing styles using Find amp Replace 72 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Method 1 This method includes any graphics and wording such as legal notices that exists in the new template as well as including styles If you do not want this material you need to delete it 1 Use File gt New gt Templates and Documents Choose the template you want If the template has unwanted text or graphics in it delete them 2 Open the document you want to change It opens in a new window Press Control A to select everything in the document Paste into the blank document created in step 1 3 Update the table of contents if there is one Save the file Method 2 Writer only This method does not include any graphics or text from the new template except material in headers and footers it simply includes styles from the new template and establishes an association between the template and the document 1 Open the document whose template you want to change Choose File gt Templates gt Assign Template current document 2 Inthe Select Template window find and select the required template and click Open 3 Save
459. ter Pages Here you define the page slide style for your presentation Impress includes several designs of Master Pages slide masters One of them Default is blank and the rest have background and styled text Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window where you can modify the styles used in any master page to suit your purpose This can be done at any time Layout The layouts included in Impress are shown here You can choose the one you want and use it as it is or you can modify it to meet your own requirements However it is not possible to save custom layouts Table Design The standard table styles are provided in this section You can further modify the appearance of a table with the options to show or hide specific rows and columns or to apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Custom Animation A variety of animations can be used to emphasize or enhance different elements of each slide The Custom Animation section provides an easy way to add change or remove animations Slide Transition The Slide Transition section provides access to a number of slide transition options The default is set to No Transition in which the following slide simply replaces the existing one However many additional transitions are available You can also specify the transition speed slow medium fast choose between an automatic or manual transition and choose how long the selected slide should be shown automatic transi
460. ter Sheet Page order _ Left to right then down F i First page number 1 ry Print C Column and row headers Charts L Grid Drawing objects C Notes L Formulas Objects graphics Zero values Scale Scaling mode Reduce enlarge printout Scaling factor 100 Figure 133 The Sheet tab of the Page Style dialog Details You can specify which details to print These details include e Row and column headers e Sheet grid prints the borders of the cells as a grid e Comments prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet on a separate page along with the corresponding cell reference e Objects and graphics e Charts e Drawing objects e Formulas prints the formulas contained in the cells instead of the results e Zero Values prints cells with a zero value Remember that since the print detail options are a part of the page s properties they are also a part of the page style s properties Therefore different page styles can be set up to quickly change the print properties of the sheets in the spreadsheet Scale Use the scale features to control the number of pages the data will print on This can be useful if a large amount of data needs to be printed compactly or if you want the text enlarged to make it easier to read e Reduce Enlarge printout scales the data in the printout either larger or smaller For example if a sheet would normally print o
461. th of each field must be specified on creation It is not easy to change this later so if in doubt specify a greater length Base uses VCHAR as the field format for text fields This format uses only the actual number of characters in a field up to the limit set so a field containing 20 characters will occupy only 20 characters even if the limit is set at 100 Two album titles containing 25 and 32 characters respectively will use space for 25 and 32 characters and not 100 characters e Format Only change the Entry Required setting from No to Yes e Notes No changes are required e NumberofTracks Change the Field Type to Tiny Integer TINYINT Your allowable number of tracks will be 999 Small Integer SMALLINT would allow 99999 tracks if you needed more than 999 tracks e Photo Use the default settings When you have finished click Next Each field has a Field Type which must be specified Types include text integer date and decimal If the field is going to have general information in it for example a name or a description use text If the field will always contain a number for example a price the type should be decimal or another numerical field The wizard picks the right field type so to get an idea of how this works see what the wizard has chosen for different fields Step 3 Set primary key 1 Create a primary key should be checked 2 Select option Use an existing field as a primary key 3 Inthe Fieldna
462. than embed however this is not necessary as LibreOffice embeds in the document only one copy of the image file Embedding linked images If you originally linked the images you can easily embed one or more of them later if you wish To do so 1 Open the document in LibreOffice and choose Edit gt Links Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 299 2 The Edit Links dialog Figure 314 shows all the linked files In the Source file list select the files you want to change from linked to embedded 3 Click the Break Link button 4 Save the document Going the other way from embedded to linked is not so easy you must delete and reinsert the images one at a time selecting the Link option when you do so eno Edit Links Source file Element Type Status Cine file Use P1030890JPC lt Allformats gt Graphic Manual file Use IMG_3038 JPC lt All formats gt Graphic Manual Help file Use P1040090 JPC lt All formats gt Graphic Manual _ Update Modify Break Link Source file file Users jean Pictures SouthAustralia2011 FlindersRanges P1lO30890 JPG Element lt All formats gt Type Graphic Update Automatic gt Manual Figure 314 The Edit Links dialog Inserting an image from the clipboard Using the clipboard you can copy images into a LibreOffice document from another LibreOffice document and from other programs To do this 1 Open both the source document and the t
463. the Print dialogs supplied with LibreOffice will be used This book uses the LibreOffice Print dialogs in illustrations Document status Printing sets document modified status If this option is selected then the next time you close the document after printing the print date is recorded in the document properties as a change and you will be prompted to save the document again even if you did not make any other changes Document status Allow to save document even when the document is not modified Normally when a document has not been modified the File gt Save menu option and the Save icon on the Standard toolbar are disabled and the keyboard shortcut Ctr S has no effect Select this option to allow documents to be saved even when they have not been modified Year two digits Specifies how two digit years are interpreted For example if the two digit year is set to 1930 and you enter a date of 1 1 30 or later into your document the date is interpreted as 1 1 1930 or later An earlier date is interpreted as being in the following century that is 1 1 20 is interpreted as 1 1 2020 Enable experimental unstable features To try out two experimental features in LibreOffice in line formula editing and macro recording select this option Memory options In the Options dialog click LibreOffice gt Memory These options control how LibreOffice uses your computer s memory and how much memory it requires Before changing
464. the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem 2 Press Ctrl Right Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem 3 Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem ne ene en nr re ee eee eee eee dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 4 Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name dim args4 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args4 0 Name Text args4 0 Value CHR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args4 rem 5 Press Delete to delete the lower case s dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Delete 0 Array rem 5 and then press S to add an upper case S dim args6 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args6 0 Name Text args6 0 Value S dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args6 rem 6 Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the number dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem ne ene en ne ee eee ee eens dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem 7 Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to select the number
465. the left Figure 227 5 Click Next 224 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Select the fields of your subform Tables or queries al Available fields a Fields in the form Date FuelCost FuelQuanity Odometer PaymentT ype Figure 227 Selecting fields of a sub form Step 4 Get joined fields This step is for tables or queries for which no relationship has been defined Because we have already defined the relationship the wizard skips this step their field types are Date DATE It is possible to create a relationship between two tables that is based upon more than one pair of fields How to do that and why is discussed in the Base Guide When selecting a pair of fields from two tables to use as a relationship they have to have the same field type That is why we used the Date field from both tables both Whether a single pair of fields from two tables are chosen as the relationship or two or more pairs are chosen certain requirements must be met for the form to work A e No field from the subform can be the Primary key for its table FuellD cannot be used would have to be used e Each pair of joined fields must have the same file type e One ofthe fields from the main form must be the Primary key for its table Date I a _ _ lt m a As Data Sheet Arrangement of the subform Arrange
466. the left choose the category for the AutoText entry for example My Auto Text 6 Click the AutoText button on the right and select New text only from the menu 7 Click Close to return to your document If the only option under the AutoText button is Import either you have not entered a name for your AutoText or there is no text selected in the document Inserting AutoText To insert AutoText type the shortcut and press F3 Formatting text Using styles is recommended Styles are central to using Writer Styles enable you to easily format your document consistently and to change the format with minimal effort A style is a named set of formatting options When you apply a style you apply a whole group of formats at the same time In addition styles are used by LibreOffice for many processes even if you are not aware of them For example Writer relies on heading styles or other styles you specify when it compiles a table of contents Manual formatting also called direct formatting overrides styles and you cannot get rid of the manual formatting by applying a style to it A To remove manual formatting select the text right click and choose Clear Direct Formatting from the pop up menu Writer defines several types of styles for different types of elements characters paragraphs pages frames and lists See Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates in this book and Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide Formatting
467. the subroutine named Main which is empty and does nothing The next subroutine EnterMyName contains the generated code Tp LibreOffice always creates an empty subroutine named Main when it creates a module There are advanced topics that are beyond the scope of this document but Knowing about them might be of interest e You can write a macro so that values can be passed to the subroutine The values are called arguments Recorded macros do not accept arguments e Another kind of subroutine is called a function A function is a subroutine that returns a value The keyword FUNCTION is used rather than SUB to define a function Generated macros are always of type SUB Defining variables using DIM You can write information on a piece of paper so that you can look at it later A variable like a piece of paper contains information that can be changed and read The DIM statement is similar to setting aside a piece of paper to be used to store a message or note The EnterMyName macro defines the variables document and dispatcher as type object Other common variable types include string integer and date A third variable named args1 is an array of property values A variable of type array allows a single variable to contain multiple values similar to storing multiple pages in a single book Values in an array are usually numbered starting from zero The number in the parentheses indicates the highest usable number to access a storage l
468. the word rather than completing the text as you type e Collect words when working on a document and then either save them for later use in other documents or select the option to remove them from the list when closing the document e Change the maximum number of words remembered for word completion and the length of the smallest words to be remembered e Delete specific entries from the word completion list e Change the key that accepts a suggested entry the options are Right arrow End key Return Enter and Space bar Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document Using AutoText Use AutoText to store text tables graphics and other items for reuse and assign them to a key combination for easy retrieval For example rather than typing Senior Management every time you use that phrase you can set up an AutoText entry to insert those words when you type sm and press F3 AutoText is especially powerful when assigned to fields See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for more information Creating AutoText To store some text as AutoText 1 Type the text into your document 2 Select the text 3 Choose Edit gt AutoText or press Ctr F3 92 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 4 Inthe AutoText dialog box type a name for the AutoText in the Name box Writer will suggest a one letter shortcut which you can change 5 Inthe large box to
469. them you may wish to consider the following points e More memory can make LibreOffice faster and more convenient for example more undo steps require more memory but the trade off is less memory available for other applications and you could run out of memory altogether e If your documents contain a lot of objects such as images or the objects are large LibreOffice s performance may improve if you increase the memory for LibreOffice or the memory per object If you find that objects seem to disappear from a document that contains a lot of them increase the number of objects in the cache The objects are still in the file even if you cannot see them on screen 36 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Undo Number of steps 100 Graphics cache Use for LibreOffice 20 MB Memory per object 5 2 S MB Remove from memory after 00 10 hh mm Cache for inserted objects Number of objects 20 LibreOffice Quickstarter Load LibreOffice during system start up Figure 22 Choosing Memory options for the LibreOffice applications e To load the Quickstarter an icon on the desktop or in the system tray when you start your computer select the option near the bottom of the dialog This makes LibreOffice start faster the trade off is LibreOffice uses some memory even when not being used This option called Enable systray quickstarter on Linux is not available on Mac OS X or an systems where the Quickstarter module has not be
470. thematical symbols is to right click on the equation editor This pops up the menu shown in Figure 278 The items in this menu correspond to those in the Elements window with some extra commands Unary Binary Operators Relations Set Operations Functions Operators Attributes Brackets a cdot b romans atimesb Others a p a over b a div b a b a circ b a wideslash b a widebslash b neg a a and b a or b Figure 278 Right click context menu Neither the window elements nor the context menu contain a complete list of commands For some seldom used commands you must always enter the markup A complete list of commands can be found in Appendix of the Math Guide Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 259 Markup You can type the markup directly in the equation editor For example you can type 5 times 4 to obtain 5x4 If you know the markup this can be the fastest way to enter a formula The formula markup resembles the way the formula reads in English Below is a short list of common equations and their corresponding markup Display Command Display Command a b a b Ja sart a a a 2 a a_n f f x dx int f x dx gt a sum a_n a lt b a lt b K infinity axb a times b Xy x cdot y Greek characters Greek characters a B y 0 etc are common in mathematical formulas These characters are
471. thods above opens the Insert Table dialog Figure 157 where you can select the required number of columns and rows Alternatively clicking on the black arrow next to the Table icon displays a graphic allowing you to drag and select the number of required rows and columns for your table x Insert Table Number of columns IS Number of rows 2 Figure 157 Creating a table with the Insert Table dialog Selecting from any of the styles in the Table Design section of the Tasks pane creates a table based on that style If you create a table by another method you can still apply a style of your choice later 170 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 With the table selected the Table toolbar should appear If it does not you can access it by selecting View gt Toolbars gt Table The Table toolbar offers many of the same icons as the table toolbar in Writer with the exception of functions like Sort and Sum for performing calculations For those functions you need to use a spreadsheet inserted from Calc discussed below After the table is created you can modify it in much the same way as you would modify a table in Writer adding and deleting rows and columns adjusting width and spacing adding borders background colors and so on Detailed information on working with tables and the Table Properties dialog can be found in Chapter 3 Adding and Formatting Text of the Impress Guide and Chapter 9 Working with Tables of the Writer Guide
472. though it can also perform some operations on raster graphics pixels Using Draw you can quickly create a wide variety of graphical images Vector graphics store and display an image as simple geometric elements such as lines circles and polygons rather than a collections of pixels points on the screen Vector graphics allow for easier storage and scaling of the image Draw is fully integrated into the LibreOffice suite and this simplifies exchanging graphics with all components of the suite For example if you create an image in Draw reusing it in a Writer document is as simple as copying and pasting the image You can also work with drawings directly from within Writer or Impress using a subset of the functions and tools from Draw The functionality of LibreOffice Draw is extensive and even though it was not designed to rival high end graphics applications it possesses more functionality than the drawing tools that are generally integrated with most office productivity suites A few examples of the drawing functions are layer management magnetic grid point system dimensions and measurement display connectors for making organization charts 3D functions that enable small three dimensional drawings to be created with texture and lighting effects drawing and page style integration and Bezier curves This chapter introduces some features of Draw and does not attempt to cover all of the Draw features See the Draw Guide and the app
473. ting documents saving documents and password protecting documents Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates covers how to create a document from a template Saving as a Microsoft Word file If you need to exchange documents with users of Microsoft Word who are unwilling or unable to receive odt files you can save a document as a Microsoft Word file 1 Important First save your document in the file format used by LibreOffice Writer odt If you do not any changes you made since the last time you saved will appear only in the Microsoft Word version of the document 2 Then choose File gt Save As On the Save As dialog in the File type or Save as type drop down menu select the type of Word format you need Click Save 5 Save as mka Documents LibreOffice Docs WriterGuide Date modified 0201WG3 Introduci OpenDocument 1 712 9 KB 15 03 2011 16 42 52 Ld 0O202WG3 SettingU OpenDocument 1 697 2 KB 15 02 2011 11 33 12 0202WG3 SettingU OpenDocument 1 680 9 KB 12 02 2011 07 34 11 O203WG3 Working OpenDocument 1 1 14 MB 12 02 2011 07 33 38 O204WG3 Formatti OpenDocument 1 63 MB 12 02 2011 07 34 55 0205WG3 PrintingE OpenDocument 1 764 0 KB 12 02 2011 07 35 15 O206WG3 Introduc OpenDocument 1 837 6 KB 12 02 2011 07 35 31 0207 WG3 Working OpenDocument 1 692 9 KB 31 01 2011 14 45 34 0207WG3 Working OpenDocument 1 694 1 KB 12 02 2011 07 35 43 S O27 0RWG3 Workinal OnenNaciument 1 1 10 MR 17 07 7011 7 36 05
474. ting the contents of the header or footer The header or footer of a Calc spreadsheet has three columns for text Each column can have different contents To set the contents of the header or footer click the Edit button in the header or footer dialog shown in Figure 136 to display the dialog shown in Figure 137 Header Page Style Default a Left area Center area Right area Company Name sheet 10 29 2010 10 15 29 Cancel Header Customized x Custom header A E E E B Note Use the buttons to change the font or insert field commands such as date time etc Figure 137 Edit contents of header or footer Areas Each area in the header or footer is independent and can have different information in it Header You can select from several preset choices in the Header drop down list or specify a custom header using the buttons below the area boxes To format a footer the choices are the same Custom header Click in the area Left Center Right that you want to customize then use the buttons to add elements or change text attributes A Opens the Text Attributes dialog Inserts the total number of pages Inserts the File Name field oro See Inserts the Sheet Name field Inserts the Time field Ty Inserts the current page number Inserts the Date field 148 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impres
475. tion only Workspace The Workspace normally in the center has five tabs Normal Outline Notes Handout and Slide Sorter Figure 139 These five tabs are called View buttons The Workspace below the View buttons changes depending on the chosen view The workspace views are described in detail on page 154 152 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Figure 139 Workspace tabs Toolbars Many toolbars can be used during slide creation they can be displayed or hidden by clicking View gt Toolbars and selecting from the menu You can also select the icons that you wish to appear on each toolbar For more information refer to Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice Many of the toolbars in Impress are similar to the toolbars in Draw Refer to the Draw Guide for details on the functions available and how to use them Status bar The Status bar located at the bottom of the Impress window contains information that you may find useful when working on a presentation For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this guide and Chapter 1 Introducing Impress in the Impress Guide The sizes are given in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the ruler units This unit is defined in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice Impress gt General Slide Number Zoom Slider Y TextEdit Paragraph 2 Row 2 Column 20 Ta 1 38
476. toolbar customizations in templates see Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for more information Creating a template using a wizard You can use wizards to create templates for letters faxes agendas presentations and Web pages For example the Fax Wizard guides you through the following choices e Type of fax business or personal e Document elements like the date subject line business fax salutation and complementary close e Options for sender and recipient information business fax e Text to include in the footer business fax To create a template using a wizard 1 From the main menu choose File gt Wizards gt type of template required Untitled 1 LibreOffice Writer Eile Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window H LI New pe ABC g 2 Open Cirl O E i imes New Roman 12 Recent Documents L Wizards Letter E Close 5 Fax i e Agenda fl Save As Ctrl Shift S Presentation g AJ Lar FA i not A TS Cave Ctrit S e Web Page Dialaar nreloac Document Converter a Euro Converter a Address Data Source 1 Ps eee VES S amp Export Export as PDF Figure 57 Creating a template using a wizard 68 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 2 Follow the instructions on the pages of the wizard This process is slightly different for each type of template but the format is very similar 3 Inthe last sectio
477. tools for formatting graphics when the cursor is in text the tools are for formatting text 22 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Displaying or hiding toolbars To display or hide toolbars choose View gt Toolbars then click on the name of a toolbar in the list An active toolbar shows a checkmark beside its name Tear off toolbars are not listed in the View menu Submenus and tear off toolbars Toolbar icons with a small triangle to the right will display submenus tear off toolbars and other ways of selecting things depending on the icon Figure 3 shows a tear off toolbar from the Drawing toolbar Tear off toolbars can be floated or docked along an edge of the screen or in one of the existing toolbar areas To move a floating tear off toolbar drag it by the title bar as shown in Figure 5 Flowchart Tx ESFE TEY Fvetiv EEFE sa OUEBOGD Ovaro xoAVED XOaVaD es Q eaaq E P krl Click here and drag Toolbar tears off and floats Figure 3 Example of a tear off toolbar Moving toolbars To move a docked toolbar place the mouse pointer over the toolbar handle the small vertical bar to the left of the toolbar hold down the left mouse button drag the toolbar to the new location and then release the mouse button Figure 4 To move a floating toolbar click on its title bar and drag it to a new location Figure 5 Handles of docked toolbars Edit View Insert For BaH B
478. top of the workspace One slide set multiple presentations In many situations you may find that you have more slides than the time available to present them or you may want to provide a rapid overview without dwelling on the details Rather than having to create a new presentation you can use two tools that Impress offers hiding slides and custom slide shows To hide a slide right click on the slide thumbnail either in the Slide pane or in the Workspace area If you are using the Slide Sorter view and choose Hide Slide from the pop up menu Hidden slides are marked by a slashed slide number If you want to reorder the presentation choose Slide Show gt Custom Slide Show Click on the New button to create a new sequence of slides and save it You can have as many slide shows as you want from a single slide set Slide transitions Slide transition is the animation that is played when a slide is changed for the next slide in the presentation You can configure the slide transition from the Slide Transition drawer in the Tasks pane Select the desired transition the speed of the animation and whether the transition should happen when you click the mouse preferred or automatically after a certain number of seconds Click Apply to all slides unless you prefer to have different transitions in the presentation The Slide transition section has a very useful choice Automatic preview Select its checkbox and when you make any changes in a
479. ts Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt and pot Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 2010 pptx pptm potx potm StarDraw and Starlmpress sda sdd sdp and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop uof CGM Computer Graphics Metafile cgm Portable Document Format pdf Opening graphic files In addition to OpenDocument formats odg and otg Draw 3 can open the formats used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxd and std and the following graphic formats BMP JPEG JPG PCX PSD SGV WMF DXF MET PGM RAS SVM XBM EMF PBM PLT SDA TGA XPM EPS PCD PNG SDD TIF TIFF GIF PCT PPM SGF VOR Opening formula files In addition to OpenDocument Formula odf files Math 3 can open the format used by OpenOffice org 1 x sxm StarMath smf and MathML mml files When opening a Word document that contains an embedded equation editor object if the option for it MathType to LibreOffice Math or reverse is checked in Tools gt Options gt Load Save gt Microsoft Office the object will be automatically converted to an LibreOffice Math object Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 373 File formats LibreOffice can save to Saving in an OpenDocument format guarantees the correct rendering of the file when it is transferred to another person or when the file is re opened with a later version of LibreOffice or with another program It is strongly recommended that you use OpenDocument as the default file formats Howe
480. ts are given in the Calc Guide Adding images to a document Images can be added to a document in several ways by inserting an image file directly from a graphics program or a scanner or from the LibreOffice Gallery Inserting an image file When the image is in a file stored on the computer you can insert it into an LibreOffice document using either of the following methods Drag and drop 1 Open a file browser window and locate the image you want to insert 2 Drag the image into the LibreOffice document and drop it where you want it to appear A faint vertical line marks where the image will be dropped This method embeds saves a copy of the image file in the document To link the file instead of embedding it hold down the Contro Shift keys while dragging the image Insert Picture dialog 1 Click in the LibreOffice document where you want the image to appear 2 Choose Insert gt Picture gt From File from the menu bar 3 On the Insert Picture dialog Figure 313 notice the two options at the bottom left Preview and Link Choose Preview to view a thumbnail of the selected image on the right so you can verify that you have the correct file See page 299 for the use of Link 4 Navigate to the file to be inserted select it and click Open If you choose the Link option a message box appears when you click Open The message states that the picture will not be stored with the document but only referenced as a link and a
481. tten to be more usable e Application color settings Tools gt Options gt Appearance now have correct color previews for Automatic colors e Moved context sensitive toolbars to the bottom to prevent them from overlaying important parts of the document e The Insert Movie and Sound dialog now has a Link checkbox enabling the embedding of media files into ODF package based documents Writer e Better header footer handling easily add header or footers quickly edit or remove headers and footers without going through page styles formatting e New faster built in grammar checker for English and several other languages Reworked grammar checking dialog better shows the error help e Word count dialog updates as you type e Improved font hinting for high quality docs e Layout fixes including numbering when importing DOC DOCX and RTF files for layout compatibility with Microsoft Word and tab stops that fall into margins e Auto generated tables of contents now contain hyperlinks to the relevant pages by default 14 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Support for comments export import in Office Open XML docx documents Label printing positioning fixed Many new typographic features New multi line input bar Supports 10 000 sheets and improved performance for a lot of sheet operations New option to specify the initial number of sheets in new documents New Calc Functions BITAND BITOR BITXOR BITRSHIFT and BITLSHI
482. ttes files with the file extension soc For example web soc is a color palette that is adapted to creating drawings for placing in web pages These colors will display correctly on workstations with screens capable of at least 256 colors The color selection box also lets you individually change any color by modifying the numerical values in the fields provided to the right of the color palette You can use the color schemes known as CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black or RGB Red Green Blue Click on the Edit button to open the Color dialog where you can set individual colors See Color options in Chapter 2 Setting Up LibreOffice in this guide For a more detailed description of color palettes and their options see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks in the Draw Guide Drawing basic shapes Draw provides a wide range of shapes located in palettes accessed from the Drawing toolbar Figure 169 These tools are described from left to right on the Drawing toolbar in Table 3 This section describes only a few of the basic shapes which are treated as objects in Draw including text See the Draw Guide for a complete description of the shapes available Please note that some of the icons on the Drawing toolbar will change according to the shape that has been selected from the choice available Available tools are indicated by a small triangle or arrow to the right of the icon 186 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Table 3 Basic d
483. tting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 I P l a J il T i J 7 F i z r j m S ee al F mi aai T a p f nls j P 7 i pi p E f p p7 i ate ti ss E C aetis east ar i Belton I Ga Piat Bago i J I Fon May 25 2007 E i f Fe oo lie Meals _ ny snacks mG wise Notes Me signi P a p d rE D O Ra ao Pi Lf AA Anaidia is eeohis eaS Noe Snack Cast pentia DH fe 00 Sed E a a 00 Pen ae IF a LA Dan i A 4 rsa id z 7 i P i Paym v ent F I f F f at il j Ey Y T F i f Fi J J F I li J ces 13 00 Kevin T pee 7 I a e any Pi Pi z a a i 7 ray i f iis p 4 Y an r om m 1 a 7 i ri a OS he ee en ORS ee cn ORS T r Ea Fuel Data Pal 3 d ae Fuel Gost Fuel quantity Odometer Payment Type T ved _ Friday May 25 2007 16 00 14 690 704 2 Kevin site t Friday May 25 2007 57 00 6 430 778 7 Dan SH dJa B j P pas ee Record 1 of 2 ico OE 7 i y Paa 4 7 y Fa n i y Poi EN Fos El a Ki Fa i j Y Pad z z 3 iy Pad q 3 a Fod i 3 j i Poo Figure 247 Sample record of the Vacation form and sub form Creating queries Queries are used to get specific information from a database Query results are special tables within the database To demonstrate the use of queries we will use two different methods Using our CD Collection table we will create a list of albums by a particular artist We will do this using the Wizard The information we might want from the Fuel ta
484. ture 296 DIM 334 dispatch framework 338 dispatch helper 335 divide document into chapters 76 dockable window 24 document closing 32 create from template 66 creating 26 Opening 27 starting new 26 document status option 36 document views 82 Documentation 11 download updates automatically 46 drag and drop 298 Draw 210 toolbars 184 workspace 183 drawing arrows 188 banners 195 block arrows 194 connectors 192 curve 190 HTML export 210 polygon 190 rectangles 189 Squares 189 Drawing Object Properties toolbar 307 drawing objects 3D objects 209 grouping 308 properties 307 Drawing toolbar 307 drawing tools 306 duplication 206 dynamic gradients 206 E E mail options 54 e mailing Mail Merge Wizard 293 several recipients 293 Writer document as attachment 292 edit document properties before saving 48 editing data Calc 132 en dash and em dash 89 envelope printing 285 envelope printing 285 EPS images in PDF 288 equation numbering 271 equation editor 255 brackets 262 derivative markup 265 Elements window 257 Index 377 equations over more than one line 264 font size 268 formula layout 262 limits to sum integral 265 markup 260 matrix markup 263 right click menu 259 event handling 346 export directly as PDF 287 export HTML 51 exporting Flash 292 PDF 287 XHTML 292 extended tips 35 extension Report Builder 253 extensions 348 361 extensions and addons sources of 20 F fax icon adding to toolbar 357
485. tyles Deleting styles You cannot remove delete any of LibreOffice s predefined styles from a document or template even if they are not in use You can remove any user defined custom styles but before you do you should make sure the Styles are not in use in the current document If an unwanted style is in use you will want to replace it with a substitute style To delete unwanted styles right click on them one at a time in the Styles and Formatting window and click Delete on the pop up menu If the style is in use you receive a warning message Make sure the style is not in use before deletion Otherwise all objects with that A style will return to the default style and retain their formatting as manual formatting If the style is not in use you receive a confirmation message click Yes to delete the style Using a template to create a document To use a template to create a document 1 From the main menu choose File gt New gt Templates and Documents The Templates and Documents dialog opens 2 In the box on the left click the Templates icon if it is not already selected A list of template folders appears in the center box 3 Double click the folder that contains the template that you want to use A list of all the templates contained in that folder appears in the center box as shown in Figure 55 4 Select the template that you want to use You can either preview the selected template or view the tem
486. u add or delete text before the object Ungroup icon Ungroup the selected objects so you can manage them individually Group icon Group the selected objects so you can manage them as a single object 312 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Using menu options You can use some the choices on the Format menu to anchor align arrange and group selected Fontwork objects wrap text around them and flip them horizontally and vertically You can also right click on a Fontwork object and choose many of the same options from the pop up menu The pop up menu also provides quick access to the Line Area Text and Position and Size dialogs The Text dialog offers only a few options for Fontwork objects and is not discussed here On the Position and Size dialog you can enter precise values concerning size and position For more information on all of these menu options see the Draw Guide Using the 3D Settings toolbar If the selected Fontwork object is a 3 D object you can also use the options on the 3D Settings toolbar You can also change a 2 D Fontwork object into a 3 D object or change a 3 D object into a 2 D object by clicking the Extrusion On Off icon on the 3D Settings toolbar For more information see the Draw Guide 3D Settings er w BSE hb dI 9 wB a I I Extrusion Depth 3D On Off Direction Color Tilt Down Up Lighting Surface Left Right Figure 327 3D Settings toolbar Moving and resizing Fontwork object
487. u right click on the object a context menu Figure 199 opens that applies to the selected object This context menu provides access to the options available and allows you to change object attributes without having to open a dialog Menu entries with a small arrow on the right hand side contain a submenu Formatting lines and borders In LibreOffice the term ine indicates both a freestanding segment line outer edge of a shape border or an arrow In most cases the properties of the line you can modify are its style solid dashed invisible and so on its width and its color Select the line you need to format and then use the controls on the Line and Filling toolbar to change the most common options highlighted in Figure 200 Eeo cra eA cotor_o 0 _ Figure 200 Common line properties style color width If you need to fine tune the appearance of a line choose Format gt Line from the menu bar or right click on the line and select Line from the context menu or select the Line icon from the Line and Filling toolbar All of these methods open the Line dialog Figure 201 where you can set line properties This dialog consists of four pages Line Shadow Line Styles and Arrow Styles x Line Line properties _ Arrow styles Style Style Color Width MM Black c pw pw Width O Center O Center 0 04 CO Synchronize ends Transparency Cor
488. ure 292 9 Click OK to close the dialog 8 0 9 Edit Symbols Old symbol ALPHA Old symbol set Greek ly OK 5 A i A B I A E A H F A Cancel Ce fetafe e v s eo r e e o e x v e o yle elel Eea T ee eee Gr JE SE RES ES RIESE SESE AE SE See H R ki Fa u a F w T 4 7 Symbol ALPHA Symbol set Greek x ALPHA ALPHA Font Opensymbol S A a A Subset Basic Greek a 6 Typeface Standard kd Creek Creek Delete Modify Figure 290 Edit Symbols dialog Symbol prime ly Symbol set Special ALPHA prime Font DejaVu Sans m A G r gt Subset General punctuation Typeface Standard x Creek Special Delete Modify Add Figure 291 Edit Symbols dialog characters selected Now the Symbol set view area shows the new symbol It can be selected just like the other symbols either from here or by writing them directly into the equation editor in the form prime Symbols Greek or Special in contrast to commands are case sensitive lowercase uppercase A 274 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Numerous free fonts contain a great number of mathematical symbols The STIX1 font is worthy of special mention here It was developed specially for writing mathematical technical texts The DejaVu2 and Lucida fonts also have a wide range of symbols 0 20 Symbols Symbol set Special 7 on 93 gt amp mw 4 V gt f prime Figure 292
489. us Bar in Figure 75 but you can float it or dock it in another location For more information on floating and docking toolbars see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice m I re ae Page 12 32 O0oPageStyle English USA INSRT Figure 75 Docked position of Find toolbar To use the Find toolbar click in the box and type your search text then press Enter to find the next occurrence of that term Click the Find Next or Find Previous buttons as needed Using the Find amp Replace dialog To display the Find amp Replace dialog Figure 76 use the keyboard shortcut Ctr A t F or choose Edit gt Find amp Replace from the menu bar Optionally click the More Options button to expand the dialog the button changes to Fewer Options To use the Find amp Replace dialog 1 Type the text you want to find in the Search for box 2 To replace the text with different text type the new text in the Replace with box 3 You can select various options such as matching the case matching whole words only or doing a search for similar words 4 When you have set up your search click Find To replace the found text click Replace For more information on using Find amp Replace see the Writer Guide If you click Find All LibreOffice selects all instances of the search text in the document Similarly tf you click Replace All LibreOffice replaces all matches Use Replace All with caution otherwise you may end up with some hi
490. ut as four pages two high and two wide a scaling of 50 would print as one page both width and height are halved 144 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 e Fit print range s on number of pages defines exactly how many pages the printout will take up This option will only reduce a printout it will not enlarge it To enlarge a printout the reduce enlarge option must be used e Fit print range s to width height defines how high and wide the printout will be in pages Printing rows or columns on every page If a sheet is printed on multiple pages you can set up certain rows or columns to repeat on each printed page For example if the top two rows of the sheet as well as column A need to be printed on all pages do the following 1 Choose Format gt Print Ranges gt Edit On the Edit Print Ranges dialog type the rows in the text entry box under Rows to repeat For example to repeat rows 1 and 2 type 1 2 This automatically changes Rows to repeat from none to user defined Edit Print Ranges Xx Print range eS mm pone E Rows to repeat wer dened Columns to repeat none Figure 134 Specifying repeating rows 2 To repeat type the columns in the text entry box under Columns to repeat For example to repeat column A type A In the Columns to repeat list none changes to user defined 3 Click OK You do not need to select the entire range of the rows to be re
491. values directly into them or use the up and down arrows When the value has been entered use the Tab key to go to the next field e Clicking the up arrow increases the value and the down arrow decreases the value by one unit e These two arrows only change the numerals to the left of the decimal place e Numerals to the right of the decimal place must be changed by deleting them and typing the desired ones The Motel s Payment field is a drop down list If as in my case all of the elements of the list start with different letters typing the first letter selects the desired entry e If two or more elements of the list have the same first letter repeated typing of the first letter will cycle through these elements e When the selection is correct use the Tab key to go to the Misc field The rest of the fields of the main form are either numeric fields or drop down lists until we reach the Misc Notes field It is a text field Type anything you desire in this field just as you would any simple text editor Since the Tab key is used to move between fields it can not be used in a text field All spacing must be done by the spacebar Furthermore in text fields the Enter key acts only as a line break to move the cursor to the next line While the Enter key will move between non text fields it will not do so from a text field Use the Tab key instead If we did not have a subform for fuel data pressing the Tab key in the last fiel
492. ver you can save files in other formats if you wish When sharing a document that you do not expect or want the recipient to modify the safest option is to convert the document to PDF LibreOffice provides a very straightforward way to convert documents to PDF See Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E Mailing in this book Saving text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt ott and fodt Writer 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document sxw OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 6 0 95 and 97 2000 XP doc Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Word 2007 2010 XML docx Office Open XML Text docx Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 sdw StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 Template vor Text txt Text Encoded txt Unified Office Format text uot uof HTML Document OpenOffice org Writer html and htm DocBook xml AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw Encryption support within the Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP filter allows password protected Microsoft Word documents to be saved The rtf format is a common format for transferring text files between applications but you are likely to experience loss of formatting and images For this reason other formats should be used Saving spreadsheet files In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsh
493. view and accept or reject each change Right click on an individual change and choose Accept Change or Reject Change from the pop up menu or choose Edit gt Changes gt Accept or Reject to view the list of changes and accept or reject them Details are in the Writer Guide Not all changes are recorded For example changing a tab stop from align left to align right and changes in formulas equations or linked graphics are not recorded Using fields Fields are extremely useful features of Writer They are used for data that changes in a document such as the current date or the total number of pages and for inserting document properties such as name author and date of last update Fields are the basis of cross referencing see below automatic numbering of figures tables headings and other elements and a wide range of other functions far too many to describe here See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for details Linking to another part of a document If you type in cross references to other parts of a document those references can easily get out of date if you reorganize the order of topics add or remove material or reword a heading Writer provides two ways to ensure that your references are up to date by inserting links to other parts of the same document or to a different document e Hyperlinks e Cross references 104 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 The two methods have the same result
494. will open at the bottom of the screen and you can preview the media When an audio file is inserted the contents box will show a loudspeaker image In Linux based systems such as Ubuntu media files do not work straight out of the box You need to download the Java Media Framework API JMF and add the path to jmf jar to the Class Path in Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Java Adding graphics spreadsheets and other objects Graphics such as shapes callouts arrows and so on are often useful to complement the text on a slide These objects are handled much the same way as graphics in Draw For more information see Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw in the Draw Guide or Chapters 4 5 and 6 in the Impress Guide Spreadsheets embedded in Impress include most of the functionality of spreadsheets in Calc and are therefore capable of performing extremely complex calculations and data analysis If you need to analyze your data or apply formulas these operations are best performed in a Calc spreadsheet and the results displayed in an embedded Impress spreadsheet or even better in a native Impress table Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 171 Alternatively choose Insert gt Object gt OLE Object from the menu bar This opens a spreadsheet in the middle of the slide and the menus and toolbars change to those used in Calc so that you can start adding data though you may first need to resize the visible area on the slide
495. wizard allows you to create several types of standard web pages To use it 1 Choose File gt Wizards gt Web Page On the first page of the Wizard choose settings and click Next gt If this is your first web page the only choice is lt default gt Web Wizard Steps Introduction l Introduction This Web Wizard is to aid you in publishing documents on the Internet Documents It will convert the documents so that they can be viewed by a web browser In addition it Will generate a Table of Contents page with links For easy access bo the documents The Web Wizard will also allow you bo customize the design and layout of your web site You Will be able to keep the documents you have published on the web up to date and add or remove documents at any time Choose settings For the Web Wizard defaults wl 2 Choose or browse to the document you would like to format The Title Summary and Author information is picked up from the document s properties if necessary edit it Click Next gt Steps Select the documents you want to publish 1 Introduction Web site content Export to File Format ol 1765 CreatingWwebPages sx HTML ba 2 Documents 3 Main layout Document information Title 5 Style Creating Web Pages 6 Web site information Summary Fields to edit 4 Layout details 7e Preview Chapter Title Description tab gt Title Chanter SuhbhiHe leer CieFined Author Chapter 12
496. xcel and PowerPoint files open in PowerPoint You can use another method to open Microsoft Office files in LibreOffice and save in those formats from LibreOffice See Opening an existing document on page 27 for more information Using the Quickstarter under Windows The Quickstarter is an icon that is placed in the Windows system tray during system startup It indicates that LibreOffice has been loaded and is ready to use The Quickstarter loads library DLL files required by LibreOffice shortening the startup time for LibreOffice components If the Quickstarter is disabled see Reactivating the Quickstarter to enable it Using the Quickstarter icon Right click the Quickstarter icon in the system tray to open a pop up menu Figure 2 from which you can open a new document open the Templates and Documents dialog or choose an existing document to open You can also double click the Quickstarter icon to display the Templates and Documents dialog B Text Document Spreadsheet Presentation la Drawing Database L Formula From Template d Open Document Load LibreOtfice During System Start Up Exit Quickstarter Figure 2 Quickstarter pop up menu in Windows Disabling the Quickstarter To close the Quickstarter right click on the icon in the system tray and then click Exit Quickstarter on the pop up menu The next time the computer is restarted the Quickstarter will be loaded again To prevent Libr
497. y 5 Release the mouse button Deleting images from the Gallery To delete an image from a theme that you created 1 Right click on the name of the image file or its thumbnail in the Gallery 2 Click Delete on the pop up menu A message appears asking if you want to delete this object Click Yes Deleting the name of a file from the list in the Gallery does not delete the file from the hard disk or other location Adding a new theme to the Gallery To add a new theme to the Gallery 1 Click the New Theme button above the list of themes Figure 316 2 Inthe Properties of New Theme dialog click the General tab and type a name for the new theme 3 Click the Files tab and add images to the theme as described earlier Deleting a theme from the Gallery You can delete only themes that you have added to the Gallery you cannot delete any of the inbuilt themes To delete a theme from the Gallery 1 Go to Tools gt Gallery 2 Inthe left part of the Gallery select in the list the theme you wish to delete 3 Right click on the theme then click Delete on the pop up menu Location of the Gallery and the objects in it Graphics and other objects shown in the Gallery can be located anywhere on your computer s hard disk on a network drive or on a CD ROM Listings in the Gallery refer to the location of each object When you add graphics to the Gallery the files are not moved or copied only the location of each new objec
498. y is the opposite Lines will automatically be drawn at a multiple of 45 degrees unless the Shift key is pressed A Keeping the Ctrl key pressed while drawing a line enables the end of the line to snap to the nearest grid point Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 187 This is the default behavior of the Ctrl key However if the Snap to Grid option on the View gt Grid menu has been selected the Ctr key deactivates the snap to grid activity A Holding down the Alt key while drawing a line results in the line extending outwards symmetrically in both directions from the start point This lets you draw lines by starting from the middle of the line When a line is drawn it uses default attributes To change any of these attributes select the line by clicking on it then right click and select Line to open the Line dialog Figure 176 Line style line width and line color can also be changed using the controls in the Line and Filling toolbar at the top of the workspace x Line Line Shadow Line Styles Arrow Styles Line properties Arrow styles Style Style OS none c Enone c Color Width MM Black od 0 20cm B 0 20m f Width J Center Center 0 00m K Synchronize ends Transparency Corner style o F i Rounded Ad OK Cancel Help Reset Figure 176 Line dialog Drawing an arrow Arrows are drawn like lines In fact Draw classifies arrows as a subgroup of
499. y the settings 5 When done click the Save icon to save the image map to a file then click the X in the upper right corner to close the dialog C ImageMap Editor Bax v Buk Eo xe M Address http www libreoffice org Text PX a LibreOffice es panol The Document Foundation Portugues Francais Nederlands AAs http www libreottice org 0 00 cm 0 00 cm 24 97 cm x 9 95 cm Figure 318 The dialog to create or edit an image map The main part of the dialog shows the image on which the hotspots are defined A hotspot is identified by a line indicating its shape The toolbar at the top of the dialog contains the following tools e Apply button click this button to apply the changes e Load Save and Select icons e Tools for drawing a hotspot shape these tools work in exactly the same way as the corresponding tools in the Drawing toolbar Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 305 e Edit Move Insert Delete Points advanced editing tools to manipulate the shape ofa polygon hotspot Choose the Edit Points tool to activate the other tools e Active icon toggles the status of a selected hotspot between active and inactive e Macro associates a macro with the hotspot instead of just associating an hyperlink e Properties sets the hyperlink properties and adds the Name attribute to the hyperlink Below the toolbar specify for the selected hotspot e Address the address pointed to by the hy
500. yment fields were changed in step 2 but Misc Payment needs to be changed to 3 cm 1 2 inches 1 Right click Breakfast and choose Position and Size On the Position and Size dialog change Width to 2 cm 2 Repeat for the other listed controls using 3 cm for Misc Payment Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 229 When changing the position or size of an entire control use the Position and Size dialog or the drag and drop method When working with either the label or the field but not both at the same time you can use the Properties dialog to make these changes when you want to be exact However you need to be careful not to accidentally select the entire control for use with the Properties dialog or you will apply exactly the same values to both the label and field For example if you enter the values for a new position both the field and the label moves to the same position and the field is positioned on top of the label Then you will have to move each of them to where you really want them To open the Properties window right click a control and select Control from the pop up menu Or you can click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar Just be careful and use Contro Z to undo any mistakes you may make Detailed instructions on how to use the Properties window are given in the Base Guide Step 6 Change the Misc Notes field We want the Misc Notes control which has a field type of Memo to have a ve
501. you are going to upload pages to the Internet When you rest the mouse pointer on a hyperlink a help tip displays the absolute reference since LibreOffice uses absolute path names internally The complete path and address can only be seen when you view the result of the HTML export saving the spreadsheet as an HTML file by loading the HTML file as Text or by opening it with a text editor Creating hyperlinks When you type text Such as a website addresses or URL that can be used as a hyperlink and then press the spacebar or the Enter key LibreOffice automatically creates the hyperlink and applies formatting to the text usually a color and underlining If this does not happen you can enable this feature using Tools gt AutoCorrect Options gt Options and selecting the URL Recognition option 316 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 If you do not want LibreOffice to convert a specific URL to a hyperlink choose Edit gt Undo Insert from the menu bar or press Contro Z immediately after the formatting has been applied You can also place the cursor in the hyperlink right click and choose Remove Hyperlink To change the color of hyperlinks go to Tools gt Options gt LibreOffice gt Appearance scroll to Unvisited links and or Visited links pick the new colors and click OK Caution this will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of LibreOffice this may not be what you want In Writer and Calc but no
502. yperlink will open This applies to documents that open in a Web browser e Form specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a button Figure 330 shows a link formatted as a button A hyperlink button is a type of form control See Chapter 15 of the Writer Guide for more information 1 a J Authors 4 Figure 330 Authors hyperlink as button in Calc e Text specifies the text that will be visible to the user If you do not enter anything here LibreOffice uses the full URL or path as the link text Note that if the link is relative and you move the file this text will not change though the target will e Name is applicable to HTML documents It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attribute in the HTML code behind the hyperlink e Events button click this button to open the Assign Macro dialog and choose a macro to run when the link is clicked See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros for more information Editing hyperlinks To edit an existing link click anywhere in the link text and then click the Hyperlink icon S on the Standard toolbar or choose Edit gt Hyperlink from the menu bar or right click and choose Edit Hyperlink from the context menu The Hyperlink dialog opens Make your changes and click Apply If you need to edit several hyperlinks you can leave the Hyperlink dialog open until you have edited all of them Be sure to click Apply after each one When you are finished click Close The
503. ze will vanish Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 125 Splitting the screen Another way to change the view is by splitting the window also Known as splitting the screen The screen can be split either horizontally or vertically or both You can therefore have up to four portions of the spreadsheet in view at any one time Why would you want to do this Imagine you have a large spreadsheet and one of the cells has a number in it which is used by three formulas in other cells Using the split screen technique you can position the cell containing the number in one section and each of the cells with formulas in the other sections Then you can change the number in the cell and watch how it affects each of the formulas C Beta 3 2000 AQ 0 1000 Beta A0 1 AD 0 26880 Beta A1 1 A1 0 6562 Beta tA2 1 A2 0 7219 Heta As tl As 0 6424 Beta Aa A4dy 0 7351 Beta AS 1 A5 0 6231 Heta Ab1 AB 0 7515 BetatAr ti A7 0 5975 Heta aAs t1 Ag 0 7696 Beta Ag9 1 A9 0 5675 Beta tA10 1 A10 0 7654 Figure 112 Split screen example Splitting the screen horizontally To split the screen horizontally 1 Move the mouse pointer into the vertical scroll bar on the right hand side of the screen and place it over the small button at the top with the black triangle Immediately above this button you will see a thick black line i Figure 113 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar Split screen bar 2 Move th
504. zoom percentage of the Workspace displayed e Zoom percentage indicates the zoom percentage of the Workspace displayed Double clicking on zoom percentage opens the zoom and layout dialog e You can hide the information in the Status Bar by selecting View gt Status Bar from the main menu Navigator The Navigator displays all objects contained in a document It provides another convenient way to move around a document and find items in it To display the Navigator click its icon vA on the Standard toolbar choose View gt Navigator on the menu bar or press Ctr l Shift F5 The Navigator is more useful if you give your slides and objects pictures soreadsheets and so on meaningful names instead of leaving them as the default Slide 1 and Shape 2 x Navigator fa Shape 1 fa Shape v e Default Example fa Shape 1 fa Shape v a Shapes fa Shape 1 fe Shape fa Shape 3 SamplePresentation aa Figure 141 Navigator Workspace views Each of the workspace views is designed to ease the completion of certain tasks it is therefore useful to familiarize yourself with them in order to quickly accomplish those tasks Each Workspace view displays a different set of toolbars when selected These toolbar sets can be customized by going to View gt Toolbars then check or uncheck the toolbar you want to add or remove 154 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 5 Normal view Normal view is the main view for wor

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

gt-installation-operation - Kold  Connected Products  UR28M Operation Manual  K21-11  Anleitung als PDF  P370/P470 Keyless RF Scanners Product  CP-X880 et CP-X885  Mode d`emploi et conseils d`utilisation de la 510-T tank  Field oriented control of PMSM motor exploiting SLLIMM™ nano  Samsung 356 л. холодильник с нижней мороз. камерой RL53GYBIH Инструкция по использованию  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file